Sie sind auf Seite 1von 297

VERY IMPORTANT INSTRUCTIONS:

Kindly refer the official communication of the University in the


B.A. R&S (from III semester onwards) file .

APPENDIX –16 (R)

UNIVERSITY OF MADRAS

M.A. DEGREE COURSES

CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM


(w.e.f. 2008-2009)

SECOND YEAR
(i.e.III & IV SEMESTERS)

COURSE OF STUDY AND SCHEME OF EXAMINATION

NAME OF THE COURSES

1. M.A. APPLIED HISTORY


2. M.A. APPLIED SANSKRIT
3. M.A. COMMUNICATION
4. M.A. CORPORATE SOCIOLOGY
5. M.A. ENGLISH
6. M.A. ECONOMICS
7. M.A. F- ECONOMICS (BUSINESS ECONOMICS)
8. M.A. HISTORICAL STUDIES
9. M.A. HUMAN RESOURSE MANAGEMENT
10. M.A. HUMAN RIGHTS AND DUTIES EDUCATION
11. M.A. LABOUR MANAGEMENT
12. M.A. NATYA (FIVE YEAR INTEGRATED)*
13. M.A. PHILOSOPHY
14. M.A. POLITICAL SCIENCE
15. M.A. PUBLIC ADMINISTRATION

1
16. M.A. PUBLIC RELATIONS
17. M.A. SANSKRIT
18. M.A. SOCIOLOGY
19. M.A. TOURISM AND TRAVEL MANAGEMENT
20. MASTER OF SOCIAL WORK(MSW)

21. M.A. TAMIZHIAL

The scheme of examinations for different semesters shall be as follows:

Vide APPENDIX-B

2
APPENDIX-B
1. M.A. DEGREE COURSE IN APPLIED HISTORY

THIRD SEMESTER
MAX

Exam Duration HRS


MARKS

INST. HOURS
SEMESTER

CREDITS

EXTERNAL
COURSE
NAME OF COURSE
COMPONENTS
CIA

CORE India and Her Neighbours 6


III 4 3 25 75
PAPER IX Since 1947 HRS
History of World Civilization
CORE 6
(Excluding India) Medieval III 4 3 25 75
PAPER X HRS
and Modern period
CORE History of Europe from 6
III 4 3 25 75
PAPER XI A.D. 1789 to 1919 HRS
Historiography and Historical
6
ELECTIVE– III Methods III 3 3 25 75
HRS

EXTRA 6
Archives Keeping III 3 3 25 75
DISCIPLINARY- II HRS

SOFT SKILL III 2 40 60

** Internship will be carried out during the summer vacation of the first year and
marks should be sent to the University by the College and the same will be included
in the Third Semester Marks Statement.

3
FOURTH SEMESTER

Exam Duration HRS


MAX MARKS

INST. HOURS
SEMESTER

CREDITS

EXTERNAL
COURSE
NAME OF COURSE
COMPONENTS
CIA

History of Peasant
and Labour
CORE
Movements in India IV 6 HRS 4 3 25 75
PAPER XII
from AD 1900 to
1947
Development of
Science and
CORE
Technology in India IV 6 HRS 4 3 25 75
PAPER XIII
since AD 1947 –
2000
International
ELECTIVE-IV Relations since AD IV 6 HRS 3 3 25 75
1919 – 2000
Studies in Human
ELECTIVE – V IV 6 HRS 3 3 25 75
Rights

SOFT SKILL IV 2 40 60

PROJECT 8
IV
PLUS 20+20+60=100
VIVA VOCE

* Project: Internal - 20 Marks 2 out of 3 presentations - 20 marks


Viva - 20 marks
Project Report - 60 marks

4
2. M.A. DEGREE COURSE IN APPLIED SANSKRIT
THIRD SEMESTER

SEMESTER

EXAM. HRS.
INST. HOURS

CREDITS
MAX
COMPONENTSCOURSE
MARKS

NAME
OF

EXT.
COURSE

CIA

CORE Paper 11 : III 5 HRS 4 3 25 75


Introduction to
Indian
Architecture – I
CORE Paper 12 : III 5 HRS 4 3 25 75
Agamas – I
CORE Paper 13 : III 5 HRS 4 3 25 75
Introduction to
Ayurveda
Elective Paper 14 : III 5 HRS 3 3 25 75
Principles of
Indian Astronomy
and Mathematics –
II
CORE Paper 15 : III 5 HRS 4 3 25 75
Systems of Indian
Philosophy
Extra III 3 Hrs 3 3 25 75
Disciplinary
-II
Soft Skills – III 2 Hrs 2 - 40 60
III

** Internship will be carried out during the summer vacation of the first year and
marks should be sent to the University by the College and the same will be included
in the Third Semester Marks Statement.

5
FOURTH SEMESTER

INST. HOURS

CREDITS
COMPONENTSCOURSE

SEMESTER

HRS.EXAMDURATOON
MAX
MARKS

NAME
OF

EXT.
COURSE

CIA

CORE Paper 16 : Agamas II IV 6 HRS 4 3 25 75


Paper 17 : IV 5 HRS 3 3 25 75
ELECTIVE – Indian Fine
I Arts – I
Paper 18 : IV 5 HRS 3 3 25 75
ELECTIVE – Indian Fine
II Arts - II
Paper 19: IV 3 HRS 4 3 25 75
CORE Introduction to
Indian Architecture –
II
CORE Paper 20 : IV 3 HRS 4 3 25 75
Principles of
Management
Soft 2 2 - 40 60
Skills –IV

6
3. M.A. DEGREE COURSE IN COMMUNICATION

HOURSINST.

EXAM. HRS.
CREDITS
Semester III NAME MAX
OF MAR
COURSE KS

CIA EXT.
Core 9 Communication Research 4 4 3 25 75
Method I
Core 10 Film Studies 4 4 3 25 75
Core 11 Broadcast Production 3 3 3 25 75
Techniques II
Elective 5 Technical Communication 3 3 3 25 75
Elective 6 Public Relations & 3 3 3 25 75
Corporate Communication
Soft Skills Soft Skills 2 2 3 40 60
Soft Skills Internship 2 3 40 60

** Internship will be carried out during the summer vacation of the first year and
marks should be sent to the University by the College and the same will be included in
the Third Semester Marks Statement.

Semester IV
Core 12 Communication Research 3 3 3 25 75
Method II
Core 13 Cross-Cultural 3 3 3 25 75
Communication
Core14 Research Project Work 6 6 3 25 75
Core 15 Practice Journal 3 3 3 25 75
Core 16 Media Practice (Internship 2 3 3 25 75
II)
Elective 7 Media Analysis Technique 2 2 3 25 75

Soft Skills Soft Skills 2 2 3 40 60


Total Credits 90

7
4. M.A. DEGREE COURSE IN CORPORATE SOCIOLOGY

THIRD SEMESTER

Name of Courses

Exam Hrs
Credits
Max.Marks
Course Components

Inst.Hours
Semester

CIA

External
CORE Human Resource III 6 HRS 4 3 25 75
Development -I
CORE Customer Relationship III 6 HRS 4 3 25 75
Management
CORE Marketing and III 6 HRS 4 3 25 75
Consumer Analysis
CORE Industrial Relations and III 6 HRS 4 3 25 75
Personnel Management
Elective II Change Management III 6 HRS 4 3 25 75

Extra Business Ethics and III 6 HRS 4 3 25 75


Disciplinary Corporate Governance
Elective II
Soft Skill-III III 3HRS 2 3 40 60

** Internship will be carried out during the summer vacation of the first year and
marks should be sent to the University by the College and the same will be included
in the Third Semester Marks Statement.

FOURTH SEMESTER
Exam Hrs
Credits

Max.Marks
Course Components

CIA
Name of Courses

Inst.Hours
Semester

External

CORE Human Resource IV 6 HRS 4 3 25 75


Development –II
CORE Organizational IV 6 HRS 4 3 25 75
Behaviour

8
CORE Project cum Viva IV - 8 - 25 75
Elective- III Total Quality IV 6 HRS 4 3 25 75
Management
Soft Skill-IV 3HRS 2 3 40 60

9
5. M.A. DEGREE COURSE IN ENGLISH

THIRD SEMESTER

MAX MARKS

INST. HOURS
SEMESTER

CREDITS

EXTERNAL
COURSE

HRS
NAME OF COURSE
COMPONENTS
CIA

PAPER 9
CORE III 6 HRS 4 3 25 75
Shakespeare Studies
PAPER 10
CORE English Language and III 6 HRS 4 3 25 75
Linguistics
PAPER 11
CORE Literary Criticism and III 6 HRS 4 3 25 75
Literary Theory
Literature, Analysis,
Elective within the
Approaches and III 4 HRS 3 3 25 75
Department /ED
Applications

Copy Editing III 4 HRS 3 3 25 75


Elective /ED

Soft Skills III 4 HRS 2 3 40 60

Internship III 2

** Internship will be carried out during the summer vacation of the first year and
marks should be sent to the University by the College and the same will be included
in the Third Semester Marks Statement.

10
FOURTH SEMESTER
MAX
MARKS
COMPONENTS

INST. HOURS
SEMESTER

CREDITS
COURSE

EXTERNAL
HRS
NAME OF COURSE
CIA

PAPER 12
CORE Twentieth Century III 6 HRS 4 3 25 75
Poetry

PAPER 13
CORE Writings by and on IV 6 HRS 4 3 25 75
Women
PAPER 14
CORE IV 6 HRS 4 3 25 75
General Essay

Soft Skills IV 4 3 40 60
Elective
within the
Film Studies IV 4 HRS 3 3 20 80
Department
/ED
--- 150 Project *
PROJECT
6 50 Viva
PLUS PAPER 15
IV ----- Voce
VIVA
(Viva – fully
VOCE
external)

*
Project: Internal - 50 Marks
External – 100 Marks
60 Credits to secure from Core Papers in all the four semesters. Minimum
total credits 90 credits for securing a Post-graduate degree in a given subject.

S.No. Questions Marks Total Mrks


classification
1. Section A – 10 Questions out of 12 10 x 1 10
2. Section B – 5 Questions out of 7 5x5 25

3. Section C – 4 Questions out 6 4 x 10 40

11
III. Components for CIA :
A

Papers Test Seminar Assignment Quiz Term


Paper
9 b Copy Editing 5 5 5 5
14 b Technical Writing 5 5 5 5
17 a In-house Magazine 20
18 b Film Studies 5 5 5 5

B
For remaining papers, excepting the project, the marks may be awarded as follows:

4 4 4 4 4

(All items are not compulsory; Each Board to decide on components and marks
weightages)

12
6. M.A. DEGREE COURSE IN ECONOMICS

THIRD SEMESTER
MAX
MARKS

INST. HOURS

EXAM. HRS
SEMESTER

CREDITS
COURSE NAME OF
COMPONENTS COURSE

EXT.
CIA

CORE- Macro
Economic PAPER 11 III 6 HRS 4 3 25 75
Theory -I
CORE – Public
PAPER 12 III 6 HRS 4 3 25 75
Economics –I
CORE – International
PAPER 13 III 6 HRS 4 3 25 75
Economics -I
Elective – III PAPER 14 III 6 HRS 4 3 25 75

Extra Disciplinary - II PAPER 15 III 6 HRS 4 3 25 75

Soft Skill -III - III - 2 - 40 60

** Internship will be carried out during the summer vacation of the first year and
marks should be sent to the University by the College and the same will be included
in the Third Semester Marks Statement.

13
FOURTH SEMESTER
MAX
MARKS

INST. HOURS

EXAM. HRS
SEMESTER

CREDITS
COURSE NAME OF
COMPONENTS COURSE

EXT.
CIA

CORE- Macro
Economic PAPER 16 IV 6 HRS 4 3 25 75
Theory -II
CORE-Public
PAPER 17 IV 6 HRS 4 3 25 75
Economics –II
CORE-
International PAPER 18 IV 6 HRS 4 3 25 75
Economics -II
* Internal –
40
PROJECT PAPER 19
Viva – 40
PLUS & PAPER IV ----- 8 ---
Project
VIVA VOCE 20
Report 120
Total (200)
In lieu of Project,
PAPER
Two Core
19
courses * IV 3 HRS 4 3 25 75
Financial
Economics

Organizational PAPER 3 HRS 4 3 25 75


IV
Behaviour 20

Soft Skill - IV - IV - 2 - 40 60

Project: Internal - 40 Marks – 2 out of 3 presentations


(Break up for Viva - 40 Marks
200 Marks) Project Reports - 120 Marks
* For IDE Papers 19 & 20 – Economics of Human Resource Development - I & II

14
A minimum of 70 Credits from Core Papers including soft skills and 20
credits from elective courses including extra disciplinary courses in all the four
semesters. A minimum total of 90 credits is necessary for securing a Post-graduate
degree in a given subject.

Note: i. Extra Disciplinary courses are considered to be courses which


are not offered in the same discipline.
ii. Elective Courses are offered as related complementary courses of the
disciplines offered in the same department or related departments.

6 & 7. M.A. DEGREE COURSE IN Branch III –Economics and


F-Business Economics

The following are the Core papers (13 x 4 = 52 credits)

1. Micro Economic Theory - I


2. Micro Economic Theory - II
3. Indian Economic Development and Policy -I
4. Indian Economic Development and Policy -II
5. Research Methodology
6. Statistics for Analysis
7. Monetary Economics
8. Macro Economic Theory –I
9. Macro Economic Theory –II
10. Public Economics –I
11. Public Economics –II
12. International Economics –I
13. International Economics –II
13×4=52 Credits
Project. 8 Credits
60 Credits

In lieu of Project work, the following two core papers are prescribed for IDE
students.
1. Economics of Human Resource Development- I …4 Credits
2. Economics of Human Resource Development –II…4 Credits
Total = 8 Credits
The following are the semesterwise Elective and Extra disciplinary courses (5×4=20
Credits)
Branch –III- Economics
II – Year III- Semester

Paper 14 (Elective -III) 1. Principles of Management –II


(Any one course) 2. Comparative Economic System –II
3. Mathematics for Economists –II
4. Environmental Economics –II

15
III- Semester

Paper 15 1. Economics of Development-II


(Extra Disciplinary II) 2. Economics of Human Resource Development –II
(Any one course) 3. Entrepreneurial Development

Core Papers :52 Credits


Elective Papers :20 Credits
Project Report/Papers :08 Credits
Soft Skill and Internship :10 Credits

Total :90 Credits

Core courses including soft skill (60 + 10) …70 Credits


Elective courses including Extra disciplinary courses …20 Credits
Total …90 Credits

Branch –III-F Bussiness Economics

II – Year III- Semester

Paper 14 (Elective -III) 1. Principles of Management –II


(Any one course) 2. Mathematics for Economists –II
3. Environmental Economics –II
4. Management Accounting -II

III- Semester

Paper 15 1. Economics of Development-II


(Extra Disciplinary II) 2. Entrepreneurial Development
(Any one course)

Core Papers :52 Credits


Elective Papers :20 Credits
Project Report/Papers :08 Credits
Soft Skill and Internship :10 Credits

Total :90 Credits

Core courses including soft skill (60 + 10) …70 Credits


Elective courses including Extra disciplinary courses …20 Credits
Total …90 Credits

16
7. M.A. Branch III F Business Economics

THIRD SEMESTER

HRSEXAM DURATION
MAX
MARKS

INST. HOURS
SEMESTER

CREDITS

EXTERNAL
COURSE NAME OF
COMPONENTS COURSE
CIA

CORE- Macro
Economic PAPER 11 III 6 HRS 4 3 25 75
Theory -I
CORE – Public
PAPER 12 III 6 HRS 4 3 25 75
Economics –I
CORE –
International PAPER 13 III 6 HRS 4 3 25 75
Economics -I
Elective III PAPER 14 III 6 HRS 4 3 25 75

Extra disciplinary –
PAPER 15 III 6 HRS 4 3 25 75
II

Soft Skill – III - III - 2 - 40 60

** Internship will be carried out during the summer vacation of the first year
and marks should be sent to the University by the College and the same will
be included in the Third Semester Marks Statement.

17
FOURTH SEMESTER

HRSEXAM DURATION
MAX MARKS

INST. HOURS
SEMESTER

CREDITS

EXTERNAL
COURSE NAME OF
COMPONENTS COURSE
CIA

CORE- Macro
Economic PAPER 16 IV 6 HRS 4 3 25 75
Theory -II
CORE-Public
PAPER 17 IV 6 HRS 4 3 25 75
Economics –II
CORE-
International PAPER 18 IV 6 HRS 4 3 25 75
Economics -II
* Internal- 40
Viva- 40
PROJECT PAPER 19 Project Report
PLUS & PAPER IV ----- 8 --- -120
VIVA VOCE 20 Total (200)

In lieu of 3 HRS 4 3 25 75
Project, Two PAPER IV
Core courses – 19
Financial
Economics
3 HRS 4 3 25 75
Organizational PAPER
IV
Behaviour 20

2 40 60
Soft Skill IV

* Project: Internal - 40 Marks – 2 out of 3


presentations
(Break up for Viva - 40 Marks
200 Marks) Project Report - 120 Marks

18
8. M.A. DEGREE COURSE IN HISTORICAL STUDIES

SECOND YEAR THIRD SEMESTER

MAX

Exam Duration HRS


MARKS
COMPONENTS

INST. HOURS
SEMESTER

CREDITS
COURSE

EXTERNAL
NAME OF COURSE
CIA

History of World Civilizations


CORE
(Excluding India) – Ancient III 6 HRS 4 3 25 75
PAPER IX
period
CORE History of Europe A.D.1789 to
III 6 HRS 4 3 25 75
PAPER X 1919
Historiography and Historical
CORE
Methods III 6 HRS 4 3 25 75
PAPER XI

Development of Science and


ELECTIVE III III 6 HRS 3 3 25 75
Technology A.D.1947 – 2000
EXTRA
DISCIPLINARY Women Studies III 6 HRS 3 3 25 75
- II

SOFT SKILL III 2 40 60

** Internship will be carried out during the summer vacation of the first year and
marks should be sent to the University by the College and the same will be included
in the Third Semester Marks Statement.

19
FOURTH SEMESTER

Exam Duration HRS


MAX MARKS

INST. HOURS
SEMESTER

CREDITS
COURSE

EXTERNAL
NAME OF COURSE
COMPONENTS
CIA

History of World
CORE Civilizations (Excluding
IV 6 HRS 4 3 25 75
PAPER XII India) Medieval and
Modern period)

CORE International Relations


IV 6 HRS 4 3 25 75
PAPER XIII from A.D. 1919 to 2000
Tourism Principles and
ELECTIVE-IV IV 6 HRS 3 3 25 75
Practices

ELECTIVE -V Archives Keeping IV 6 Hrs 3 3 25 75

SOFT SKILL IV 2 40 60

CORE
PROJECT
IV ----- 8 --- 20+20+60=100*
PLUS
VIVA VOCE

20
9. M.A. DEGREE COURSE IN HUMAN RESOURCE
MANAGEMENT

THIRD SEMESTER
COURSE COMPONENTS

INST. HOURS

CREDITS

EXAM. HRS
SEMESTER
MAX
MARKS

EXTERNAL
NAME OF COURSE
CIA

CORE PAPER 13 - Human III 4 HRS 4 3 25 75


Resources
Development
CORE PAPER 14 - Industrial III 5 HRS 5 3 25 75
Relations
CORE PAPER 15 - III 4 HRS 4 3 25 75
Manpower
Development for
Technological Change
ELEC PAPER 16 - Labour III 4 HRS 4 3 25 75
TIVE Welfare
ELEC PAPER 17 - III 3 HRS 3 3 25 75
TIVE Computer
(Extra Languages for
Discipl Management
inary)
SOFT- PAPER 18 – III 2HRS 2 3 40 60
SKILL SOFT SKILL III
SOFT- PAPER 19 – III --- 2 --- --- 100
SKILL INTERNSHIP

** Internship will be carried out during the summer vacation of the first year and
marks should be sent to the University by the College and the same will be included
in the Third Semester Marks Statement.

21
FOURTH SEMESTER
COURSE COMPONENTS

CREDITS

EXAM DURATION HRS


SEMESTER

INST. HOURS
MAX
MARKS

EXTERNAL
NAME OF COURSE
CIA

CORE PAPER 20 - Total IV 4HRS 4 3 25 75


Quality Management
ELEC PAPER 21 - IV 3HRS 3 3 25 75
TIVE Entrepreneurship and
Management in Small
Business
ELEC PAPER 22 - Business IV 4HRS 4 3 25 75
TIVE Policy and Strategic
Management
CORE PAPER 23 – IV --- 8 --- --- 200
PROJECT WORK &
VIVA – VOCE
SOFT- PAPER 24 – III 2HRS 2 3 40 60
SKILL SOFT SKILL IV

22
10. M.A. DEGREE COURSE IN HUMAN RIGHTS AND DUTIES

THIRD SEMESTER
Course components
Max. Marks

Exam Hours
Inst. Hrs.
Credits
Subjects Ext. Int.
Total
marks marks

Core Human Rights Violations


5 4 3 75 25 100
Courses and Remedies
Human Rights and
5 4 3 75 25 100
Environment
Human Rights and NGO’s
5 4 3 75 25 100
and Media
Human Rights and Duties 5 4 3 75 25 100
Elective
Introduction to Intellectual
Subject – Property Rights 5 3 3 75 25 100
VI
Extra
disciplin Basic Computer Education 5 3 3 75 25 100
ary
Soft
3 2 3 60 40 100
Skill-III

** Internship will be carried out during the summer vacation of the first year
and marks should be sent to the University by the College and the same will be
included in the Third Semester Marks Statement.

23
FOURTH SEMESTER

Course components Max. Marks

Exam Hours
Inst. Hrs.
Credits
Subjects Ext. Int.
Total
marks marks

Human Rights and


Core Contemporary Issues 6 4 3 75 25 100
Courses
Human Rights Act 1993 6 4 3 75 25 100
Human Rights and New
6 4 3 75 25 100
World Order
Human Rights and
6 4 3 75 25 100
Community Health
Elective
Human Rights, Science
Subject - 6 3 3 75 25 100
And Technology Law
VII
Soft
3 2 3 60 40 100
Skill-IV

24
11. M.A. DEGREE COURSE IN LABOUR MANAGEMENT

THIRD SEMESTER

CreditsNo. of

Total
(Hours)Duration

External
Internal
Paper Human Resource Management 3 4 25 75 100

11
Paper Research Methodology and 3 4 25 75 100
Statistical Methods
12
Paper Labour Laws relating to working 3 4 25 75 100
and service conditions
13
Paper Elective IV – Entrepreneurial 3 3 25 75 100
Development
14
Paper Elective V - Advanced Human 3 3 25 75 100
Process Lab
15
Paper Field Work and Field Visits 3 4 20 80 100
(Extra Disciplinary)
16
Soft Skill - III Managerial Skill 3

25
** Internship will be carried out during the summer vacation of the first year and
marks should be sent to the University by the College and the same will be
included in the Third Semester Marks Statement.

FOURTH SEMESTER

Paper Human Resource 3 4 25 75 100


Development
17
Paper Total Quality Management 3 4 25 75 100

18
Paper Social Security Legislation 3 4 25 75 100
relating to Labour
19
Paper Elective VI - Corporate Social 3 3 25 75 100
Responsibility
20
Paper Elective VII - Human 3 3 25 75 100
Resource Management in
21 Service Industries
Paper Project Work (Extra 3 4 20 80 100
Disciplinary)
22
Soft Skill - IV Computing Skill 3

26
12. M.A. DEGREE COURSE IN NATYA
(FIVE YEAR INTEGRATED)

THIRD SEMESTER

Inst. Hours
Component

Credit
Semester

Exam.Hrs
Max Marks Total
Course

Int. Ext.
Name of the course

Part I Language Paper III 3 6 3 3 25 75 100


Part II English Paper III 3 6 3 3 25 75 100
Part III Core Paper V – 3 6 5 3 25 75 100
Textual Sources On
Natya(Tamil)
(Theory)
Part III Core Paper VI – 3 6 4 3 40 60 100
Natya III (Practical)
Part III Allied II – Paper I - 3 6 5 3 25 75 100
Glimpses Of Indian
Art History (Theory)
Part IV Environment Studies 3 3 2 Exam in IV Semester

FOURTH SEMESTER
Exam.Hrs
Inst. Hours
Component

Credit
Semester

Max Marks Total


Course

Name of the course

Int. Ext

Part I Language Paper IV 4 6 3 3 25 75 100

Part II English Paper IV 4 6 3 3 25 75 100


Part III Core Paper VII – 4 6 5 3 25 75 100
Concepts and
Classification (Theory)
Part III Core Paper VIII – Natya 4 6 4 3 40 60 100
And Nrtya IV
(Practical)
Part III Allied II – Paper II – 4 6 5 3 25 75 100
Glimpses of Indian
Philosophy (Theory)
Part IV Environment Studies 4 3 2 3 25 75 100

27
FIFTH SEMESTER

Component

Credit
Semester

Exam.Hrs
Inst. Hours
Max Marks Total
Course
Name of the course

Int. Ext

Part III Core Paper IX – Textual 5 6 5 3 25 75 100


Sources on Natya
(Sanskrit) (Theory)
Part III 5 6 5 3 40 60 100
Core Paper X – Natya V
(Practical)
Part III 5 6 4 3 40 60 100
Core Paper XI–
Nattuvangam I
(Practical)
Part III Elective I - Ritualistic 5 6 5 3 25 75 100
And Artistic Traditions
(Theory)
Part IV Value Education 5 2 1 40 60 100

SIXTH SEMESTER
Inst. Hours

Exam.Hrs
Component

Credit
Semester

Max Marks Total


Course

Name of the course


Int. Ext.

Part III Core Paper XII – 6 6 5 3 25 75 100


Theatrical
Expression (Theory)
Part III Core Paper XIII – 6 6 5 3 40 60 100
Natya VI &
Nattuvangam II
(Practical)
Part III Elective II – 6 6 5 3 40 60 100
Choreography
(Practical)
Part III Elective III – Cultural 6 6 5 3 25 75 100
Scenario: 14th TO 20th
Century A.D.
(Theory)

28
Part V Extension Activities 6 2 1 - 25 75 100

Part IV 2. Extra Disciplinary (Electives-ED): From the dept-1.Yoga 2.Folk Arts/Theatre


3.Music

SEVENTH SEMESTER

Inst. Hours
Component

Credit
Semester
Max Total
Course

Exam.Hrs
Marks
Name of the course

Int. Ext
.
Part III Core Paper XIV-Bhava 7 6 4 3 25 75 100
and Rasa(Theory)
Part III Core Paper XV-Early 7 6 4 3 25 75 100
literary sources for
Natya & Koothu
(Theory)
Part III Core Paper XVI – Natya 7 6 4 3 40 60 100
VII(Practical)

Part III Core Paper XVII – 7 6 4 3 40 60 100


Nattuvangam and
Direction III (Practical)
Part III 7 6 3 3 25 75 100
Elective Paper I -
(Theory)
Pan Indian classical
dance form:
Kuchupudi/
Mohiniattam
Part III 7 6 3 3 25 75 100
Elective Paper II -
(Theory)
Cultural
Tourism in
India
Part IV 7 2 40 60 100
Soft skills

29
EIGHTH SEMESTER

Component

Credit
Semester

Inst. Hours
Course Max Total

Exam.Hrs.
Marks
Name of the course

Int Ext
Part III Core Paper XVIII- Dance 8 6 4 3 25 75 100
sculptures in Temples-
(Theory)
Part III Core Paper XIX- Natya 8 6 4 3 25 75 100
Therapy (Theory)
Part III Core Paper XX– Natya 8 6 4 3 40 60 100
VIII (Practical)

Part III Core Paper XXI – 8 6 2 3 40 60 100


Nattuvangam
IV(Practical)
Part III 8 6 3 3 25 75 100
Elective Paper III -
(Theory)
Philosophy of
Beauty
Part III 8 6 3 3 40 60 100
Elective Paper IV -
(Practical) Pan
Indian
classical dance
form:
Kuchupudi
/Mohiniattam
Part IV 7 2 40 60 100
Soft skills

** Internship will be carried out during the summer vacation of the Fourth year
and marks should be sent to the University by the College and the same will be
included in the Ninth Semester Marks Statement.

30
NINTH SEMESTER

Component

Credit
Semester
Inst. Hours

Exam.Hrs
Max Marks Total
Course
Name of the course

Int. Ext.

Part III Core Paper XXII- 9 6 4 3 25 75 100


Professionalism (Theory)
Part III Core Paper XXIII - Natya 9 6 4 3 25 75 100
in Space and Time
(Theory)
Part III Core Paper XXIV – Natya 9 6 4 3 40 60 100
IX (Practical)

Part III Elective V– 9 6 3 3 40 60 100


Choreography and
Direction (Practical )
Part III Elective VI- Nataraja 9 6 3 2/3 25 75 100
Tattvam (Theory)
Part IV Soft Skills- 9 2 40 60 100

Part IV **Internship- Aharya 9 2 40 60 100

31
TENTH SEMESTER

Hrs
Component

Credit
Semester

Inst. Hours
Course Max Marks Total

Name of the course

Int. Ext.
Part III Core Paper XXV-Research 10 6 4 3 25 75 100
Methodology (Theory)
Part III Core Paper XXVI – 10 6 4 3 40 60 100
Concert I: Choreography
and Direction (Practical)
Part III Core Paper XXVII – 10 6 4 3 40 60 100
Concert II:
Performance(Practical)
Part III Core Paper XXVIII Project 10 6 6 3 25 75 100
Work: – Disssertation and
Viva-Voce (Theory)
Part III Core Paper XXIX – 10 6 4 3 25 75 100
Resources &
Docummentation of Natya
Part III Elective VII-Classical and 10 6 3 3 25 75 100
Folk dance of Madras
from 1600 A.D to present
day.
Part IV Soft Skills 10 2 40 60 100

32
13. M.A. DEGREE COURSE IN PHILOSOPHY

THIRD SEMESTER

Inst. Hours

Credits

Exam. Hours
Max. Marks
Course Name of the Course

Int.

Ext.

Total
Components

Core – 9 Philosophy of Religion 5 4 3 25 75 100


Core – 10 Philosophy of Kant – I 5 4 3 25 75 100
Core – 11 Political Philosophy 5 4 3 25 75 100
Core – 12 Philosophy of Science 5 4 3 25 75 100
Extra Philosophy of Human Rights 5 3 3 25 75 100
Disciplinary–2
Elective – 3 Philosophy of Education 5 3 3 25 75 100
Soft skill 2 3 40 60 100

** Internship will be carried out during the summer vacation of the first year and
marks should be sent to the University by the College and the same will be included
in the Third Semester Marks Statement.

33
FOURTH SEMESTER

Core – 13 Philosophy of Management 6 4 3 25 75 100

Inst. Hours

Credits
HoursExam.
Core – 14 Saiva Siddanta 6 4 3 25 Max.
75 Marks
100

Int.

Ext.

Total
Core – 15 Philosophy of Kant – II 6 4 3 25 75 100
Course
Core – 16 Name
Indian of the Course
Culture 6 3 3 25 75 100
Components
Elective – 4 Industrial Psychology 6 3 3 25 75 100
Soft skill 2 3 40 60 100

34
14. M.A. DEGREE COURSE IN POLITICAL SCIENCE

THIRD SEMESTER

Marks

EXTERNAL
INST. HOURS

CIA
COURSE COMPONENTS

SEMESTER

CREDITS

EXAM – HRS
NAME OF COURSE

Political Science
Core 9 Issues in Indian Political III 4 4 3 25 75
Thought
Core 10 Research Methodology III 5 5 3 25 75
Core 11 Human Rights III 5 5 3 25 75
Elective 3 Urban and Rural III 4 4 3 25 75
Governments in India
Elective 4 Globalisation and Political III 4 4 3 25 75
Development
Soft Skills 2 2 3 40 60
Internship 2
Total 26

** Internship will be carried out during the summer vacation of the first year and
marks should be sent to the University by the College and the same will be included
in the Third Semester Marks Statement.

35
FOURTH SEMESTER

Marks

EXTERNAL
INST. HOURS

CIA
SEMESTER

CREDITS

EXAM – HRS
COURSE NAME OF COURSE
COMPO
NENTS

Political Science
Core 12 Contemporary Political IV 4 4 3 25 75
Thinkers
Core 13 State Politics in India IV 4 4 3 25 75
Core 14 Project IV 6 3 25 75
Elective 5 Traditional and Non- IV 4 4 3 25 75
Traditional Security
Soft Skills 2 2 3 40 60
Total 20

36
15. M.A. DEGREE COURSE IN PUBLIC ADMINISTRATION

THIRD SEMESTER

Marks

EXTERNAL
INST. HOURS

CIA
COURSE COMPONENTS

SEMESTER

CREDITS

EXAM – HRS
NAME OF COURSE

Public
Administration
Core 9 Human Rights in India III 4 4 3 25 75
Core 10 Research Methodology III 5 5 3 25 75
Core 11 Gender and Public III 5 5 3 25 75
Administration
Core 12 International III 4 4 3 25 75
Organization and
Administration
Elective 3 Urban Management in III 4 4 3 25 75
India
Soft Skills 2 2 3 40 60
Internship 2
**
Total 26

** Internship will be carried out during the summer vacation of the first year and
marks should be sent to the University by the College and the same will be included
in the Third Semester Marks Statement.

37
FOURTH SEMESTER

Marks

EXTERNAL
INST. HOURS

CIA
NENTS COMPO

SEMESTER

CREDITS

EXAM – HRS
NAME OF COURSE
COURSE

Public
Administration
Core 13 Police Administration IV 4 4 3 25 75
Core 14 New Public IV 4 4 3 25 75
Management and
Governance
Project 6 6 3 25 75
Elective 4 Issues of Disinvestment IV 4 4 3 25 75
and Public Sector
undertakings in India
Soft Skills 2 2 3 40 60
Total 20

38
16. M.A. DEGREE COURSE IN PUBLIC RELATIONS

Course Title of the Course Inst. Credit Exam. Marks


Code Hr Hrs
Week
Semester Int Ext Total
III
Core 9 Communication 4 4 3 25 75 100
Research Methods
Core 10 Media Skills III: PR 4 4 3 25 75 100
Writing Style and Form
Core 11 Corporate 3 3 3 25 75 100
Communication
Elective 5 Entertainment & Society 3 3 3 25 75 100
Elective 6 Community Relations 3 3 3 25 75 100
Soft Skill Soft Skill 2 2 3 40 60 100
Soft Skill Internship** 2

** Internship will be carried out during the summer vacation of the first year and
marks should be sent to the University by the College and the same will be included
in the Third Semester Marks Statement.

Semester
IV
Core 12 Media Planning & 3 3 3 25 75 100
Budgeting
Core 13 Advanced Public 3 3 3 25 75 100
Relations
Core14 Research Project Work 6 6 3 25 75 100
Core 15 Media Skills IV: Event 3 3 3 25 75 100
Management/ PR
Campaign
Core 16 Specialization 2 3 3 25 75 100
Elective 7 Media Management & 2 2 3 25 75 100
Economics
Soft Skill Soft Skill 2 2 3 40 60 100
Total Credits 90

39
17. M.A. DEGREE COURSE IN SANSKRIT
25th August 2008
THIRD SEMESTER

SEMESTER

EXAM. HRS.
INST. HOURS

CREDITS
MAX
MARKS

NAME
COURSE OF

EXTERNAL
COMPONENTS COURSE

CIA
CORE Paper 11 : III 5 HRS 4 3 25 75
Grammar– I
CORE Paper 12 : III 5 HRS 4 3 25 75
Introduction
to Darshanas-
II
CORE Paper 13 : III 5 HRS 4 3 25 75
Campu

Elective - I Spl. I- III 5 HRS 3 3 25 75


Paper I :
Elective - II Spl. II – III 5 HRS 3 3 25 75
Paper I
Extra III 3 Hrs 3 3 25 75
Disciplinary- I I
Soft Skills - III III 2 Hrs 2 - 40 60

Note: Two special Subjects each consisting of two Papers from among the following are
to be offered as Elective I & II in the third and fourth Semesters.

Subjects are:
1. Vedanta 2. Alamkara 3. Vyakarana 4. Nyaya

** Internship will be carried out during the summer vacation of the first year and
marks should be sent to the University by the College and the same will be included
in the Third Semester Marks Statement.

40
FOURTH SEMESTER

EXAMDURATOON HRS.
INST. HOURS

CREDITS
SEMESTER
MAX
MARKS

NAME
COURSE OF

EXT.
COMPONENTS COURSE

CIA

CORE Paper 14 : IV 6 HRS 4 3 25 75


Grammar - II
CORE Paper 15: IV 6 HRS 4 3 25 75
Indian Logic
ELECTIVE – III Spl. I- IV 5 HRS 3 3 25 75
Paper II :

ELECTIVE – IV Spl. II – IV 5 HRS 3 3 25 75


Paper II
Elective -V Modern IV 6 HRS 3 3 25 75
Literature in
Sanskrit
Soft Skills -IV 2 2 - 40 60

Note: Two special Subjects each consisting of two Papers from among the following are
to be offered as Elective I & II in the third and fourth Semesters.

Subjects are:

1. Vedanta 2. Alamkara 3. Vyakarana 4. Nyaya

41
18. M.A. DEGREE COURSE IN SOCILOGY

THIRD SEMESTER

Name of Courses

Exam Hrs
Credits
Course Components Max.Marks

Semester

Inst.Hours

CIA

External
CORE 9 Rural Sociology III 6 HRS 4 3 25 75
CORE 10 Sociology of III 6 HRS 4 3 25 75
Organization
CORE 11 Indian Social III 6 HRS 4 3 25 75
Problems
CORE 12 Sociology of III 6 HRS 4 3 25 75
Health
Elective II Indian Society III 6 HRS 4 3 25 75

Extra Human Resource III 6 HRS 4 3 25 75


Disciplinary Management
elective II
Soft Skill III 3HRS 2 3 40 60

** Internship will be carried out during the summer vacation of the first year and
marks should be sent to the University by the College and the same will be included
in the Third Semester Marks Statement.

FOURTH SEMESTER
Credits

Exam Hrs

Max.Marks
Course Components

CIA
Name of Courses

Semester

Inst.Hours

External

CORE 13 NGOs and IV 6 HRS 4 3 25 75


Development
Practice
CORE 14 Urban Sociology IV 6 HRS 4 3 25 75

42
Project cum Viva IV - 8 - 25 75
Elective III Organizational IV 6 HRS 4 3 25 75
Behaviour
Soft Skill IV 3HRS 2 3 40 60

19. M.A. DEGREE COURSE IN TOURISM AND TRAVEL


MANAGEMENT
THIRD SEMESTER

MAX

Exam Duration HRS


COMPONENTS

MARKS

INST. HOURS
SEMESTER

CREDITS
COURSE

EXTERNAL
NAME OF COURSE
CIA

FRONT OFFICE
CORE
MANAGEMENT III 6 HRS 4 3 25 75
PAPER IX
CORE HUMAN RESOURCE
III 6 HRS 4 3 25 75
PAPER X MANAGEMENT
CORE RESEARCH
III 6 HRS 4 3 25 75
PAPER XI METHODOLOGY
MANAGEMENT
INFORMATION
ELECTIVE
SYSTEM IN III 6 HRS 3 3 25 75
– III
TOURISM

COMMUNICATIVE
EXTRA
SKILL IN FRENCH /
DISCIPLI III 6 HRS 3 3 25 75
GERMAN
NARY -II
LANGUAGE
SOFT
III 2 40 60
SKILL

** Internship will be carried out during the summer vacation of the first year
and marks should be sent to the University by the College and the same will be
included in the Third Semester Marks Statement.

43
FOURTH SEMESTER
MAX

Exam Duration HRS


MARKS

COMPONENTS

INST. HOURS
SEMESTER

CREDITS
COURSE

EXTERNAL
NAME OF
COURSE
CIA

AIR TICKETING
CORE AND FARE
IV 6 HRS 4 3 25 75
PAPER XII CONSTURCTION

CORE
ECO TOURISM IV 6 HRS 4 3 25 75
PAPER XIII

ELECTIVE- GLOBAL
IV 6 HRS 3 3 25 75
IV TOURISM – I

GLOBAL
ELECTIVE-V IV 6 HRS 3 3 25 75
TOURISM – II

SOFT SKILL IV 2 40 60
PROJECT
PLUS IV ----- 8 --- 20+20+60=100*
VIVA VOCE

* Project: Internal - 20 Marks 2 out of 3 presentations - 20 marks


Viva - 20 marks
Project Report - 60 marks

44
20. MASTER OF SOCIAL WORK

THIRD SEMESTER

SEMESTER

INST.HOURS

CREDITS
EXAM HOURS
Max
COMPONENTSCOURSE

Marks
NAME

EXTERNAL
CIA
OF THE
COURSE

EXTERNAL
CORE Specialization Paper - I III 4 4 3 25 75
Hrs
CORE Specialization Paper - II III 4 4 3 25 75
Hrs
CORE Field Work Practicum - III 12 6 - 40 60
III Hrs
Elective Counselling / III 4 4 3 25 75
Management Hrs
of Development and
Voluntary Organizations
Extra Social Policy and Social III 4 4 3 25 75
Disciplinary Legislation / Human Hrs
Rights
Soft Skills-3 2 2 40 60
Hrs

** Internship will be carried out during the summer vacation of the first year and
marks should be sent to the University by the College and the same will be included
in the Third Semester Marks Statement.

45
FOURTH SEMESTER

SEMESTER

INST.HOURS

CREDITS
EXAM HOURS
COMPONENTSCOURSE Max
Marks
NAME

CIA

EXTERNAL
OF THE
COURSE

CORE Specialization Paper - III IV 4 4 3 25 75


Hrs
CORE Specialization Paper - IV IV 4 4 3 25 75
Hrs
CORE Field Work IV 12 6 - 40 60
Practicum - IV Hrs
CORE Project Report IV 8 4 80
Hrs Report
20 Viva
Soft Skills-4 2 2 40 60
Hrs
Block Placement 2
/Internship

Each Paper carries an internal component.


There is a pass minimum for external component
Theory : Internal Assessment : 75: 25
Field Work : 60: 40

Field Work :

External 60 marks( 40 – viva ; 20 marks for Agency Supervisor)

Project Report - Report presentation : 80


Viva : 20

46
                

DURATION          
        

        
        
           

      
            

 
INST. HOURS   


NAME OF COURSE

SEMESTER


CREDITS


EXAM


  








COURSE COMPONENTS


 


       


       





       





47
       
           
     

     

ga‹ghL
            
   
                  
             

bgÇahÇaš
 

       
   
           
x ¥ãy¡»a«

    














x¥ãy¡»a«







** Internship will be carried out during the summer vacation of the first year and
marks should be sent to the University by the College and the same will be included
in the Third Semester Marks Statement.




 
 
 

48

EXAMDURATION
 


SEMESTER

CREDITS
NAME OF COURSE
  
 

     
      
  
INST. 
HOURS  


    
COURSE COMPONENTS
  

        

r§f
ïy¡»a« -II
       





       






 
      



bkhÊ
bga®¥ãaš


     



49




ClfÉaš


    
    
 


 eilÆaš
  2. bkhÊbga®¥ãaš
   3. ClfÉaš
 
 r§f fhy«

A.C.F.2009

50
APPENDIX – 16 (S)

UNIVERSITY OF MADRAS

M.A. DEGREE COURSES

CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM


(w.e.f. 2008-2009)

SECOND YEAR
(i.e.III & IV SEMESTERS)

SYLLABUS

1. M.A. DEGREE COURSE IN APPLIED HISTORY


III SEMESTER

Paper IX - INDIA AND HER NEIGHBOURS SINCE 1947

UNIT I: India and Pakistan - Areas of Conflict - Kashmir and Border issues - Afghan
Crisis - Its impact on Indo - Pak Relations.

UNIT II: India and China - Strains and the process of Normalization - Tibetan issues -
India and Nepal - Economic Cooperation.

UNIT III: India and Bangladesh - Areas of Cooperation and Crisis - India and Bhutan -
Insurgency in the North Eastern States - India and Burma - Historical Ties.

UNIT IV: Indo - Sri Lanka Relations - Ethnic problem in Sri Lanka - Peace Process -
India and Maldives - Political and Cultural ties.

UNIT V: Regional Organizations - India's role in the NAM - SAARC and its Activities
- Its Future - Nuclearization of South Asia - Its impact.

BOOKS FOR REFERENCE


1. Bipan Chandra and Others, India After Independence.
2. Nanda, B.R (ed)., Indian Foreign Policy: The Nehru Years.
3. Sisir Gupta, K., Kashmir: A Study in India - Pakistan Relations.
4. Ramesh Thakur, The Politics and Economics of India's Foreign policy.

5. Dutt, V.P., India's Foreign Policy in Changing World.


6. Farmer, B.H. , An Introduction to South Asia.

51
7. Deb Arinda, Bhutan and India: A Study in Frontier Political Relations.
8. Shelter V. Kodikara (ed)., Dilemmas of Indo - Sri Lanka Relations.
9. Phadis Urrnila and Others, Maldives: Winds of Change in the Atoll State.

Paper X - HISTORY OF WORLD CIVILIZATION


(EXCLUDING INDIA) -MEDIEVAL AND MODERN PERIOD

UNIT I: Middle Ages: Rise and spread of Christianity -The Papacy -Byzantine
Civilization -Rise and Spread of Islam -Saracenic Civilization.

UNIT II: Feudalism -Origin -Merits and Demerits -Crusades -Causes and Results -
Monastic Orders of Medieval Europe -Growth of Medieval Cities
-Progress of Education and Rise of Universities.

UNIT Ill: Transition to Modem Age -Renaissance -Causes -Renaissance in Italy-


Results of Renaissance -Geographical Discoveries of 15th and 16th
centuries -Causes, Course and Results -Reformation in Germany, France
and Switzerland -Counter Reformation.

UNIT IV: French Revolution and its Impact -Romanticism -Industrial and Agrarian
Revolutions -Causes, Course and Results.

UNIT V: Nationalism vs Internationalism -League of Nations -United Nations


Organization -Science, Philosophy, Art & Literature during the Contempo-
rary World

BOOKS FOR REFERENCE


1 Will Durant, The Story of Civilization (10 Volumes).
2. Edward Mac Nall Burns, Western Civilization -their History and their Culture.

3. Judd, G.P., History of Civilization.

4. Swain, J.E., A History of World Civilization.


5. Wallbank, T. W. and Bailay, N.M., Civilization - Past and Present.

6. Burns, and Ralph, Western Civilizations.

7. Phul, R.K., World Civilization.

8. Gokale, B.K., Introduction to Western Civilization.

52
Paper XI - HISTORY OF EUROPE FROM A.D. 1789 -A.D. 1919

UNIT I: Fall of Ancient Regime -French Revolution -Era of Napoleon.

UNIT II: Congress of Vienna -Concert of Europe - Matternich - Revolutions of 1830


and 1848.

UNIT III: Eastern Question -Unification of Italy and Germany.

UNIT IV: Napoleon Ill -Bismarck and Austro-Hungarian Empire -Balkan Problem-
Alexander Ill and Freedom of the Serfs -Balkan Crises.

UNIT V : First World War.:-- Treaty of Versailles -Russian Revolution.

BOOKS FOR REFERENCE

1. Ketelby, C.D.M., A History of Modem Times.

2 Fisher, H.A.L., History of Europe.

3. Grant, A.J & Temperly, Europe in 19th and 20th Centuries.

4. Hazen, C.D., Modern Europe.

5. David Thomson, Europe since Napoleon.

6. Fyffe, History of Modern Europe.

7. Marriot, Remaking of Europe.

8. Lipson, Europe in the 19th and 20th Centuries.


9. Grant, A.J., Europe, The Story of the Last Five Centuries.

10. Huges, H.S., Contemporary Europe.

11. Philis W. Alison, Modern Europe.

53
Elective – III HISTORIOGRAPHY AND HISTORICAL METHODS

UNIT I: Definition and Meaning - Nature and Scope - Value of History.

UNIT II: Branches of History -(Political, Economic, Social and Cultural) History and
other Social Sciences -Role of Allied Subjects in the study of History.

UNIT III: Structure and Form of History - History as Science and Art -Philosophy of
History.

UNIT IV: Trends in Historiography -Ancient, Medieval and Modern -Recent Trends:
Subaltern Studies and Annales School.

UNIT V: Research Methodology - Selection of Topics - Hypothesis - Collection of


Data - Classification of Sources - Historical Criticism - Objectivity in writing
History -Synthesis and Interpretation - Exposition - Foot Note - Bibliography

BOOKS FOR REFERENCE

1. Reiner, G. T., History, Its Purpose and Method.


2. Rowse, A.L., The Use of History.
3. Collingwood, R.G., The Ideas of History.
4. Philips, C.H. (Ed), Historians of India, Pakistan and Ceylon.
5. Khan, S. A., History and Historians of British India.
6. Rajayyan, K., History in Theory and Method.
7. Subramanian, N., 1978, Historiography, Koodal Publishers, Madurai.
8. Carr, E.H., 1983, What is History? Middlesex, England.
9. Sen, S.P. (Ed), 1973, Historians and Historiography in Modern India. Calcutta.
10. Sheik Ali, B., 1978, History: Its Theory and Method. Macmillan India Ltd., New
Delhi.
11. Barzun, J & Graff, Henry, The Modern Researcher.
12. Fisher, D., Historical Fallacies.
13. Kent, S., Writing History
14. Hockit, Homer, C., The Critical Method in Historical Research and Writing.
15. Majumdar, R.C., and Srivastava, A. N., Historiography.
16. Manickam, S., Theory of History and Methods of Research, Padumam Publishers
Madurai, 2005..

54
EDC – II ARCHIVES KEEPING

(Extra Disciplinary)

UNIT I: History of Archives -Archives keeping in Europe -Archives keeping in India


-Importance of Archives

UNIT II: Creation of Archives -Materials used for the creation of Archives -Packing
Materials and Seals -Establishment of Registry -Filing system of Records.

UNIT III: Preservation of Archive Materials in India and European Countries -


Methods of Preservation -Laminations -Reprography -Automation-
Retrieval Tools.

UNIT IV: Functions -Uses of Archives -Rules and Regulations.

UNIT V: Archival Organisations - National Archives of India -Tamilnadu Archives-


Private Archives ~ International Council of Archives -Indian Historical
Records Commission (IHRC) -The Historical Manuscripts Commission.

BOOKS FOR REFERENCE:

1. Harinaryana, Science of Archives Keeping.


2. Baliga, B., Guide to the records preserved in the Madras Record Office
3. Sarvesvaran, P., Archives Keeping.
4. Sundara Raj, M., 1999, A Manual of Archives System and the World of
Archives, Silver
Publications, Chennai.
5. Sailen Ghose, Archives in India.
6. Jenbinson Hilary, A Manual of Archives Administration.
7. Thyagarajan, T. T., Archives Keeping.
8. Sehellenberg, T.R., Management of Archives.

55
FOURTH SEMESTER

PAPER XII HISTORY OF PEASANT AND LABOUR MOVEMENTS IN INDIA


FROM AD 1900 TO 1947

UNIT I: Introduction - Agricultural Condition and Agrarian Structure during the


British Period - Peasant Struggles in Kerala and Land reforms since 1900 -
Peasant Unions - The Indian National Congress and the Peasants – Gandhi and
Peasant Struggles -Champran, Bardoli and Oudh.

UNIT II: Formation of Kisan Sabhas -Left Parties -Peasant Struggles on the eve of
Independence, Tebhaga Movement in Bengal (1946 -47) –Telengana Peasant
Outbreak (1946 -51) and the Varlis revolt in Western India -Peasant
Organisations in Tamilnadu -Tamilaga Vivasayigal Sangam -Peasant Movement
in Vedasendur -Welfare Measures for Peasants

UNIT III: Introduction - British Labour Movements and their impact on Indian Labour -
Russian Revolution and its impact on Indian Labour - Trade Union
Movement from 1875 - 1920 - Establishment of All India Trade Union
Movement in 1920.

UNIT IV: Growth of Trade Union Movement from 1920 -1947 -The Role of the Indian
National
Congress and Trade Union Movement Expansion –Labour Involvement in
Freedom Struggle.

UNIT V: Federations of Labour Unions - AITUC - INTUC - HMS - UTUC – Labour


Laws - I.L.O. – Labour Welfare Measures in Independent India - Trade
nionism and its Effect on the Indian Economy.

BOOKS FOR REFERENCE

1. Shanin, T.S., Peasants and Peasant Societies.


2. Natarajan, Peasant Revolts in India, 1850- 1900

3. Pandey, S.M., Emergence of Peasant Movement in India.


4. Desai, A.R., Peasant Movement in India.
5. Karnik, V.B., Trade Unions in India.
6. Herald Crouch, History of Trade Unionism in India
7. Mathur, I.S., and Mathur , A.S., Trade Union Movement in India.
8. Dhanagare, D.N., Peasant Movements in India (1920 -1950).
9. Sumit Sarkar , Modern India.

10. Grover, B.L., and Grover, S., A New Look at Modern Indian History.

56
Paper XIII - DEVELOPMENT OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY IN INDIA
SINCE AD 1947-2000

UNIT I: Introduction - A Survey of the Development of Science and Technology


under the British Rule - Government of India's Science and Technology
Policy since 1950 - Department of Science and Technology - Research and
Development Programme - Science and Technology programmes for Socio-
Economic Development.

UNIT II: Development of Agricultural Science - Research and Education - Agricultural


Engineering and Technology - Indian Council of Agricultural Research -
Crop Science and Horticulture - Animal Science and Veterinary colleges -
Biotechnology Development - Crop and Animal Bio-technology.

UNIT III: Development of Space Science - Development of Satellite Systems-


INST AT System - Electronic Developments and Production - Information
Technology - I. T. Act 2000 - Telecommunication - Software Technology
Parks -I. T for the Masses.

UNIT IV: Higher Technology Development - Atomic Science - Atom for Peace -
Atomic Energy and Nuclear Power Programme - Atom for War and
Pokhran I & II.

UNIT V: Oceanography - Ocean Development - Marine Living Resources and Non


- living Resources - Aquaculture and Marine Biotechnology - Polar
Science and Antartic Expeditions - Institute Connected with Ocean
Research.

BOOKS FOR REFERENCE


1. Gupta, S.P., Modern India and Progress in Science and Technology.
2. Gupta, S.P., Technology and Society in the Modern Age.
3. Venkataraman, R., History of Science and Technology.
4. Vadilal Dagli, Science and Technology in India.
5. Varghese Jeyaraj, S., History of Science and Technology.

6. Kalpana Rajaram, Science and Technology in India.


7. Kuppuram and Kumudhamani, History of Science and Technology. (10 Volumes).
8. Jaggi, O.P., Science and Technology.
9. India, 2000, India 2001, (Publications Division, Government of India).
10. Krishnamurthy, K.V., History of Science, Bharathidasan University, Tiruchirapalli,
2005 (Both English & Tamil)

57
Elective - IV INTERNATIONAL RELATIONS SINCE A.D. 1919 - 2000

UNIT I: Nature of International Relations, National Power and Instruments for the
Promotion of National Interests - Diplomacy.

UNIT II: Inter - War Years - Reparation - Inter Allied Debts - World Economic Crisis -
Collective Security - Rise of Dictatorship - Totalitarianism.

UNIT III: Second World War - Peace Settlements - Military Alliances - Emergence of
Power Blocs - Cold War - UNO.

UNIT IV: Disarmament and Arms Control - Disintegration of U.S.S.R - Emerging New
World Order.

UNIT V: Present Trends in International Associations (Role of International


Associations such as Common Wealth, NAM, SAARC, OAU, ASEAN, G
-7, G -15, G -77).

BOOKS FOR REFERENCE

1. Schleicher, P., Charles, International Relations Co-Operation.

2. Palmer and Perkins, International Relations.

3. Morgentheau, Hans, J., Politics among Nations.

4. Schuman, International Politics.

5. Wright, Rhiney, The study of International Relations.

6. Moon, P.T., Imperialism and World Politics since 1945.

7. Calvecoressi, P., World Politics since 1945.

8. Hughes, H.S., Contemporary Europe.

9. Carr, E.H., International Relations since 1919.

10. Gadhorne Hardy, A Short History of International Affairs 1920-38.

11. Sen, A.K., International Relations since 1919.

12. Prakash Chander and Prem Arora, International Relations.

58
Elective V – STUDIES IN HUMAN RIGHTS

UNIT – I: THEORIES ON HUMAN RIGHTS


Development of the Concept of Human rights in History – Historical Documents
dealing with Human Rights – The Need for Human Rights – Concepts
such as Justice, Equality and Liberty – Three Generation Rights and
Classification of Rights - Universality and Indivisibility of Human Rights

UNIT – II: INTERNATIONAL STANDARDS


The International Declaration of Human Rights 1948 – Two Covenants – Two
Optional Protocols – International Conventions on Refugees, Women,
Children and Migrants – Conventions against Torture and Racism.

UNIT – III: NATIONAL STANDARDS


Indian Constitution – Fundamental Rights – Directive Principles –
National Human Rights Commission – Sate Human Rights Commissions
– Other National and State Level Commissions.

UNIT – IV: CONTEMPORARY ISSUES AND HUMAN RIGHTS


Capital Punishment – Torture – Custodial Death – Disappearance –
Encounter Deaths – Extra-Judicial killings – Human Rights in the context
of Terrorism.

UNIT – V: ORGANIZATIONS TO DOCUMENT HUMAN RIGHTS


VIOLATIONS
Human Rights Commission – Amnesty International – Human Rights
Watch – Peoples Union For Civil Liberties – NGO’s dealing with Human
Rights Issues – Fact Finding Reports – Documenting Human Rights
Violations.

BOOKS FOR REFERENCE:


1. Jack Donnelly, 1989, Universal Human Rights in Theory and Practice, Cornell
University Press, USA.
2. Bajwa, G.S., 1995, Human Rights in India, Anmol Publishers, New Delhi.
3. Chandra Satish, 1990, Interantional Documents of Human Rights, Mittal
Publications, New Delhi.
4. Scott Davidson, 1993, Human Rights, Open University Press, Buckingham and
Philadelphia.
5. Tony Evans (Ed.), 1998, Human Rights Fifty Years, A Reappraisal, Manchester
University Press, Manchester.
6. Srivastava and Narayan, 2002, United Nations on Human Rights, Indian Publishing
Distributors, New Delhi.
7. Symonides (Janusz), 2003, New Dimensions and Challenges for Human Rights,
Rawat Publications, Jaipur.
8. Baxi Upendera, 2003, Future of Human Rights, Oxford University Press, London.

59
9. Sachhar Rajindar, 2004, Human Rights: Perspectives and Challenges, Gyan
Publishing House, New Delhi.

Web Sources:
1. Human Rights Centre, http://www.hrcberkeley.org/
2. Commonwealth HR initiative, http://www.humanrightsinitiative.org/
3. Human Rights in India, http://www.derechos.org/saran/india/
4. South Asian Forum for Human Rights, http://www.safhr.org/
5. Women’s Rights in India, http://www.law-lib.utoronto.ca/.htm

Paper XIX – Project Plus Viva Voce

60
2. M.A. APPLIED SANSKRIT
SYLLABUS

Semester III

Paper XI Introduction to Indian Architecture – I 4

Architecture is the harmonious combination of form, function and


construction that leads to a pleasant living environment (sattvika). It is
defined as the science of design and construction of buildings. Thus the
core of architecture is the theory of beauty and truth. This concept is dealt
with in the case of India’s architecture, the Vasastu Sastra in a holistic
manner.

Unit I - Introduction to Indian Architecture


Unit II - Components of Vastusastra
Unit III - Aesthetic quality of Vastuvidya

Reference:
1. Prasanna kumar Acharya – A dictionary of Hindu Architecture –
Manasara Series – Vol. I. to Vol. 7 – Munshiram Manoharlal Pvt. Ltd.
1995.
2. Kapila Vatsayan – Kalatattvakosa – Indira Gandhi National
Centre for Arts, New Delhi – 1996.
3. Coomaraswamy Anand – The Aims of Indian Art.

Paper XII AGAMAS – I 4

Unit I Introduction to Agamas – Definition.


Unit II Principles of Agamas Classification of Agamas
Unit III Vaisnava Agamas – Their Doctrines.

Paper XIII INTRODUCTION TO AYURVEDA –II 4

Select portions from Astangahrdaya

61
Paper XIV Elective
PRINCIPLES OF INDIAN ASTRONOMY AND MATHEMATICS II 3

Paper XV 4
Systems of Indian Philosophy
Text : Gouda pada Karika Prakarana One and two

Unit I : Introduction
Unit II : first Adyaya first half
Unit III First Adhyaya second half
Unit IV: Second Adhyaya First half
Unit V : Second Adhyaya Second Half

Extra Disciplinary 3
Soft Skill III 2

S E M E S T E R- IV

Paper XVI AGAMAS II 4

Saiva Agamas – Important Texts – Doctrines

Paper XVII Elective - I

INDIAN FINE ARTS- I 3

Unit I Introduction to Classical Sanskrit Literature


Unit II Dramuturgy – Natyasastra
Unit III Sanskrit Dramas

Paper XVIII Elective – II

INDIAN FINE ARTS – II 3

Music. Bhakti Songs – Compositions of great Musicians – an.

Unit I
Bhakti Songs in Sanskrit, Bhajana Tradition – Todaya Mangalam, Songs
of Bodhendra, Sadguru Swami, Sadasiva Brahmendra. Songs expressing nava-
vidhi bhakti, navararna and navagraha themes.

62
Unit II
Style of Samskita in Kriti compositions, Songs of Muttuswami Dikshitar,
Svati. Tirunal and the Composers. 20th century composers of songs in Samskrta.
Kulaka and Chedyaka forms in songs. Usage of various vibhakti’s and samasas.
Aspects of phonetics – usage of aspirated and conduct consonants in musical
compositons.

Unit III
Metre and other prosodical element in musical compositions. Study of the
work Muhana-prasa-antyaprasa vyavastha" of Svati Tirunal.

Unit IV
Musical Drama in Samskrta. General study of Gita – Govinda and Sri
Krishna lila-tarangini of Narayana Tirtha.

Unit V
Biographical works of composers in Samskrta. Srityagaraja caritram,
Srityagaraja-vijaya-kavya, Srimuttuswamidikshita-caritam-mahakavyam.

Paper XIX INTRODUCTION TO INDIAN ARCHITECTURE II 4

Different kinds of Architecture with Reference to important texts


Introduction to Devalayavastu, Manusyalayavastu, Citravastu, Nagaravastu,
Durgavastu.

The texts are


1. Devalayavastu – Brhatssamhita
2. Manusyalayavastu – Manusyalayachandrika
3. Citravastu-Silparatna Ch. 36.
4. Nagaravastu 5. Janapathanivesa – Arthasastra 22 – 1- 19, 24 – 3-21, 25-
4-22.

Paper XX PRINCIPLES OF MANAGEMENT 4

Unit I Introduction
Unit IIImportant Texts
Unit III Study of Some Select Portions.
Text : Kautilya’s Arthashastra.
SOFT SKILL IV 2

63
3. M.A. DEGREE COURSE IN COMMUNICATION
SYLLABUS

SEMESTER III

Core 9 - Communication Research Methods 1


Unit 1: Fundamentals of Social Research
Unit 2: Varieties of Research Designs
Unit 3: Social Measurement
Unit 4: Basic Statistical Techniques
Unit 5: Data Analysis & Interpretation

Core 10 - Film Studies


Unit 1: Film theories, film aesthetics and film genres
Unit 2: Major film movements (German expressionism, French new wave, Italian
neorealism, Indian new wave and Soviet montage)
Unit 3: History of early cinema with special reference to India
Unit 4: The history of political cinema and the dynamics of the cinema-society interface
in Tamil Nadu
Unit 5: Film analysis techniques

Core 11 - Broadcasting Production Techniques-II


Unit 1: Principles of AV Production
Unit 2: Pre-production Process and Scriptwriting
Unit 3: Production Process
Unit 4: Post-production Process
Unit 5: Budgeting and Production management

Elective-5
Technical Communication
Unit1 Areas of technical communication
Unit2 Tools of the trade and the requirements of the profession.
Unit3 Principles of technical report and manual writing
Unit4 Visual design strategies for technical communication
Unit5 Organizing ideas and developing persuasive skills for technical communication
Elective-6
Public Relations and Corporate Communication
Unit 1: Introduction to PR
Unit 2: PR Process and Practice
Unit 3: Stake holder Communication
Unit 4: Advanced PR
Unit 5: Ethics and Research

64
Semester IV
Core 12- Communication Research Methods II
Unit 1: Dissertation Writing-Research Project Management
Unit 2: Research Design-Mixed Methodologies
Unit 3: Qualitative Research Approaches- Interpretive Paradigms
Unit 4: Quantitative and Qualitative Data Analysis & Interpretation
Unit 5: Quantitative & Qualitative Content Analysis

Core 13 - Cross Cultural Communication


Unit 1: The contexts of cross-cultural communication
Unit 2: Principles of cross-cultural communication
Unit 3: Theories of cross-cultural communication
Unit 4: The role of ‘cultural distance,’ ‘cultural identity’-cultural other’ in cross- cultural
communication
Unit 5: Cross cultural communication in the age of globalization

Core 14 - Research Project Work

Core 15 – Practice Journal

Core 16 – Media Practice (Internship-2)

Elective-7
Media Analysis Techniques
Unit 1: Approaches to Media Analysis
Unit 2: Visual Persuasion Techniques
Unit 3: Media Aesthetics
Unit 4: Analyzing Media Analysis
Unit 5: Cases Studies and Exercises in media analysis

65
4. M.A. CORPORATE SOCIOLOGY

THIRD SEMESTER

SYLLABUS
CORE- HUMAN RESOURCE DEVELOPMENT-I

Unit 1: Introduction
• Nature and scope of HRM
• Context of HRM
• Ethical issues in HRM

Unit 2: Resourcing the organization


• Human Resource Planning
• Job design and Analysis
• Recruitment and Selection

Unit 3: Motivating Human resource


• Motivation at work
• Participative management
• Empowerment

Unit 4: Developing HR
• Socializing, orienting and Developing
• Learning and Development
• Performance Appraisal

Unit 5: Employee Benefits


• Employee welfare
• Safety and health
• Quality of work life

References:
1. K.Aswathapa “Human resource and Personnel management-Text and
Cases” Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Ltd, NewDelhi, 2002
2. Biswajeet Pattyanak “Human resource Management” Prentice-Hall of
India Pvt Ltd, 2005, Newdelhi.
3. Wendell L. French “Human resource Management” Houghton Mifflin
Company, USA, (All India Publishers and Distributors, Chennai) 1997
4. Robert L Mathis & John II.Jackson “Human resource Managemen-tenth
edition” Thomson south western, Singapore, 2003
5. Ian Beardwell & Len Holden “Human resource Management A
contemporary Approach “ Financial Times- Pretince Hall, 2001
6. David A. Decenzo & Stephen P. Robbins “Fundamentals of “Human
resource Management” John Willey & Sons (Asia) Pvt, Ltd, 2005

66
7. Gary Desseier, “Human resource Management” Pretince - Hall, India,
2005
8. Cynthia D. Fisher et al “Human resource Management”Biztantra,
NewDelhi 2004
9. John Bratton and Jeffrey gold “Human resource Management Theory and
Practice” Palgrave, Newyork, 1999
10. Michael Armstrong “ A Hand book of HRM Practice” Kogan Page,
London, 2003
11. C B Mamoria et al “Personnel Management” Himalaya Publishing House,
Delhi, 2005

CORE- CUSTOMER RELATIONSHIP MANAGEMENT

Unit- I: Introduction
• Definition, Conceptual Framework and Elements of CRM
• Key Concepts: Closed Loop Marketing (360 Degree Marketing) and touch point
analysis – Customer Life Time Values- Sales for Automation – Automated
Customer Service Centres- Cross Selling / Selling.
• Models of Customer Behaviour: Customer Differences – Customer Satisfaction-
Customer loyalty- Customer Retention- Customer Defection- Customer
Satisfaction Services
• CRM as Integral Business Strategy: Relationship Marketing Strategies- Winback
and Acquisition Strategies.

Unit-II: Analysing CRM


• Customer Identification and Expanding the size of customer base
• Customer Profiling
• Source of Customer Data
• Data Warehousing – Data mining – Data Analysis and Modelling

Unit-III: Relationship Marketing B2B commerce


• Building Customer Loyalty in B2B Commerce
• Buyer and Seller Relationship
• Cross Border B2B Relationship with Intermediaries
• Managing Relationship in supply chain of the 21st Century
• Measuring Effectiveness of Relationship Marketing

Unit-IV: CRM in Service Sector


• CRM in Financial Services (Banking, Insurance, Customer focused IT
Organization)
• CRM in Health Care Industry
• CRM in Hospitality Industry
• CRM in Telecom Industry

67
Unit-V: CRM Systems
• Call Centres
• Internet and Website
• Data Warehouse and Data Mart
• Campaign Management
• Content Management

References:

 Ferrell O.C and Hartline D. Michael, Marketing Strategy, Thomson South-


Western, USA, 2005.
 Gosney W. John and Boehm P. Thomas., Customer Relationship Management,
Essentials, Prentice Hall of India, Pvt, New Delhi, 2001.
 Hair. JR, F. Joseph, et.al., Marketing Research, Tata Mcgraw Hil Publication,
New Delhi, 2003.
 Hughes, Arthur Middleton., The Customer Loyalty Soluton, Tata Mcgraw Hill
Publication, New Delhi, New Delhi, 2003.
 Kapoor K. Satish and Kansal Purva., Marketing Logistics, Pearson Educational,
Singapore, 2003.
 Kotler Philip and Armstrong Gary, Principles of Marketing, Prentice Hall of
India, Pvt, New Delhi,2005.
 Lamb W. Charles, et.al., Marketing, South Western College publication, USA,
1996.
 Schiffman G. Leon and Kanuk Leslie Lazar., Consumer Behaviour, Prentice Hall
of India, Pvt, New Delhi, 2004.
 Seth Rakesh and Seth Kirti, Creating Customer Delight, Response Books, Sage
Publication, New Delhi, 2005.
 Zikmund G. William, et al., Customer Relationship Management, Wiley and
Sons, Singapore, 2003.

CORE- MARKETING AND CONSUMER ANALYSIS

Unit I Understanding Marketing Management

• Defining Marketing and Marketing process


• Marketing for the 21st century
• New Marketing Landscape
• Marketing Strategies and Plan
• Managing Marketing effort

68
Unit II Marketing Information System

• Marketing Research and forecast


• Developing and Analysising Marketing Information
• Marketing Environment
• Responding to marketing environment

Unit III Marketing Strategy and Marketing mix

• Segmentation
• Target marketing
• Positioning for competitive advantage
• Building strong brands

Unit IV Market & Consumer Behaviour

• Consumer Buyer Behaviour


• Business Buyer Behaviour
• Institutional and Government markets

Unit V
• Consumer motivation and perception
• Consumer attitude formation and change
• Communication and consumer behaviour

References:

1. Philip Kotler& Kevin Lane Keller-Marketing Management-Prentice-Hall India


2. Philip Kotler & G.Armstrong-Principles of Marketing-Prentice-Hall,India
3. O C Ferrell&Michael D Hartline-Marketing Strategy- Thomson, south western
4. M J Xavier- Strategic Marketing –Response Books-NewDelhi
5. P N Bloom&G T Gundlach-Handbook of Marketing and Society- Sage publications
6. L G Schiffman & L L Kanuk- Consumer Behaviour-Prentice Hall India
7. Lamb, Hair & McDaniel – Marketing-South western college publishers

69
70
CORE- INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS AND PERSONNEL MANAGEMENT

Unit I: Introduction

• Definition and changing concept of industrial relations


• Labour relations :concept-tripartite conventions, limitations of management
prerogatives
• Trade union: History-Theories-structure-role-problems

Unit II Industrial disputes & Grievance Redressal

• Types of industrial disputes and causes


• Methods of prevention and settling industrial disputes
• Causes of grievances and Grievance Redressal machinery

Unit III Legislation concerning settling of disputes

• Legislation Preceding Industrial Disputes Act,1947


• Industrial Disputes Act ,1947
• Authorities and Reference of Disputes
• State Laws

Unit V Labour Welfare

• Workmen’s compensation Act,1923


• Trade Union act,1926
• Payment of wages Act,1936
• Industrial employment Act,1946
• Minimum wage Act,1948
• Employees’ State Insurance Act,1948,
• The Employees’ Provident Fund and Miscellaneous Provision Act,1952
• Payment of Bonus Act,1965
• The Payment of Gratuity Act,1972
• Child labour (Prohibition and regulation ) Act,1986
• Equal Remuneration Act,1976
• Factory legislation

Unit-V Personnel Management

• Human Resource Planning


• Recruitment & Selection
• Performance Appraisal
• Compensation and Rewards

71
References:

1.Edwin B.Flippo –Personnel Management –McGraw-Hill international Editions


2.R S Davar Personnel Management and Industrial Relations- Vikas Publishing House
Pvt Ltd
3.C B Mamoria & S V Gankar- Personnel Management-Himalya Publishing House
4.Arun Monappa-Industrial Relations-Tata McGraw Hill Edition
5.P R N Sinha etal, 2006 –Industrial relations, Trade Unions, and Labour legislation-
Pearson Education, NewDelhi
6.Mamoria CB and Sathish Mamoria, Dyanamics of industrial Relations, Himalya
Publishing House, NewDelhi, 1998
7. Srivastava, Industrial Relations and Labour Laws, Vikas, 2000

ELECTIVE-II

CHANGE MANAGEMENT

Unit I : Introducing Change Management


• Understanding change
• Diversity of change
• Types of change
• Models of change

Unit II : Perspective and Paradise

Perspective:
• Consistency
• Resource Dependency
• Population ecology
• Institution Paradise
• Critical
• Social constructionism / constructive
• Post modernist

Unit III : Emerging the change management from HR Perspective

• Organization structure
• Organization culture and management change
• Recruitment selection and management change
• HRD Management change
• Reward management and management change
• Employee relation and management of change
• Downsizing and management change

72
Unit IV : Issues in strategy and change

• Issues of rationalist approach to change


• Culture and change management
• Mind set and paradigms related to mindset

Unit V : Change and modern business

• Modern development in business strategy


• Human impact of organization change
• Change in the global market

References:

 Change Equation: Capitalizing on Diversity for Effective Organizational Change


by J. Renae Norton and Ronald E. Fox (Hardcover - Mar 1997)

 Harvard Business Review on Change (Harvard Business Review Paperback


Series) by John P. Kotter, James Collins, Richard Pascale, and Jeanie Daniel
Duck (Paperback - Sep 1998)

 Deep Change: Discovering the Leader Within (Jossey-Bass Business &


Management Series) by Robert E. Quinn (Hardcover - Aug 14, 1996)

 Innovation Management: Strategies, Implementation, and Profits by Allan Afuah


(Hardcover - Jun 15, 2002)

 The Manager as Change Agent: A Practical Guide to Developing High-


Performance People and Organizations by Jerry Gilley, Scott Quatro, Erik
Hoekstra, and Doug Whittle (Paperback - Jul 2, 2001)

 Communicating for Change (Jossey Bass Business and Management Series) by


Roger D'Aprix (Paperback - Feb 16, 1996)

EXTRA DISCIPLINARY ELECTIVE- II

BUSINESS ETHICS AND CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

Unit I. UNDERSTANDING BUSINESS ETHICS


* Concept, Nature, Importance & S Scope of Business Ethics
* Ethical Values & Theories, Ground Rules of Business Ethics,
Office Ethics & Business Ethics

73
* Developing Morality Stage by Stage
* Developing Ethical Culture
Unit II. ETHICAL ISSUES IN WORK PLACE

* Civil Liberties, Personal Policies, Unions


* Challenges in Work Place - Information, Working Condition,
* Moral Choices - Obligation to the firm, Abuse of official parties,
Principles of Kick Backs, Gift & event
* Job discrimination - Discrimination, Sexual Harassment

Unit III. BUSINESS AND SOCIETY

* Consumers
* Business Responsibility - Product, Prizing, Labeling, Advertising
* Environmental Issues - Environmental & Environmental Ethics

Unit IV. CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

* Issues & Principles


* Corporate Boards & Governance
* New Paradigms
* Compliance Report
* Made for Good Governance

Unit V. CORPORATE GOVERNANCE IN ENERGY MARKETING & LEADERSHIP

* Corporate Governance & Global Economy


* Experience of Argentina, Brazil, Czechoslovakia, Egypt
* Hungary, Korea & Singapore
* Corporate Governance & Leadership

REFERENCE BOOK:

* Bhatia.S.K., BUSINESS ETHICS & CORPORATE GOVERNANCE, Deep & Deep


Publication PVT LTD., New Delhi. 2004
* William H. Shaw, BUSINESS ETHICS, 4th Edition, Shompson wads worth US 2003
* CORPORATE GOVERNANCE: Principles & Paradigms, ICFAI
* CORPORATE GOVERNANCE IN EMERGING MARKET, Volume I & II, ICFAI.

74
FOURTH SEMESTER

CORE-HUMAN RESOURCE DEVELOPMENT-II

Unit-I: Strategic HRM:

• Concept and aim of SHRM


• Approaches
• Formulation and implementation of HR Strategies
• SHRM Models

Unit-II: Competency based HRM:

• Concept and Uses


• Developing a behavioral competency frame work
• Developing a technical / functional competency frame work
• Application of competency frame work

Unit-III: Knowledge Management and Talent Management

• Basic concepts
• Approaches and issues of knowledge management
• Knowledge management system
• Talent management process
• Attraction and retention strategy
• Talent audits

Unit-IV: Rewarding People

• Reward management
• Market rate analysis
• Grade and play structures
• Rewarding special groups

Unit-V: International HRM

• The context of IHRM


• Challenges of IHRM
• Characteristics of IHRM

75
• International HR Policies

References:

 K.Aswathapa “Human resource and Personnel management-Text and Cases” Tata


McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Ltd, NewDelhi, 2002
 Biswajeet Pattyanak “Human resource Management” Prentice-Hall of India Pvt
Ltd, 2005, Newdelhi.
 Wendell L. French “Human resource Management” Houghton Mifflin Company,
USA, (All India Publishers and Distributors, Chennai) 1997
 Robert L Mathis & John II.Jackson “Human resource Managemen-tenth edition”
Thomson south western, Singapore, 2003
 Ian Beardwell & Len Holden “Human resource Management A contemporary
Approach “ Financial Times- Pretince Hall, 2001
 David A. Decenzo & Stephen P. Robbins “Fundamentals of “Human resource
Management” John Willey & Sons (Asia) Pvt, Ltd, 2005
 Gary Desseier, “Human resource Management” Pretince - Hall, India, 2005.
 Cynthia D. Fisher et al., Human Resource Management, Biztantra, New Delhi,
2004.
 John Bratton and Jeffrey gold, Human Resource Management Theory and
Practice, Palgrave, New York, 1999.
 Michel Armstrong, A Hand Book of HRM Practice, Kogan Page, London, 2003.

CORE- ORGANIZATIONAL BEHAVIOUR

Unit-I: Introduction

• Definition and types of organizations


• Theoretical approaches to the study of organization
• Classical organization theory – Bureaucracy – Scientific management
• Human relations approach (Hawthorne experient)
• Modern organizational theory- open systems approach and contingency approach

Unit-II: Organizational Behaviour

• Elements of Organizational behaviour systems


• Models of organizational behaviour: Autocratic- Custodial- Supportive- Collegial
model

Unit-III: Group Dynamics

• Formal and informal groups

76
• Nature of groups
• Group cohesiveness, group performance and Group norms

Unit-IV: Leadership

• Leadership style
• Types of leadership
• Leadership skills

Unit- V: Organizational Communication

• Inter personal communication


• Downward Communication
• Upward communication
• Interactive Communication

Text Books

Fred, Luthans (1989) Organizational Behaviour, McGraw Hill, International


Editions,New York.

Hugh, Arnold and Danial, Heldman (1989) Organizational Bahaviour

Keith, Davis and John Newstorm (1989), Human Behaviour at work: Organizational
Behaviour, McGraw Hill Book and Co., New York.

Elective -III

TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT

Unit I : Total Quality Concept and Objectives

The concept of TQM- principles of TQM - Modern quality management- the quality
gurus of Deming , Jurans and Crosby-quality and business performance- quality in
leadership – communication – culture- management system

Unit II : Total quality management-

Quality – a traditional misconception of quality management – the total quality


management approach – commitment and attitude to quality – the three hard components
of TQM – Implementing TQM - Essential for quality.

77
Unit III: Quality in various levels – inspection - -definition of inspection – reasons for
inspection – functional testing - the role of testing – fitness for purpose – measurement –
testing –National and international standards – aims and principles of standardization –
international standardization – European standardization and the European community –
National standardization – certification-
Unit IV : Organizing for design quality – implementation of product design – aligning
responsibility with authority - automation of testing – test procedures – measuring
service quality - inspection tools and equipment.- vendor assurance – informal
organization for conformity quality – establishing a quality programme

UNIT –V: Bench marking – the essence of Benchmarking and the Bottom Line – the
benefits of Bench marking – the bench marking process BS ISO 9000 Certification
around the world – the standards who can register – the certification process – benefits of
ISO 9000 and problems - the third party audit - ISO 9000 Vs the Baldrige award –
ISO 14000 – Components of ISO 14000 - Registration – Benefits

References:

 Xu , Q. (1994) The making of TQM: History and margins of the hi(gh) story
 ^ Bergman B. & Klefsjö B. (2007) Kvalitet från behov till använding
 ^ Bergman B. & Klefsjö B. (2007) Kvalitet från behov till använding
 Business Process Benchmarking (The Asqc Total Quality Management) by
Robert C. Camp (Hardcover - Jan 1995)
 Advancing Quality: Total Quality Management in the National Health Service
(Health Services Management) by Richard Joss and Maurice Kogan (Hardcover -
Oct 1995)
 Introducing Total Quality Management: A Credit Union Reader by Cuna
(Paperback - Sep 1993)

78
5. M.A. DEGREE COURSE IN ENGLISH

SYLLABUS

THIRD SEMESTER
Course Structure: Paper IX

Title of the Course /


Paper Shakespeare Studies
Category of the Year & Semester Credits Subject Code
Course C 2nd Year &Third 4
Semester

Pre-requisites Minimum Entry requirements for the course / Eligibility


Objectives of the The objective of this paper is to make students understand and enjoy
Course Shakespeare’s plays, Criticism of Theatre. It also attempts to provide the
students with the context of Elizabethan England from the evolving
contemporary perspectives down the ages.
Course Outline UNIT I

Shakespeare Theatre; Theatre Conventions; Sources; Problems of


categorization; Trends in Shakespeare Studies upto the 19th Century; Sonnet and
court politics; famous actors; theatre criticism; Shakespeare into film & play
production.
UNIT 2

Sonnets Sonnets – 12, 65, 86,130

Comedies Much Ado About Nothing


Winter’s Tale

UNIT 3

Tragedy Othello

UNIT 4

History Henry IV Part I

79
UNIT 5

Shakespeare Criticism
Modern approaches - mythical, archetypal, feminist, post-colonial, New
historicist;
A.C. Bradley (extract) Chapter V & VI and the New
Introduction by John Russell
Brown in Shakespearean
Tragedy by A.C.Bradley,
London , Macmillan, Third
Edition , 1992

Wilson Knight Macbeth and the Metaphysic of


Evil (1976, V.S. Seturaman &
S. Ramaswamy English
Critical Tradition Vol. I.
Chennai, Macmillan).

Stephen Greenblatt Invisible Bullets: Rennaissance


Authority and its Subversion,
Henry IV & Henry V, in
Shakespearean Negotiations.
New York:
Oxford University Press, 1988
Also in Political Shakespeare:
New Essays in Cultural
Materialism. Eds.Jonathan
Dollimore and Alan Sinfield
Manchester University Press,
1994

Ania Loomba Sexuality and Racial Difference


in Gender, Race, And
Renaissance Drama,
Manchester UP, 1989.

C – Core; E – Elective; ED – Extra disciplinary

Recommended Texts:

1. Stephen Greenblatt, ed., 1997, The Norton Shakespeare, ( Romances &


Poems, Tragedies, Comedies), W.W. Norton & Co., London.

2. Standard editions of texts.

80
Reference Books:

1. Bradley, A.C., 1904, Shakespearean Tragedy, Macmillan, London.

2. Spurgeon, 1935, C.F.E. Shakespeare’s, Imagery and what It Tells us,


Cambridge UP, Cambridge.

3. E.M.W. Tilliyard, 1943, Elizabethan World Picture, Chatto and Windus,


London.

4. Knight G.W., 1947, The Crown of Life: Essays in Interpretation of


Shakespeare’s Final Plays, Oxford.

5. Harrison, 1951, G.B. Shakespeare’s Tragedies, Routledge, London.

6. Henn, T.R., 1956, The Harvest of Tragedy, London.

7. Knight G.W., 1957, The Wheel of Fire: Essays in Interpretation of


Shakespeare’s Sombre Tragedies, New York.

8. Muir K., 1961, William Shakespeare: The Great Tragedies, London.

9. Hunter G.K. William Shakespeare, 1962, The Late Comedies, London & New
Year.

10. Knights, L.C., 1962, William Shakespeare: The Histories, London.

11. Eastman A.M. & G.B. Garrison eds., 1964, Shakespeare’s Critics from Jonson
to Auden : A Medley of Judgments, Michigan.

12. Oscar James Campbell, ed., 1966, A Shakespeare Encyclopedia, London,


Methuen & Co.

13. Jonathan Dollimore, ed., 1984, The Radical Tragedy, The Harvester Press,
Cambridge.

14. Shakespeare Surveys, (Relevant Volumes).

15. John f. Andrews, ed., 1985, William Shakespeare: His World, His Work, His
Influence, Charles Scribner’s Sons.

16. Stephen Greenblatt, 1988, Shakespearean Negotiations, Oxford University Press


.

17. Ania Loomba, 1989, Gender, Race, Renaissance Drama, Manchester, MUP.

81
18. Jonathan Dollimore and Alan Sinfield, eds., 1994, Political Shakespeare,
Manchester University Press.

Website, e-learning resources


http://www.shakespeare.bham.ac.uk/resources

Course Structure: Paper X

Title of the Course /


Paper English Language and Linguistics
Category of the Year & Semester Credits Subject Code
Course C 2nd year & Third 4
Semester

Pre-requisites Minimum Entry requirements for the course / Eligibility


Objectives of the Objectives of the course is to enable the students to have a conceptual
Course understanding of the English Language in a historical perspective; to recognize,
identify and use sounds and structures; to identify and explain process of
second language acquisition; to adopt and practise English Language Teaching
approaches.

Course Outline UNIT I


The History of English Language
a) The Descent of the English Language
b) The Old and Middle English periods, the Renaissance and after
c) The growth of vocabulary
d) Change of meaning
e) The evaluation of Standard English
UNIT 2

Phonology

a) Cardinal vowels, The English vowels, Diphthongs and consonants


b) Transcription
c) The syllable, Received pronunciation and the need for a model
UNIT 3

Linguistics

a) Morphology, Phrases and sentences


b) Syntax, Semantics
c) Pragmatics and discourse analysis

82
UNIT 4

English Language Teaching

a) First and Second Language Acquisition


b) Role of Teacher, Learner, Classroom
c) Language Teaching Approaches

UNIT 5

Approaches to Grammar

a) Structuralist Grammar
b) Transformative Generative Grammar
c) Communicative Grammar

C – Core; E – Elective; ED – Extra disciplinary

Recommended Texts:

1. F.T. Wood, 1969, “An Outline History of the English Language,


Macmillan, London. Reprint.

2. Palmer, Frank, 1973, Grammar, Penguin.

3. Gimson A.C., 1975, An Introduction to the Pronunciation of English,


ELBS and Edward Arnold Ltd., London.

4. S. Pitt Corder, 1987, Applied Linguistics, Penguin.

5. George Yule, 1996, The Study of Language, Second Edition Cambridge UP.

6. Crystal David, 1997, Linguistics, Penguin.

7. A.C. Baugh, A History of the English Language,

8. Crystal, David, 2002, Internet and Language.

Reference Books:

1. H.H.Sterne, 1984, Fundamental Concepts in Language Teaching , OUP.

83
2. Diane Larsven –Freeman, 2004, Techniques and Principles in Language
Teaching, OUP, Indian Edition.

3. Balasubramanian T., A Textbook of English Phonetics, Macmillan.

Website, e-learning resources


www.exchanges.state.gov/education/engteaching/onlineca.htm_35K

Course Structure: Paper XI

Title of the Course /


Paper Literary Criticism and Literary Theory
Category of the Year & Semester Credits Subject Code
Course C 2nd Year & Third 4
Semester

Pre-requisites Minimum Entry requirements for the course / Eligibility


Objectives of the This paper intends to give an overview of the critical trends starting from
Course Aristotle’s classical criticism to the post-structural and post-colonial theories.
Classical, New-classical, Romantic critics are represented to familiarise the
students with aesthetic concepts. Matthew Arnold and T.S.Eliot lead the way to
the humanistic approach while texts from Brooks, Frye, Said lead the student to
structuralist and post-structuralist approaches.

Course Outline UNIT I

Imitation - Pleasure and Instruction - Myths and Archetypes -Poetic Structure


-Diction; Text –Author-Reader - The ‘Other’ – Formalism – Structuralism –
Deconstruction – Post-Colonialism.
UNIT 2

Classical, Neo - Classical and Romantic Criticism

Aristotle Poetics: Aristotle’s view of


Imitation & Definition of
Tragedy
Chapters 1-3,6-12 and 14.

Sir Philip Sidney Apologie for Poetry


William Wordsworth Preface to Lyrical Ballads
S.T. Coleridge Biographia Literaria Ch 14

84
UNIT 3

Humanistic Criticism

Matthew Arnold Study of Poetry


T.S. Eliot Tradition and the Individual Talent
UNIT 4

Formalism and Structuralism

Cleanth Brooks Language of Paradox


Northrop Frye The Archetypes of Literature
Gerard Genette Structuralism and Literary
Criticism

UNIT 5

Post Structuralism

Roland Barthes Death of the Author


Edward Said (From “Orientalism” Extract in
A Post Colonial Studies
Reader)

C – Core; E – Elective; ED – Extra disciplinary

Recommended Texts:

1. T.S. Dorsch. Tr., 1965, Classical Literary Criticism Penguin Books.


Chapters 1 to 3, 6 to 12 and 14.

2. David Lodge, ed., 1972, Twentieth Century Literary Criticism, Longman,


London.

3. S. Ramaswamy and V.S. Seturaman, 1976,1979 (Two Vols.), English Critical


Tradition, Macmillan, Chennai.

4. David Lodge, ed., 1989, Modern Literary Theory, Longman, London.

5. V.S. Seturaman, ed., 1989 Contemporary Criticism, Macmillan, Chennai.

6. Ashcroft, Griffith & Tiffin, eds., 1995, Post-Colonial Studies Reader,


Routledge, London.

85
Reference Books :

1. M.H. Abrams, , 1953, The Mirror and the Lamp, OUP, Oxford.

2. Wimsatt and Brooks, ed., 1957, Literary Criticism – A Short History,


Prentice-Hall, Delhi.

3. David Daiches, 1984, Critical approaches to Literature, Revised Edition,


Orient Longman, Hyderabad.

Course Structure: ELECTIVE

Title of the Course / Literature, Analysis, Approaches and Applications


Paper
Category of the Year & Semester Credits Subject Code
Course (Elective 2nd year & Third 3
Within the Dept)/ED Semester

Pre-requisites Minimum Entry requirements for the course / Eligibility


Objectives of the To enable the student to experience the practical aspects of literature studies to
Course utilise the resulting skills in day-to-day life
Course Outline UNIT I

Practical Criticism – Critique and Book Review.


UNIT 2

Journalism and Mass Communication – Advertising

UNIT 3

Report Writing

UNIT 4

Proof reading and editing


UNIT 5

Technical Writing – Specs, Manuals, Business Correspondence


C – Core; E – Elective; ED – Extra disciplinary

Reference Books:

1. Practical Criticism : D.H. Rawlinson, The Practice of Criticism V.S. Seturaman


et.al., Practical Criticism C.B. Cox: The Practice of Criticism.

86
2. Resource books for teachers (eds) Krishnaswamy & Sivaraman. Interface
between Literature and Language (ed) Durant & Fabb. Reading Literature,
Gower & Pearson.
3. Kamath, M.V. The Journalist ‘s Handbook, Vani Eductional Books,
New Delhi, 1986.

4. Kamath, M.V. Professional Journalism.


5. Teal, L. and Taylor R. Into the Newsroom: An Introduction to Journalism.

6. Warren, Thomas, L. , 1985, Technical Writing. Purpose, Process and Form,


Wadsworth Publishing Company.

7. Itule, Bruce. D., 1994, News Writing and Reporting for Today’s Media.
McGraw Hill.

8. Gerson, Sharon, J. and Steven, M. Gerson., 2000, Technical Writing: Process


and Product, Prentice Hall.

Course Structure: Elective

Title of the Course / Copy Editing


Paper
Category of the Year & Semester Credits Subject Code
Course ED Second Year & Third 4
(Elective within the Semester
department)
Pre-requisites Minimum Entry requirements for the course / Eligibility
Objectives of the To introduce students to the sphere of Publishing, its various aspects and train
Course them in the skills of copy editing.
Course Outline UNIT I

Publishing Industry: Concept; Organisation; Function; Depts


UNIT 2

Process – Manuscript to Pre-Press Production – An Overview

UNIT 3

Copy Editing: - Basics; Function; Role; Process;

Copy Editor; Role and Responsibility

87
UNIT 4

The Book: Book as a Product; Ethics and Politics in Publishing


UNIT 5

E-Publishing; Prospects of Copy Editing

C – Core; E – Elective; ED – Extra disciplinary

Recommended Texts:

1. 1982, The Chicago Manual of Style, Prentice – Hall of India Pvt Ltd., New
Delhi.

2. Rob Kitchin & Duncan Fuller, 2005, The Academic’s Guide to Publishing,
Vistaar Publications, New Delhi.

Reference Books:

1. John F.J. Cabibi, 1973, Copy Preparation for Printing, Mc-Graw-Hill Book
Company, U.S.A.

2. Charles W. Ryan, 1974, Writing: A Practical Guide for Business and


Industry, John Wiley & Sons Inc., New York.

3. The Bodley Head, 1976, Type for Books: A Designer’s Manual, Great Britain.

4. Sir Stanley Unwin L.L.D, 1976, The Truth About Publishing, George Allen &
Unwin Ltd., London.

Website: www.copydesk.org

88
FOURTH SEMESTER

Course Structure: Paper XII

Title of the Course /


Paper Twentieth Century Poetry
Category of the Year & Semester Credits Subject Code
Course C 2nd Year &Third 4
Semester

Pre-requisites Minimum Entry requirements for the course / Eligibility


Objectives of the The aim of this paper is to sensitise the students to various aspects of British
Course 20th century poetry. It embraces important ideas, movements and systems of
thought that contributed to the rich diversity of 20th century life in England and
in Europe.
Course Outline UNIT I

Edwardian and Georgian Poetry - Modernism – Modernity – Religion –


Imagism – Symbolism – Influence of representational arts in poetry - European
influences – Influence of Marx on World Wars – Welfare State – Free Verse –
Montage, Postmodern Poetry and Politics.

UNIT 2

Classical Modernists

W.B. Yeats Sailing to Byzantium


T.S. Eliot The Wasteland

UNIT 3

War and Modernist Poetry

Wilfred Owen Strange Meeting


W.H. Auden In Memory of W.B. Yeats

89
UNIT 4

Anti–Modernism

Movement Poets

Philip Larkin Whitsun Weddings


Ted Hughes Crow’s Theology
Thom Gunn On the Move

Welsh Poets

Dylan Thomas Do Not Go Gentle Into That Good


Night
R. S. Thomas Here

UNIT 5

Post-Modern Poetry

Seamus Heaney Digging

Craig Raine A Martian Sends a Post Card Home


C – Core; E – Elective; ED – Extra disciplinary

Recommended Texts:

1. Michael Schmidt, ed., 1980, Eleven British Poets: An anthology, Methuen &
Co. Ltd., Cambridge.

2. Richard Ellmann & Robert O’Clair, 1988, The Norton Anthology of Modern
Poetry, Norton & Company, New York.

References Books:

1. Cleanth Brooks, 1939, Modern Poetry and the Tradition, University of North
Carolina , Press.

2. T.H. Jones, 1963, Dylan Thomas, Oliver & Boyd Ltd.

3. Norman Jeffares, 1971, Yeats: Profiles in Literature, Routledge & Kegan Paul
London.

4. Harlod Bloom, 1972, Yeats, Oxford University Press, London.

90
5. 1974, Eight Contemporary Poets, Oxford University Press. London,

6. 1976, Poetry of the First World War, J.M. Gregson Studies in English
Literature Series Edward Arnold, London.

7. John Unterecker, 1977, A Reader’s Guide to William Butler Yeats, Thames and
Hudson Southampton.

8. 1978, The Pelican Guide to English Literature: The Modern Age, Penguin
Books.

9. P.R. King, 1979, Nine Contemporary Poets: Critique of poetry, Metheun,


London.

10. Rajnath, 1980, T.S. Eliot’s The Theory and Poetry, Arnold Hienemann: New
Delhi.

Website, e-learning resources


http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/English_literature

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/poetry

Course Structure: Paper XIII

Title of the Course / Writings by and on Women


Paper
Category of the Year & Semester Credits Subject Code
Course C 2nd year & Fourth 4
Semester

Pre-requisites Minimum Entry requirements for the course / Eligibility


Objectives of the The primary aim of this paper is to give space to writings by
Course women. Even in the syllabus a woman writer is marginalized.
However, in the process of giving adequate space to women
writers the paper aims at sensitizing students to the problems
faced by women and how women have responded in their
attempt to expose them, in their writings.
Course Outline UNIT 1: Varieties of Feminism – concept of gender –
androgyny- Language of women –
environment and women- double
marginalisation.

91
UNIT 2: Poetry:
Anne Bradstreet Prologue
Marianne Moore Poetry
Sylvia Plath Lady Lazarus.
Maya Angelou Still I Rise
Margaret Atwood Marsh
Languages
Charmaine D’Souza When God
made me a
Whore(Rajani P, V.
Rajagopalan, Nirmal
Selvamony, eds.,
Living & Feeling,
Dept. of English.,
M.C.C.)
UNIT 3: Prose:
John Stuart Mill On subjection of women (V.S.
Seturaman & C.T. Indra ed.,
1994, Victorian Prose,Macmillan
India, Chennai. pp-318)
Virginia Woolf A Room of One’s Own
(chapters 3 & 4) (Jennifer Smith
ed., 1998, A Room of One’s
Own by Virginia Woolf,
Cambridge UP, New Delhi.)

Vandana Shiva “Introduction to


Ecofeminism”( Vandana Shiva &
Maria Mies, 1993, Ecofeminism,
Kali for Women, New Delhi.

Alice Walker In Search of Our Mother’s


Garden
UNIT 4: Fiction
Arundathi Roy The God of Small Things
Jean Rhys Wide Sargosa Sea
Kate Chopin The Awakening

UNIT 5: Drama
Lorraine Hansberry Raisin in the Sun
Jane Harrison Stolen
C – Core; E – Elective; ED – Extra disciplinary

92
Recommended Texts:

1. Sandra M. Gilbert and Susan Gubar, ed., 1985, The Norton Anthology of
Literature by Women, New York.

2. Rajani P. , V. Rajagopalan, and Nirmal Selvamony, Who says my hand a


needle better fits: An Anthology of American Women Writing, Dept. of
English, Madras Christian College, Tambaram.

3. Standard editions of texts.

Reference Books :

1. Lisa Tuttle, 1986, Encyclopedia of Feminism, Facts on File


Publications, New York.

2. Catherine Belsey & Jane Moore, eds., 1977, The Feminist Reader,
II ed., Macmillan, London.

3. Kathy J. Wilson, 2004, Encyclopedia of Feminist Literature,


Greenwood Press, Westport.

Course Structure: Paper XIV

Title of the Course / General Essay


Paper
Category of the Year & Semester Credits Subject Code
Course C Second Year & Fourth 4
Semester

Pre-requisites Minimum Entry requirements for the course / Eligibility


Objectives of the The course aims at training the students to write long essays on a given topic in
Course the literary/critical history. This course will help the students to write the UGC
– JRF examination and other national level competitive examinations.
Course outline Drama
The Novel
Poetry
Indian and Commonwealth Drama
The Twentieth-Century American Novel
The Indian and Commonwealth Novel
The Satirical Essay
The Neo-Classical Age
The Pre-Raphaelites
The Art for Arts Sake Movement
The Symbolist Movement
The Modernists

93
Literary Criticism from Sidney to Johnson
Nineteenth-Century Criticism
Twentieth-Century American Literature
The Shakespeare Canon
The Age of Shakespeare
Shakespearean Tragedy
Shakespearean Comedy
Shakespeare’s Problem Plays
Shakespeare’s Histories
Fools and Clowns in Shakespeare
Villians in Shakespeare’s Plays
Women in Shakespeare’s Plays
The Influence of Foreign Languages on English
English as a World Language
Characteristics of Indian English
The Teaching of Indian English at the Teritary level

Course Structure: Elective

Title of the Course / Film Studies


Paper
Category of the Year & Semester Credits Subject Code
Course E (Elective Second Year & Fourth 3
within the department) Semester
/ED
Pre-requisites Minimum Entry requirements for the course / Eligibility
Objectives of the To combine the popular interest in films with technical and socio-cultural
Course dimensions of film appreciation.
Course Outline UNIT I

History of Cinema in India; Major landmarks in India Cinema

UNIT 2

Kinds of Films

Historical
Patriotic
Documentary
Thrillers etc.

94
UNIT 3

Art of Film Making: Some Important Techniques

Acting/ Photography/Direction/Scriptwriting etc

UNIT 4

Films and Entertainment


Films and Social Responsibility

UNIT 5

Review of Films
C – Core; E – Elective; ED – Extra disciplinary
1.Recommended Texts:

1. Ed. Bill Nichols, 1993 , Movies and Methods Vol. I, Edition


Seagull Books, Calcutta.

2. Ed. Bill Nichols, 1993, Movies and Methods Vol. II, Edition Seagull Books,
Calcutta.

3. Susan Hayward, 2004, Key Concepts in Cinema Studies, Routledge, London.

Reference Books :

1. Louis Giannetti, 1972, Understanding Movies, Prentice Hall, New Jersey.

2. Ed. S. Vasudevan, 2000, Making Meaning in Indian Cinema, OUP, New


Delhi.

Website: www.academic info.net/film.html.

95
Course Structure: Paper XV

Title of the Course /


Paper Project Plus Viva Voce
Category of the Year & Semester Credits Subject Code
Course C Second Year & Fourth 6
Semester

Pre-requisites Minimum Entry requirements for the course / Eligibility


Objectives of the The project aims at equipping the students with the efficient way of presenting
Course their research work and findings in a methodological fashion.

96
6. & 7. M.A. BRANCH III ECONOMICS AND BRANCH III
F- BUSINESS ECONOMICS

THIRD SEMESTER

SYLLABUS

Common Core Courses for both Branch III Economics and Branch III F Business
Economics

Core-Course/Paper-11. MACRO ECONOMIC THEORY - I

UNIT I

National Income Components – circular flow of income in two-three and four


sector economy- concepts of social accounting, Input-Output accounting, flow of funds
accounting and Balance of payments accounting

UNIT II
Basic assumptions of the classists, Says Law of Market, Classical theory of
Employment saving and Investment theory wage and price flexibility criticisms of
classical theory.

UNIT III

Keynesian theory of employment and income , The concept of under


employment – Aggregate demand, The Consumption function and its determinants –
Hypotheses of Absolute, Relative and Permanent Incomes and Life Cycle. The
Investment function and its determinants, The Saving function and Marginal Efficiency
of Capital.

UNIT IV

Theory of Interest – Classical – Loanable Fund – Liquidity Preference Theory –


Hicks – Hansen IS-LM Model.

UNIT V

Theory of Money : Quantity theory money Fischers and Cambridge equation,


Keynesian theory of money – Modern Quantity theory of money – Milton Firedman –
Patinkin's Real Balance Effect – Tobin's Portfolio analysis, Crisis in Keynesian
economics and the revival of monetarism.

97
Core-Course/Paper-12. PUBLIC ECONOMICS -I

UNIT I

Government in Mixed Economy – Public and Private Sectors – Cooperation or


Competition – Role of Public Enterprises in India – Pricing Policies of Public Enterprises
– Administered prices – Peak load pricing – Marginal cost pricing.

UNIT II

Welfare foundation of public economics – Pareto optimality – Arrow's social


welfare function – Majority Rule – Intensity of Preference – Transaction cost and non-
market decision making.

UNIT III

Theory of Social goods – Market failures – Imperfection – Decreasing cost


condition – Collective Consumption – Externalities – Correction of externalities – Partial
and General Equilibrium. Approaches – Theory of Second best .

UNIT IV

Rationale of Public Policy - Allocation of resources- provision of public goods;


Voluntary exchange model; Impossibility of decentralized provisions of public
goods (contributions of Samuelson and Musgrave); Stabilization policy- Keynesian
case for stabilization policy.

UNIT V

Public Expenditure – Wagner's Law – Wiseman – Peacock Hypothesis – Structure


and Growth of Public Expenditure – Evaluation of Public expenditure – Cost Benefit
Analysis – Shadow Prices – Discount Rate – Reforms in Public Expenditure –
Performance Budgeting – Programme Budgeting - Zero Base Budgeting – Appraisal of
Public Expenditure Policy in India.

Core-Course/Paper-13. INTERNATIONAL ECONOMICS – I

UNIT I

Nature and scope of International Economics: Causes of emergence of Foreign


Trade – Theories of International Trade: Classical theories – Adam smith, Absolute cost
Advantage theory, David Ricardo Comparative cost Advantage theory and J.S.Mill’s
Comparative cost advantage and reciprocal theory. Neo Classical theory of Haberler,
Opportunity cost Advantage theory. Basic concepts – Community indifference curves
and Offer curves.

98
UNIT II

Modern theory of International Trade-Heckscher-Ohlin contribution – factor


price equalization theorem-factor prices and factor reversals – obstacles to factor price
equalization.

UNIT III

Terms of Trade – different concepts of Terms of trade – Determinants of Terms of


trade – static and dynamic gains from trade – Samuelson on gains from trade –
Immiserising growth – Technical progress and trade – Hicksian graphical analysis –
neutral, capital saving and labour saving technologies and its impact on terms of trade.

UNIT IV

Role of foreign capital in economic development – issues in foreign capital in economic


development – theory of direct investment – issues in foreign direct investment –
Multinational Corporations – Transfers and Capital movements – interest rate and capital
movements – foreign aid.

UNIT V

Alternative theories of Trade – Economies of Scale, Imperfect competition and


International trade. Monopolistic competition – Technology imitation gaps and Product
cycles

PAPER 14 – ELECTIVE - III

PRINCIPLES OF MANAGEMENT -II

UNIT I
Basic division of functional activities – method of grouping activities - typical
patterns used - of organizational charts and manual

UNIT II
Authority relationship- line function and staff – basics of delegation of
responsibility and authority. Centralization and decentralization of authority and the pros
and cons of each.

UNIT III
Span of control – Pros and cons of narrow and wide spans of control – optimum
spans

UNIT IV
Motivation – determination of behaviour – Employee as a “Total Person” –
Primary incentives.

99
UNIT V
Management by objectives – Management by exception – Decision making theory
in management.

Bibliography:

Recommended Text

1. Harold Koontz, Cyril O&Donnell(1968) :Principles of Management,


McGraw Hill Publishing
Co., Ltd.,
2. Prasad I.M. : Principles and Practice of
Management, Sultanchand &
Co

Books for Reference


1. Allen, LA. : Management and organization,
McGraw Hill Publishing Co., Ltd.,

2. Chandra Bose, D (2002) : Principles of Management and


Administration, PHI.

3. Hellrigel & Jackson, Solum : Management – A Contempora


based approach, Thomson, South Western.

4. Hennagan : Management concepts and practices,


Macmillan India, Ltd.,

5. Peter Drucker : The Practice of Management –


Hillied Publications.

6. Sathyaraju (2002) : Management : Text & Cases, PHI.

7. Stoner (2002) : Management, 6th Edition, PHI.

8. Robbins : Management, 7th Edition, PHI.

9. Certo (2002) : Modern Management, 9th Edition,


PHI.

100
PAPER 14 – ELECTIVE – III

COMPARATIVE ECONOMIC SYSTEM –II


(FOR BRANCH III ECONOMICS)

UNIT I

Economic Reforms in Soviet Russia: Perestrokia – Need – Features – Progress –


Massage for the world.

UNIT II

Economic Development of China since 1949: Economic conditions prior to


revolution – Agricultural and Industrial strategies during Mao period – Great leap
forward – the people’s commune, cultural revolution – Post Mao Economic reforms.

UNIT III

Mixed economic system – features of mixed economic system – role of private


and public sector – experience of India’s a mixed economy.

UNIT IV

Convergence of Capitalism and Socialism: The convergence thesis – Capitalism


and Socialism in highly industrialized Societies – Common Features and Dissimilarities.

UNIT V

Debate between the proponents of capitalist democracies and advocates of


Socialism and its relevance today.

Bibliography:

Recommended Text
1. Sen, K.K. : Comparative Economic System, Sultan & Chand
Company.
2. David W. Conklin : Comparative Economic System, Cambridge
University Press.
3. Grossman : Comparative Economic System.
4. James Angresano : Comparative Economic System, Pearson
Education
Books for Reference:

1. Karl Marx : Das Capital, Vol I,II and III

2. Marx and Engels : Communist Manifesto

101
3. Maurice Dobb : Economic Theory and Socialism. Routlege and
Kegan Paul, London.

4. Maurice Dobb : Soviet Economic Development since 1979.

5. Dobb, M. (1969) : Welfare Economics and Economics of Socialism,


Cambridge University Press Cambridge.

6. Heyek, F.A. (1935),: Collectivist Economic Planning, Routeldge and


Kegan paul, London.

7. Lange, O. and
F. Taylor : On the Economic Theory of Socialism(1938).
University of Minnesotta press, Minnestta.

8. Lenin, V.I.: On Marx and


Engels, (1975) : Foreign languages Press, peking.

9. Lening, V.I.: “Let Wing” :Communism, An infinite Disorder (1975).


Foreign Languages Press, Peking.

10. Joan Robinson : An Essay on Marxian Economics. Macmillan,


London.

11. Wilczynski, J. : Economics of Socialism, 4 e. (1981), George


Allen and Unwin, London.

12. Mikhail Gorbechev : Perestroike – New Thinking for our country and
the World, Collins, London.

13. Sartaj Aziz : Learning from China (1978): Macmillan


Company, London.

14.Xu Dixin : China’s search for Economic Growth – The


Chinese Economy since 1949.

15. Yu Guangyuan (ed.) : China’s Socialist Moodernisation (1984). Foreign


Languages press, Beijing.

16.Anchishkin, A : The Theory of Growth of a Socialist Economy


(1977).Progress Publishers, Moscow.

17. Kozlov, G.A. (ed.) : Political Economy – Socialism (1977).


Progressice Publishers, Moscow.

102
18. Wiles, P.J.D. : Economic Institutions Compared (1977). Basill
Blackwell, Oxford.

19. Tangri, S.S. (ed.) : Command yersus Demand; Systems for


Economic Growth (1967). Health and Company,
Boston.

20. Hecey, Lewis, H. : History of Economic Thought, (1949). The


Macmillan Company, New York.

21. Byres, Terence : The Indian Economy (OIP).

PAPER 14 – ELECTIVE - III

MATHEMATICS FOR ECONOMISTS - II


UNIT I
Constrained Maxima and Minima – Use of Lagrange Multiplier Method –
Application to Utility Maximisation, Profit Maximisation and Cost Minimisation.

UNIT II
Matrices – Matrix operations – Commutative Associative and Distributive Laws –
Determinants – Rank of a matrix – Matrix Inverse – Cramer’s Rule.

UNIT III
Input - Output Analysis – Leontieff Model.

UNIT IV
Linear Programming – Graphical Method – Simplex Method – Primal and Dual.

UNIT V

Elementary Integration Techniques – Indefinite Intergrals – Definite Intergrals –


Economic Applications of Integrals – Consumer’s Surplus – Producer’s Surplus.

Bibliography:

Recommended Text

1. Edward. T. Dowling :Mathematics for Economists, Mcgraw – Hill


Book Company.
2. Mehta V.L.
& Madnani : Mathematics for Economists, Sultan Chand and

103
Sons.

Books for References:

1. Allen R.G.D. :Mathematical Analysis for Economists,


Macmillan andCompany Limited, London.

2. Chiang A.C. :Fundamental Methods of Mathematical


Economics, Mcgraw – Hill Book Company.

3. Stafford.L.W.T. :Mathematis for Economist, The English Language


Book Society and Macdonald and Evans Limited,
London.

4. Mabett. A.J. :Mathematics for Economists, Macmillan Master


Series.

5. Weber : Mathematics for Economists.

PAPER 14 – ELECTIVE - III


ENVIRONMENTAL ECONOMICS –II

I Environmental problems

UNIT I

Habitat: Urban and rural settlements – rapid growth of Population – lack of basic
services.

UNIT II

Energy : Classification – Household energy needs – role of non – conventional


energy sources – fuel wood crisis in rural and urban areas.

UNIT III

Wild life: Diversity of Fauna and Flora in India - endangered species – causes,
effects and control of reduction in bio-diversity.

II Environmental Policies

UNIT IV

Basic approaches to environmental policy – National Campaign on environment


by voluntary agencies.

104
UNIT V

Role of Official Agencies: Tiwari committee Report – Departmental of


Environment – Environmental appraisal of development Projects – Role of the State
Pollution Control Boards – Important Central and State Enactments to Control
Environmental Pollution.

Bibliography:

Recommended Text

1. Sankar. U, (2001) : Environmental Economics, Oxford


University Press, New Delhi.
2. Karpagam. M, (1991) : Environmental Economics, Sterling
Publishers, New Delhi.
3. Sankaran. S, (1994) : Environmental Economics, Margam
Publications, Chennai.

Books for Reference:


1. State of India’s Environment (1999) : The Citizens of fifth Report
Center for Science and
Environment. New Delhi.
2. Nick Hanley, J.F. Shogren
and Ben White (1971) : Environmental Economics,
Macmillan, London.
3. D.W. Pearce and J.J. Warford, (1993) : Economics, Environment
and Sustainabl Development,
Oxford University Press.
4. Tan Hodge, (1995) : Environmental
Economics,Macmillan Press
5. Trivedi R.N. (1988) : Environmental Pollution
and its impact on
Organism, Bhargavi
Bhavan, Patna.
7. Rajasekar. C.V. (1992) : Critical Issues in
Environmental
Management, Discovery
Publishing House,
New Delhi.
7. Seneca Joseph & M.K. Tausing : Environmental Economics,
Prentice Hall.

105
PAPER 14 – ELECTIVE - III

MANAGEMENT ACCOUNTING – II
(FOR BRANCE III –F-BUSINESS ECONOMICS)

UNIT I
Cost Accounting – Meaning – Purpose and Scope – Cost Accounting distinguished
from Financial and Management Accounting – Essentials of a Good Costing System –
Elements of Cost – Cost of Goods Manufactured – Preparation of Cost Sheet and Tenders

UNIT II

Standard Costing – Meaning of Standard Cost – Standard Costing distinguished


from Budgetary Control - Variance Analysis – Meaning – Advantages – Different
Variances – Material Variance – Labour Variance – Sales Variance (excluding overhead
variances).

UNIT III

Marginal Costing – Absorption Costing – Meaning of Marginal Cost - Profit


Volume Ratio – Break-Even Point – Break-Even Charts – Margin of Safety – Profit
Planning – Decision Involving Alternative Choices.

UNIT IV

Capital Budgeting – Meaning – Importance – Methods – Payback Method – Net


Present Value Methods and Internal Rate of Return (IRR) methods – Simple Tools for
Risk Analysis – CPM – PERT – Use of Probability (Simple Problems only).

UNIT V
Working Capital – Meaning – Importance – Factors affecting Working Capital –
Working Capital Forecasting - Leverages – Meaning - Financial Leverage – Operating
Leverage – Combined Leverage

Bibliography:

Recommended Text
1. Maheswari. S.N. : Management Accounting.

2. Palanivel. S. : Management Accounting.

106
Books for Reference

1. Batty. J : Management Accountancy, Macdonald and


Evos.

2. Horngren, C.T. : Cost Accounting – A Management


Emphasis, Prentice Hall.

3. Man Mohan & Goyal S.N. : Principle of Management Accounting ,


Sahityabhavan, Agra.

4. Robert N, Anthony D.C.S. :Management Accounting Principles, D.B.


Taraporevala Sons and Co., Private Ltd.

PAPER – 15 EXTRA DISCIPLINARY - II

ECONOMICS OF DEVELOPMENT – II

UNIT I
Poverty, inequality, and Development – measuring inequality and poverty –
poverty, inequality, and social welfare – Kuznets’inverted-U Hypothesis – Growth and
inequality – Rural poverty – women and poverty – Ahluwalia – Chenery Welfare Index.

UNIT II
Population Growth and Economic Development: Causes, consequences – and
controversies – population growth and the quality of life – the causes of high fertility in
developing countries – the consequences of High fertility – goals and objectives.

UNIT III
Roles of Education and Health – Investing in education and health: the human
capital approach – child labour – the gender gap: women and education – educational
systems and de3velopment – health systems and development.
UNIT IV
Agricultural Transformation and rural development – agricultural progress and
rural development – the structure of agrian system in the developing world – the
economics of agricultural development: transition – subsistence farming: Risk Aversion –
improving small scale agriculture – conditions of rural development – macroeconomic
instability, IMF stabilization policies and their critics.
UNIT V
The nature of development planning and the role of the state – planning in mixed
developing economics – the rationale for development planning – fiscal policy for
development – macrostability and resource mobilization – state owned enterprises.
Military expenditures and economic development.

107
Bibliography:

Recommended Text
1. Adelman, I (1961) : Theories of Economic Growth and
Development, Stanford University Press,
Stanford.

2. Michael P. Todaro and


Stephen C. Smith (2003) : Economic Development, Pearson
Education Pte. Ltd., Singapore.

Books for Reference:

1. Chakravarthy, S. (1982) : Alternative Approaches to a theory of


Economic Growth, Oxford University
Press.

2. Chakravarthy, S. (1989) : Development Planning: The Indian


Experience, Clarendon Press.

3. Chatak, S. (1986) : An Introduction to Development


Economics, Allen and Unwin.

4. Kindleberger, C.P. (1977) : Economic Development 3ed McGraw Hill.

5. Meler, G.M. (ed.) (1984) : Leading Issues in Economic Development


4ed. Oxford University Press.

6. Mair, G.M., and


D. Seers (Eds.) (1987) : Pioneers in Development, Oxford
University Press.

7. Thirillwall, A.P. (1978) : Growth and Development, 2ed. Macmillan

ECONOMICS OF HUMAN RESOURCE DEVELOPMENT - I

UNIT I

Introduction : Concept of human resources, quantitative and qualitative aspects,


human capital in retrospect (Adam Smith and Alfred Marshall)

108
UNIT II

Human capital and development: Growth accounting and residual factor -


alternative methods of estimating the contribution of human capital to development
(Methods of Dennison and Schultz) Human resource policies.

UNIT III

Human Resource Policies: Need, type and scope – Advantage for a written
policy- Human Resources policies and work Culture.

UNIT IV

Developing of Human Resources – Executive development Employees


Employment. On the job training education and – age – earnings profiles – earning
differentials.

UNIT V

Social investment and cost – benefit analysis, problem of cost – benefit analysis
of human capital.

PAPER – 15 EXTRA DISCIPLINARY - II

ECONOMICS OF HUMAN RESOURCE DEVELOPMENT – II


(FOR BRANCH III ECONOMICS ONLY)

UNIT I

Human capital and income contribution – Demand and supply of human capital -
role of ability and family background in investment.

UNIT II

Migration of human capital –internal migration- external migration rates of return


– Economic Liberalization and Human Resource Management – Human Resource
Management in IT Industry – Changing Nature of Work – Workforce Diversity –
Downsizing – Voluntary Retirement Scheme (VRS) – Changing Role of Human
Resource Management.

UNIT III

Non-Market return to human capital; Education and fertility differences:


Education and agricultural productivity.

109
UNIT IV

Functions of Human Resources Management from Procurement to Separation:


Placement, Induction, Transfers, Promotions, Disciplinary action. Termination of
services: Resignation, Dismissal, Retrenchment and Voluntary Retirement Schemes,
Exit interviews.

UNIT V

Methods of man-power planning: Perms (MRP) methods; cost – benefit analysis


method. Criticism of the methods.

Bibliography:

Recommended Text:

1. Gary, S. Becker : Human Capital 2nd Edn.

2. G.Psacharapoubs : Returns to Education

Books for Reference

1. Mark Blaug : An introduction to Economics of Education,


Penguin.

2. T.W. Schultz : Economic Value of Education.

3. J. Mincer : Schooling Experience and Earnings.

4. Jamison and Lau : Farmer Education and Farm Efficiency

5. T.W. Schultz (ed.) : Economics of Family

6. H.S.Parnes (Ed.) : Planning Education for Economic and Social


Change.

7. NCAER : South India: Human Development Report.

8. Svedberg, Peter : Poverty & Under nutrition (OIP)

110
PAPER – 15 EXTRA DISCIPLINARY - II

ENTREPRENEURIAL DEVELOPMENT

UNIT I

The Entrepreneur – Definition – Classification of Entrepreneurs – Factors


influencing Entrepreneurship - Functions of Entrepreneurs. Economic development and
entrepreneurial growth.

UNIT II

Entrepreneurial Development - Entrepreneurial Development Programmes (EDP)


– Role, relevance.– Role of Government – Role of Financial Institutions ICICI – IRDBI.

UNIT III

Entrepreneurial scene in India – Development and Training of Entrepreneur –


Entrepreneur and Business Executive personnel administration and Management
Development – Development of Women Enterpreneurs.

UNIT IV

Organization structure and plant location. Planning for production and inventory
project counseling and technical feasibility. Capital structure and working capital.
Financial appraisal of new project, Role of Banks – Credit appraisal by banks.
Institutional arrangement and entrepreneurship.

UNIT V

Marketing Feasibility – New product ideas and evaluation. Marketing methods –


pricing policy and distribution channels. Exports problems of Small Scale Unit.

Bibliography:

Recommended Text
1. Srinivasan N.P.: Enterprenurial Development.

Books for Reference

1.Vasant Desai : Problems of Prospects of Small Scale Industries


in India. (Himalaya Publishing House, Bombay)

111
2. Khan : Management of Small Scale Industries.
(Sultan Chand Publications.)

3. Clifford and
Joseph P. Mancuso : Entrepreneurship and Venture
Management, (Paraporawala & Co)

4. J.M. Parkin : How to Finance Small Business Enterprise.

5. K.K. Menon : Handbook of Small Industries Management.

6. B.C.Tandon : Environment and Entrepreneur.

7. B.C.Tandon : Environment and Entrepreneur.

8. O.A. Dailey : Entrepreneurial Management.

9. H.N. Pathak : The Entrepreneur, Technician and Manager in


Small Scale Unit.

10. K.L.Sharama : Entrepreneurial Performance in Role


perspectives.

FOURTH SEMESTER
Core-Course/Paper-16. MACRO ECONOMIC THEORY – II

UNIT I

Investment Function – Marginal Efficiency of Investment, Multiplier Analysis,


Accelerator and Investment behavior concepts of super multiplier.

UNIT II

Supply of Money - A Behavioural Model of Money Supply Determination, RBI


Approach to money supply, High powered money and money multiplier, Money Supply
in open economy, Control of money supply.

UNIY III

Theory of Inflation: Concept – Types – Categories, Excess demand Inflation


Keynesian Income Expenditure approach, Inflationary gap – Cost push Inflation – Wage
Push and profit push inflation, Phillips curve Controversy, Tobins modified Phillips
Curve, Policies to control inflation.

112
UNIT IV

Business Cycle: Theories of Schumpeter, Kaldor, Samuelson, Hicks and Goodwin


model, Control of Business Cycles, relative Efficiency of Monetary and Fiscal Policies

UNIT V

Macro Economics is an open Economy, Mundell Flemming Model – New Classical


Macro Economics –Policy Implications of New Classical Approach. Macro Economic
Policy Goals, Full Employment – Price Stability – Economic Growth – Monetary and
Fiscal Mechanism in the Indian Context.

Bibliography:

Recommended Text:
1. Branson, W.A. (1989): Macroeconomic Theory and Policy, (3rd
Edition), Harper and Row, New York.

2. Shapiro, E. (1996): Macroeconomic Analysis, Galgotia Publications,


New Delhi.

Books for Reference

1. Ackley, G. (1978) : Macroeconomics: Theory and Policy,


Macmillan, New York

2 Blackhouse, R.
and A. Salansi (2000) : Macroeconomics and the Real World
(2 Vols.) Oxford University Press,
London.

3. Dornbusch, R. and
F. Stanley (1997) : Macroeconomics, McGraw Hill,
Inc., New York.

4. Gupta S. B(1993) : Monetary Economics, S Chand


Publications, New Delhi.

5. Hall, R.E. and


J.B. Taylor (1986) : Macroeconomics, W.W. Norton,
New York.

113
6. Heijdra, B.J. and
V.P. Fredericck (2001) : Foundations of Modern
Macroeconomics, Oxford
University Press, New Delhi.

7. Jha, R. (1991) : Contemporary Macroeconomic Theory and


Policy,Wiley EasterLtd., New Delhi.

8. Romer, D.L. (1996) : Advanced Macroeconomics, McGraw Hill


Company Ltd.,New York.

9. Scarfe, B.L. (1977) : Cycles, Growth and Inflation,


McGraw Hill, New York.

10. Shapiro, E. (1996) : Macroeconomic Analysis, Galgotia Publications,


New Delhi.

11. Surrey, M.J.C. (Ed.) (1976) : Macroeconomic Themes, Oxford


University Press, Oxford.

Core-Course/Paper-17. PUBLIC ECONOMICS -II

UNIT I

Taxation –Theories of Taxation – Benefit and Ability to pay Principles – Concept


of Excess Burden of Taxes – Classical and Modern views – Tax Structure in India –
Particular Taxes – Personal income Tax – Corporation Income Tax – Capital Gains Tax –
Union Excise Duties - MANVAT, MODVAT –VAT - Tax Evasion – Tax Reforms –
State Taxes – Agricultural Taxation – Appraisal of Tax Policies of India.

UNIT II

Public Debt – Theories of Public Debt – Classical and modern theories – Concept
of Burden of Public debt – Growth and composition of public debt in India - Debt
Management.

UNIT III

Fiscal Policy – Fiscal and monetary policies – Budgetary, Fiscal deficit and its
measurement – Fiscal Reforms – Fiscal policy for stabilization – Fiscal Policy and
liberalization. Fiscal Crisis and Fiscal Sector reforms in India.

114
UNIT IV

Fiscal Federalism – Principles of Federal Finance – Fiscal federalism in India –


Assignment of functions and sources of Revenue – Logic of the constitutional scheme.

UNIT V

Finance Commission and Planning Commission – Reports of Finance


Commissions in India - Resource Transfer mechanism in India – Backwardness and other
criteria – Union State Financial Relations – Problem of State Indebtedness. Local Finance
– Finance for Local Bodies – Panchayat Raj Institutions – Reforms – 73 and 74
Amendments – State Finance Commission Report and its recommendations.

Bibliography:

Recommended Text:
1. Bhargava (2004) : Public finance, Its Theory and working in
India, Chaitanya Publishing House.

2. Musgrave, R.A. (1959) : The Theory of Public Finance, McGraw


Hill, Kogakhusa, Tokyo
3. Musgrave, R.A. and
P.B. Musgrave (1976) : Public Finance in Theory and Practice,
McGraw Hill, Kogakusha, Tokyo.
Books for Reference

1. Atkinson, A.B. and


J.E. Siglitz (1980) : Lectures on Public Economics,
Tata McGraw Hill, New York.

2. Auerbach, A.J. and


M. Feldstern (Eds.) (1985) : Handbook of Public Economics, Vol. I,
North Holland, Amsterdam.

3. Buchanan, J.M. (1970) : The Public Finances, Richard D. Irwin,


Homewood.

4. Goode, R. (1986) : Government Finance in Developing


Coutnries, Tata McGraw Hill,
New Delhi.

5. Houghton, J.M. (1970) : The Public Finance : Selected Readings,


Penguin, Harmondsworth.

6. Jha, R. (1998) : Modern Public Economics, Routledge,


London.

115
7. Menutt, P. (1996) : The Economics of Public Choice, Edward
Elgar, U.K.

8. Shoup, C.S. (1970) : Public Finance, Aldine, Chicago.

9. Shome, P. (Ed.) (1995) : Tax Policy : Handbook, Tax Division,


Fiscal Affairs Department, International
Monetary Fund,Washington D.C.

Websites:

1. The ICFAI Journal of Public Finance: www.icfaipress.org/ijpf.asp-62k.


2. The ICFAI Journal Public Administration: www.icfaipress.org/ijpa.asp- 62k

Core-Course/Paper-18. INTERNATIONAL ECONOMICS – II

UNIT I

Trade Policy: Case for free trade versus protection - Tariffs and Quota – theory of
customs union – trade problems of developing countries: UNCTAD – GATT and Tokyo
declaration- WTO – import substitution and export promotion – North South dialogue –
New International Economic Order.

UNIT II

Balance of Payment and National Income – foreign trade multiplier and National
Income – Repercussions of Balance of payment disequilibrium and stability problem –
BOP and exchange rate determination – Purchasing Power Parity Theory – fixed versus
flexible exchange rate system – developments in international monetary system.

UNIT III

Balance of Payment and disequilibrium - Balance of Payment disequilibrium and


corrective measures – Automatic mechanisms under fixed and flexible exchange rates –
Recent developments in exchange rate management.

UNIT IV

Devaluation: elasticity approach, income absorption approach – monetary


approach – exchange controls – means of achieving internal and external equilibrium –
Fiscal and monetary mix.

116
UNIT V

International Monetary System: Problems in International Monetary System –


International debt - International Liquidity – I.M.F. and Special Drawing Rights – Euro-
dollar market. – recent developments and issues in regional common currencies.

Bibliography:

Recommended Text
1. M.C.Vaish & Sudama Singh : International Economics, Oxford &
IBH.

2. K.C.Rana and K.N.Verma(2004-05) :International Economics, Vishal


Publishing Co. Jalandhar,.

3. Francis Cherunilam(1998) : International Economics,


3rd Edition, TataMcGraw Hill
Publishing company.
Books for Reference

1. Bo Sodersten.(1980) : International Economics.

2. Kindleberger, C.P. : International Economics, 5th Edition.


3. Paul R. Krugman and
Maurice Obstfed (2005) : International Economics
Theory and Policy, 6th Edition, Pearson
Education.

4. Bhagawati. J, : International Economics.

5. Dominick Salvatore, 2004 : International Economics, 8th edition,


Wiley Student edition,.

6.Mundell, Robert, A. : International Economics.

Websites:

1. www.peopleswatch.com
2. www.wto.org.com.
3. www.foreigntrade.in.india.com.
4. www.iie.com
5. www.unctad.org

117
In lieu of Project work, two core Courses/papers for
Branch III – Economics and Branch III - F - Business Economics as follows:

Core-Course/Paper-19. FINANCIAL ECONOMICS

UNIT I

Money market – Banks - regulation of working capital finance.

UNIT II

Capital market – structure – characteristics – primary , secondary markets – market


intermediaries, stock brokers, under writers – depositories credit rating agencies.

UNIT III

Stock market system – trading, listing, regulation of stack market operations –


market efficiency – NSE- OTC. Online trading system – SEBI Guidelines for capital
issues – pricing – insider trading – investor protection.

UNIT IV

Derivative markets – options and futures – trading system – pricing derivatives –


risk hedging through derivatives – derivative market in India – its regulations.

UNIT V

An over view of financial markets – legal and regulatory frame work – financial
sector reforms – SEBI –SCRA- various segments of financial markets - Venture Capital
Financing, Mutual Funds – finance information system(FIS).

Bibliography:

Recommended Text

1. Bhole : Financial Institutions and Markets, TMH.

2. M.Y. Khan, (2001) : Financial Services, TMH.

Books for Reference

1. Fabozzi, (2002) : Foundations of Financial Markets and Institutions,


Pearson Education, New Delhi.

2. James C. Van Horne, (2002) : Financial Management and Policy,

118
Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd. New Delhi.

3. Kuchhal S.C. : Financial management : An Analytical and


Conceptual Approach – Chaitanya
publishing House, Allahabad.

4.P.V. KulKarni : Financial management, Himalaya


Publishing House.

5. Panday, I.M. : Financial Management, Vikas Publishing


House Pvt. Ltd.,

6.Prasanna Chandra, : Financial Management: Theory and


Practice – Tata McGraw Hill Publishing
Co. Ltd., New Delhi.

7. Van Horne (2002) : Foundations of Financial Management,


PHI.

Core-Course/Paper- 20.ORGANISATIONAL BEHAVIOUR

UNIT I

Introduction to Organizational Behaviour - Foundations of Individual Behaviour


– Personality – Perception – Learning - Values and Attitudes.

UNIT II

Motivation – Early Theories – Contemporary Theories – Motivation at work –


Designing, Motivating Jobs-Case Study.

UNIT III

Group Dynamics – Group Behaviour – Communication and Group Decision


Making – Inter-group Relations-Case Study.

UNIT IV

Leadership – Traits – Behavioral and Contingency theories – Power and Politics –


Transactional Analysis – Work Stress-Case Study.

UNIT V

119
Organisational structure and Design – Organisational Change and Development –
Organisational Culture and Climate – Organizational Conflict – Causes – Types of
Conflict – Management Conflict-Case Study.

Bibliography:

Recommended Text:
1. Fred Luthens : Organisational Behaviour.
2. Stephen Robbins : Organisational Behaviour.
3. Khanka : Organisational Behaviour

Books for Reference:

1. Stephen Robbins : Organisational Behaviour.

2. Jit. S. Chandran : Organisational Behaviour.

3. Terence R. Mitchell : People in Organisations and


Understanding their Behaviour.

4. Udai Pareek, T.V. Rao &


D.M. Postonjee :Behavioural Process in Organisation.

5. Townsent .H (1980) : Price Theory,

6. Cases in Management & Organizational Behaviour / Tompkins, Teri C.


Prentice Hall, 2 edition, 2002. Paper, ISBN 0130894648

7. Organizational Behavior / Robbins, Stephen P.


Pearson Higher Education, 2001. Paperback, ISBN 013018635X

8. Introduction to Organisational Behaviour / Ellis, Steve/Dick, Penny


McGraw-Hill Education - Europe, 2000. Paperback, ISBN 0077095359

Websites:
1. www.alibris.com
2. www.iese.edu
3. en.wikipedia.org
4. www.elsevier.com

120
8. M.A. DEGREE COURSE IN HISTORICAL STUDIES
THIRD SEMESTER
SYLLABUS

Paper IX – HISTORY OF WORLD CIVILIZATIONS (EXCLUDING INDIA)


– ANCIENT PERIOD

UNIT I: Introduction -Definition of Civilization -Comparison between Culture and


Civilization -Origin and Growth of Civilizations -Pre-historic Culture -
Paleolithic and Neolithic Culture.
,
UNIT II: River Valley Civilizations -Egyptian Civilization -Mesopotomian Civilization
-Sumerican, Babylonian, Assyrian and Chaldean Cultures.

UNIT III: Persian Civilization -Hebrew Civilization.

UNIT IV: Chinese Civilization -Japanese Civilization -Maya, Aztec and Inca
Civilizations.

UNIT V: Classical Civilizations -Ancient Greece -Legacy of Greece -Hellenistic


Civilization - Ancient Rome -Roman Contribution.

BOOKS FOR REFERENCE


1. Will Durant, The Story of Civilization (10 Volumes).

2. Edward MacNallBurns, Western Civlization -their History and their Culture.

3. Judd, G.P., History of Civilization.


4. Swain, J.E., A History of World Civilization.

5. Wallbank, T. W., and Bailay, N.M., Civilization -Past and Present.

6. Burns, and Ralph, Western Civilizations.

7. Phul, R.K., World Civilization.

8. Gokale, B.K., Introduction to Western Civilization.

Web Sources:
1. Ancient Civilizations: http://www.ancientcivilizations.co.uk/
2. Exploring ancient world cultures: http://eawc.evansville.edu/
3. Ancient Civilizations- Resources: http://cybersleuth-
kids.com/sleuth/History/Ancient_Civilizations/index.htm

121
4. Ancient Egypt, Greek and Roman:
http://www.princetonol.com/groups/iad/lessons/middle/ancient.htm

Paper X - HISTORY OF EUROPE FROM A.D. 1789 -A.D. 1919

UNIT I: Fall of Ancient Regime -French Revolution -Era of Napoleon.

UNIT II: Congress of Vienna -Concert of Europe - Metternich - Revolutions of 1830


and 1848.

UNIT III: Eastern Question -Unification of Italy and Germany.

UNIT IV: Napoleon -Bismarck and Austro-Hungarian Empire -Balkan Problem-


Alexander and Freedom of the Serfs -Balkan Crises.

UNIT V : First World War. - Treaty of Versailles -Russian Revolution.

BOOKS FOR REFERENCE

1. Ketelby, C.D.M., A History of Modem Times.

2 Fisher, H.A.L., History of Europe.

3. Grant, A.J & Temperly, Europe in the 19th and 20th Centuries.

4. Hazen, C.D., Modern Europe.

5. David Thomson, Europe since Napoleon.

6. Fyffe, History of Modern Europe.

7. Marriot, Remaking of Europe.

8. Lipson, Europe in the 19th and 20th Centuries.


9. Grant, A.J., Europe, The Story of the Last Five Centuries.

10. Huges, H.S., Contemporary Europe.

11. Philis W. Alison, Modern Europe.

Web Sources:

1. History of Europe: Catalogue of Internet Sources -


http://bubl.ac.uk/link/linkbrowse.cfm?menuid=11376

122
2. Online Resources: http://www.buzzle.com/chapters/history-and-the-human-
experience_europe.asp

3. Collection of Political Maps:


http://www.lib.washington.edu/subject/History/tm/europe.html

4. European History for Students:


http://www.yale.edu/history/gradstudents/europe.html

Paper XI -HISTORIOGRAPHY AND HISTORICAL METHODS

UNIT I: Definition and Meaning - Nature and Scope - Value of History.

UNIT II: Branches of History - (Political, Economic, Social and Cultural) History and
other Social Sciences -Role of Allied Subjects in the study of History.

UNIT III: Structure and Form of History - History as Science or Art -Philosophy of
History.

UNIT IV: Trends in Historiography -Ancient, Medieval and Modern -Recent Trends -
Subaltern Studies and Annales School.

UNIT V: Research Methodology - Selection of Topic - Hypothesis - Collection of


Data - Classification of Sources - Historical Criticism - Objectivity in Writing
History -Synthesis and Interpretation - Exposition - Foot Note – Bibliography

BOOKS FOR REFERENCE

1. Reiner, G. T., History, Its Purpose and Method.


2. Rowse, A.L., The Use of History.
3. Collingwood, R.G., The Idea of History.
4. Philips, C.H. (Ed), Historians of India, Pakistan and Ceylon.
5. Khan, S. A., History and Historians of British India.
6. Rajayyan, K., History in Theory and Method.
7. Subramanian, N., 1978, Historiography, Koodal Publishers, Madurai.
8. Carr, E.H., 1983, What is History? Middlesex, England.
9. Sen, S.P. (Ed), 1973, Historians and Historiography in Modern India. Calcutta.
10. Sheik Ali, B., 1978, History: Its Theory and Method. Macmillan India Ltd., New
Delhi.
11. Barzun, J & Graff, Henry, The Modern Researcher.
12. Fisher, D., Historical Fallacies.
13. Kent, S., Writing History

123
14. Hockit, Homer, C., The Critical Method in Historical Research and Writing.
15. Majumdar, R.C., and Srivastava, A. N., Historiography.
16. Manickam, S., Theory of History and Methods of Research, Padumam Publishers
Madurai, 2005.

Web Sources:

1. History and Historiography: http://history.eserver.org/


2. Historical Methods: http://www.sussex.ac.uk/history/syllabus/2006/868V1.html
3. History and Theory: http://www.wesleyan.edu/histjrnl/
4. Philosophy of History: http://www.nsu.ru/filf/pha/
5. Annotated Bibliography: http://faculty.uccb.ns.ca/areynold/paul/Default.htm

Elective III - DEVELOPMENT OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY IN


INDIA FROM A.D. 1947 – 2000

UNIT I: Introduction - A Survey of the Development of Science and Technology under


the British Rule - Government of India's Science and Technology Policy since
1950 - Department of Science and Technology - Research and Development
Programme - Science and Technology programmes for Socio-Economic
Development.

UNIT II: Development of Agricultural Science - Research and Education - Agricultural


Engineering and Technology - Indian Council of Agricultural Research - Crop
Science and Horticulture - Animal Science and Veterinary Colleges -
Biotechnology Development - Crop and Animal Bio-technology.

UNIT III: Development of Space Science - Development of Satellite Systems-


INSAT System - Electronic Developments and Production - Information
Technology - I.T. Act 2000 - Telecommunication - Software Technology
Parks -I. T for the Masses.

UNIT IV: Higher Technology Development - Atomic Science - Atom for Peace -
Atomic Energy and Nuclear Power Programme - Atom for War and Pokhran I
& II.

UNIT V: Oceanography - Ocean Development - Marine Living Resources and Non -


living Resources - Aquaculture and Marine Biotechnology - Polar
Science and Antartic Expeditions - Institute Connected with Ocean
Research.

BOOKS FOR REFERENCE


1. Gupta, S.P., Modern India and Progress in Science and Technology.
2. Gupta, S.P., Technology and Society in the Modern Age.

124
3. Venkataraman, R., History of Science and Technology.
4. Vadilal Dagli, Science and Technology in India.
5. Varghese Jeyaraj, S., History of Science and Technology.

6. Kalpana Rajaram, Science and Technology in India.


7. Kuppuram and Kumudhamani, History of Science and Technology. (10 Volumes).
8. Jaggi, O.P., Science and Technology.
9. India, 2000, India 2001, (Publications Division, Government of India).
10. Krishnamurthy, K.V., History of Science, Bharathidasan University, Tiruchirapalli,
2005
(Both English & Tamil)
Web Sources:
1. Science in India: http://indiafocus.indiainfo.com/science/
2. Science and Technology in India: http://dst.gov.in/stsysindia/about-sys.htm
3. India- Science and Technology:
http://www.indianembassy.org/dydemo/science.htm
Modern Science in India: http://www.tifac.org.in/news/policy_preamble.htm

EDC II - WOMEN'S STUDIES


(Extra Disciplinary)

UNIT I: Definition of Women's Studies - Its Objectives - Scope - Theories of


Feminism - Women's Movements in the West.

UNIT II: Women through the Ages - Indian Context - Women in Freedom Struggle –
Pre -Gandhian Era and Gandhian Era.

UNIT III: Rise of Feminist Movement and Women's Organisations – Growth -


Governmental and Non-Governmental Organisations - National, State
Councils for Women -Achievements.

UNIT IV: Role of Women in Politics - Administration - Business - Industry - Women


Entrepreneurs - Need for Reservation.

UNIT V: Women and Law - Legal and Constitutional Rights - Marriage – Divorce -
Property Rights - Labour Laws - Women in Modern Society.

BOOKS FOR REFERENCE

1. Tara A. Baig, 1976, India's Women Power, S. Chand & Co., New Delhi.
2. Rama Mehta, 1987, Socio-Legal Status of Women in India, Mittal Publications,
Delhi.

125
3. Srinivas, M.N., 1978, The Changing Position of Indian Women, Oxford University
Press,
London.
4. Nanda, B.R., 1990, Indian Women from Purdah to Modernity, Radiant Publishers,
New Delhi.

5. Altenbar, A.S., 1962, The Position of Women in Hindu Civilisation, Motilal


Banarsi Das,
Delhi.
6. Neena Desai and Patel, V., 1985, Indian Women: Chance and Challenge in the
International Decade, 11975-1985, Popular Prakashan, Bombay.
7. Bovehur David, The Feminist Challenge, The Movement for Women's Liberation
in Britain and U.S.
8. Banbs Olive, Faces of Feminism - A Study of Feminism as a Social Movement.
9. Gandhi, M.K., Women and Social Justice.
10. Radha Kumar, The Women's Movement in India.
11. M. Razia Parvin, Empowerment of Women – Strategies and Systems for Gender
Justice, Dominant Publishers and Distributors, New Delhi, 2005.

Web Sources:
1. Science in India: http://indiafocus.indiainfo.com/science/
2. Science and Technology in India: http://dst.gov.in/stsysindia/about-sys.htm
3. India- Science and Technology:
http://www.indianembassy.org/dydemo/science.htm
4. Modern Science in India: http://www.tifac.org.in/news/policy_preamble.htm

126
FOURTH SEMESTER

Paper XII - HISTORY OF WORLD CIVILIZATIONS


(EXCLUDING INDIA) -MEDIEVAL AND MODERN PERIOD

UNIT I: Middle Ages: Rise and spread of Christianity -The Papay -Byzantine
Civilization -Rise and Spread of Islam -Saracenic Civilization.
UNIT II: Feudalism -Origin -Merits and Demerits -Crusades -Causes and Results -
Monastic Orders of Medieval Europe -Growth of Medieval Cities
-Progress of Education and Rise of Universities.

UNIT Ill: Transition to Modem Age -Renaissance -Causes -Renaissance in Italy-


Results of Renaissance -Geographical Discoveries of 15th and 16th
centuries -Causes, Course and Results -Reformation in Germany, France
and Switzerland -Counter Reformation.

UNIT IV: French Revolution and its Impact -Romanticism -Industrial and Agrarian
Revolutions -Causes, Course and Results.

UNIT V: Nationalism Vs Internationalism -League of Nations -United Nations


Organization -Science, Philosophy, Art & Literature during the
Contemporary World

BOOKS FOR REFERENCE


1 Will Durant, The Story of Civilization (10 Volumes).
2. Edward Mac Nail Burns, Western Civilization -their History and their Culture.

3. Judd, G.P., History of Civilization.

4. Swain, J.E., A History of World Civilization.


5. Wallbank, T. W. and Bailay, N.M., Civilization - Past and Present.

6. Burns, Ralph, Western Civilizations.

7. Phul, R.K., World Civilization.

8. Gokale, B.K., Introduction to Western Civilization.

Web Sources:
1. World Civilization: Students Resource centre,
http://college.hmco.com/history/world/resources/students/index.html
2. World Civilization: Faculty Resource Centre, http://www.world-civ.buffalo.edu/
3. Heritage of World Civilization: http://wps.prenhall.com/hss_craig_herwrldciv_6

127
4. World Civilization Links: http://www.smhs.org/remmell/civlinks.html

Paper XIII - INTERNATIONAL RELATIONS FROM A.D. 1919 - 2000

UNIT I: Nature of international Relations - National Power and Instruments for the
Promotion of National Interests - Diplomacy.
UNIT II: Inter - War Years - Reparation - Inter Allied Debts - World Economic Crisis -
Collective Security - Rise of Dictatorship - Totalitarianism.

UNIT III: Second World War - Peace Settlements - Military Alliances - Emergence of
Power Blocs - Cold War - UNO.

UNIT IV: Disarmament and Arms Control - Disintegration of U.S.S.R - Emerging New
World Order.

UNIT V: Present Trends in International Associations (Role of International


Associations such as Commonwealth, NAM, SAARC, OAU, ASEAN, G -7,
G -15, G -77).

BOOKS FOR REFERENCE

1. Schleicher, P., Charles, International Relations Co-Operation.

2. Palmer and Perkins, International Relations.

3. Morgentheau, Hans, J., Politics among Nations.

4. Schuman, International Politics.

5. Wright, Rhiney, The Study of International Relations.

6. Moon, P.T., Imperialism and World Politics since 1945.

7. Calvecoressi, P., World Politics since 1945.

8. Hughes, H.S., Contemporary Europe.

9. Carr, E.H., International Relations since 1919.

10. Gadhorne Hardy, A Short History of International Affairs 1920-38.

11. Sen, A.K., International Relations since 1919.

12. Prakash Chander and Prem Arora, International Relations.

128
Web Sources:
1. International Relations and Security Network
http://www.wadsworth.com/politicalscience_d/special_features/ext/ir/tir/tir_infotrac1_1.h
tml
2. International Relations Resource Center http://www.isn.ethz.ch/
3. Foreign Affairs, http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Foreign_Affairs
4. Institute of Peace and Conflict Studies, New Delhi, http://www.ipcs.org/

Elective IV - TOURISM PRINCIPLES AND PRACTICES

UNIT I : Tourism – Definition, Need and Scope – Origin and Growth –


Kinds of Tourism – Cultural, Pilgrimage, etc.,
UNIT II : Tourism and Culture – People’s instinct for travel – Tourism
as an economic activity – Tourism as a Merchandise – Domestic
and International Tourism – Employment Potential – Tourism
Centres in India.
UNIT III : Tourism Infrastructure – Accommodation – Hotels and
Motels – Transport – Role of Travel Agencies – Ticketing.
UNIT IV : Tourism Administration and Organisation – Government
Departments and Non Government Agencies – Indian Tourism
Development Corporation.
UNIT V : Tourism Industry in Tamilnadu – Tourist Centres in
Tamilnadu – Tamilnadu Tourism Development Corporation –
Objectives and Functions.

BOOKS FOR REFERENCE

1. Bhatia, A.K., 2003 (Reprint),Tourism Development, Principles and Practices,


Sterling
Publishers, New Delhi.

2. Ratandeep Singh, 1998, Dynamics of Modern Tourism, Kanishka Publishers, New


Delhi.

3. Sinha, R.K., 1999, Growth and Development of Modern Tourism, Dominant


Publishes,
Delhi.

4. Lajpathi Raj, Development of Tourism in India.

5. Douglas Foster, Travel and Tourism Management

6. Durbant.A.J., and Medik.S., Tourism, Past, Present and Future

129
7. Lauvkush Mishra, 2000, Religious Tourism in India. Mohit Publications, New
Delhi.

8. Pushpinder S. Gill, 1999, Tourism, Economic and Social Development, Anmol


Publication, Delhi.

Web Sources:
1. Tourism Principles: http://www.civictourism.org/principles.html
2. Principles of Tourism:
http://www.nzqa.govt.nz/qualifications/tertqual/dipbus/tertregs/pdf/180principl
esoftourism.pdf
3. UNEP, Principles of Tourism,
http://www.oceansatlas.com/unatlas/uses/uneptextsph/tourismph/2615unep.htm
l
4. Sustainable Tourism,
http://www.rpts.tamu.edu/courses/426/Resources/Sustainable_Tourism.ppt

Elective V - ARCHIVES KEEPING

UNIT I: History of Archives -Archives keeping in Europe -Archives keeping in India


-Importance of Archives

UNIT II: Creation of Archives -Materials used for the creation of Archives -Packing
Materials and Seals -Establishment of Registry -Filing system of Records.

UNIT III: Preservation of Archive Materials in India and European Countries -


Methods of Preservation -Laminations -Reprography -Automation-
Retrieval Tools.

UNIT IV: Functions -Uses of Archives -Rules and Regulations.

UNIT V: Archival Organisations - National Archives of India -Tamilnadu Archives-


Private Archives ~ International Council of Archives -Indian Historical
Records Commission (IHRC) -The Historical Manuscripts Commission.

130
BOOKS FOR REFERENCE:

1. Harinaryana, Science of Archives Keeping.


2. Baliga, B., Guide to the records preserved in the Madras Record Office
3. Sarvesvaran, P., Archives Keeping.
4. Sundara Raj, M., 1999, A Manual of Archives System and the World of
Archives, Silver Publications, Chennai.
5. Sailen Ghose, Archives in India.
6. Jenbinson Hilary, A Manual of Archives Administration.
7. Thyagarajan, T. T., Archives Keeping.
8. Sehellenberg, T.R., Management of Archives.

Paper XX – Project Plus Viva Voce

131
9. M.A. DEGREE COURSE IN HUMAN RESOURCE
MANAGEMENT

THIRD SEMESTER

SYLLABUS

Paper -13. HUMAN RESOURCES DEVELOPMENT (HRD)


UNIT I
HRD: Definition, Evolution of HRD from Personnel management,
Developmental Perspective of HRD, HRD at macro and micro levels: Outcomes of HRD
in the national and organizational contexts. Qualities and Competencies required in a
HRD professional. Importance of HRD in the present context. Development of HRD
Movement in India.
Theory and Practice of HRD: HRD concepts, Subsystems of HRD: Human
Resource Planning, Potential, Potential Appraisal, Assessment Center, Performance
appraisal including 360 degree.
Organizational Culture and Climate: Meaning and type of Organizational culture
and climate; Role of HRD in promoting a development oriented Culture and climate in
the Organizations.

UNIT II

Development Human Capacity: Aptitude, Knowledge, Values, Skills of Human


Relations, Responsiveness, Loyalty and Commitment, Transparency, Leadership
development.

Training and Development: Meaning and Scope of training, education and


development; Training need analysis, Types of training Internal and external, Outbound
Training, Attitudinal training, Training effectiveness.

Learning Organization: Organizational Learning, Importance of Experiential


Learning, Learning Organization, Knowledge Management, Achieving Organizational
Effectiveness and Excellence.

132
UNIT III

Evaluating HRD: Human Resource Accounting, HR Audit and Bench marking,


Impact-assessment of HRD initiatives on the bottom-line of an organization.

UNIT IV

Organizational Development (OD): Meaning of OD, OD Interventions, OD


Programs and Techniques: Behaviour Modeling, gaming, Encounter Groups, Quality of
Work life (QWL) and Quality of Life Programs, Grid training, Benefits of OD; OD
consultants.
Organizational Development Process: Phases in OD – Initial Diagnosis – Survey
and Feedback, Action Planning, Problem Solving, Team Building, Developing Creativity
and Innovation, Managing organizational Change.

UNIT V
Recent Trends in HRD and OD: Training for trainers and HRD professionals,
Promoting Research in HRD and OD. Impacts of developments in the other fields such
as Psychology, Business Management, Communication and Information
Technologypraisal, Training and Development, Career Planning & Succession Planning.

References
1. D.L. KIRKPATRICK (Ed), How to Manage Change Effectively – San Francisco:
Josseybass, 1985.
2. T.V. RAO and UDAI PAREEK (1989). Developing and Managing Human
Resource System.
3. D.M. SILVERA (1988), Human Resource Development: The Indian Experience,
New Delhi: New India Publications.
4. LEONARD NADIER, (1984) the Handbook of HRD, USA: John Wiley.
5. RAO TV and DF PEREIRA (1986), Recent Experiences in Human Resources
Development, New Delhi: Oxford and IBH.
6. ROBINSON, KENNETH R., A Handbook of Training Management – (2nd Ed)
Kogan Page, Great Britain, (1982).
7. FRENCH W.L. & BELL, Jr, C.H. (1982), Organization Development:
Behavioural Science Interventions for Organization Development, New Delhi:
Prentice Hall of India – 6th Edition 2002.

133
8. SIKULA A.F.P., Administration and HRD – John Wiley, New York.
9. ARGYRIS, CHRIS (1978): Organizational Learning: A Theory of Action
Perspective. Readings, Mass – Addison – Wesley.
10. SANGE DATER M (1990) The Fifth Discipline: The art and Practice of the
Learning.

14. INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS


UNIT I
Industrial Relations: The changing concepts of Industrial relations, Factors
affecting employee stability. Application on Psychology to industrial relations.

UNIT II
Industrial Harmony and Conflict: Harmonious relations in industry,
importance and means; cause of industrial disputes, Machinery for settling of disputes,
Negotiation, Conciliation, Mediation, Arbitration and Adjudication, Strikes, Lock-outs,
Layout and Retrenchment codes of discipline, Grievance procedure, Labour
management co-operation; Worker’s participation in management.

UNIT III

Industrial relations in government level, Role of state in regulating I.R,


government labour policy. Bipartite approaches to industrial relations, workers,
participation in Management, meaning, work committees, joint management councils,
industrial democracy, Indian labour conference, industrial committees. Industrial
disputes, concepts, causes, dynamics, forms, prevention, settlement, prevention and
settlement machinery in India, Industrial disputes Act.

UNIT IV
Trade Unions: Trade Unions and their growth, economic, social and political
conditions leading to the development of trade unionism, Theories of trade unionism,
Aim and objectives of trade unions, Structure and governing of trade unions.

Problems and Role of Indian Trade Unions: Recognition and leadership,


Finances and Membership, Compulsory versus free membership, Political activities,
Welfare, Legislation, Majority and Minority unions, Social responsibilities, positive
role in economic and social development.

134
UNIT V
Collective Bargaining: Meaning, Scope, Subject matter and parties, Methods
and tactics, Administrations of collective bargaining agreements; Fair and unfair labour
practice.

Tripartite Machinery: At the center and in the states; I.L.O. – Its functions and
role in labour movement – Industrial health and safety; Industrial legislations.

References:
1. Mamoria C.B and Sathish Mamoria,Dynamics of Industrial Relations,Himalaya
Publishing House,New Delhi,1998
2. Dwivedi.R.S Human Relations 7 Organisational Behaviour, Macmillan India
Ltd.,New Delhi,1997.
3. Pylee.M.V and Simon George ,Industrial Relations and Personnel Management
,Vikas Publishing House (P) Ltd.,New Delhi,1995
4. N.G.Nair, Lata Nair, Personnel Management and Industrial Relations, S.Chand,
2001
5. Srivastava, Industrial Relations and Labour Laws, Vikas, 4TH edition, 2000
6. C.S.Venkata Ratnam, Globalisation and Labour Mangement Relations,
Response Books,2001

15. MANPOWER DEVELOPMENT FOR TECHNOLOGICAL CHANGE

UNIT – I
Manpower management in the 21st century, environmental context
of human resource management.

UNIT – II

The emerging profile of human resources/special features of new


technology concept and" process of technological innovation, organizational implications
of technological change, human resource implications of technological change.

UNIT – III

Performance/potential evaluation inchange, human resource implications of


technological change, performance/potential evaluation inthe context of new technology.

135
UNIT – IV

Technology transfer with human face, newissues in manpower training.

UNIT – V

Career development, Career planning – steps involved.

References:

1.Clark Jon - Managing Innovation and Change, University of Southampton, 1995.


2.Clark Jon - Human Resource management and Technological Change, London, Sage,
1993
3.Campbell A and Warner M - new technology, Skills and Management, London,
Routledge, 1992.
4. Rastogi P.N, - Management of Technology and Innovation,New Delhi, Sage, 1995.
5. Warner M. - new Technology and Manufacturing Management, London, Wiley, 1990.
6. Womack J.P. etc - The Machine that Changed the World,New York, Maxwell
Macmillan, 1990.
7. Whittaker D.H - managing Innovation Cambridge, Cambridge University
Press, 1990.

16. LABOUR WELFARE

UNIT - I

Labour Welfare: Concept, scope, objectives, functions, responsibilities for


providing labour welfare, labour welfare measures, labour welfare officer, appointment,
functions, role and powers.

Labour Welfare in India: historical development, welfare legislations, welfare


provisions under the factories act 1948, mines act 1952, motor transport workers act
1961, plantation labours act 1951.

UNIT - II

Social Security: Concept, scope, objectives, social insurance versus social


assistance, social security measures, origins and growth of social security in India.
Agencies of social security, a brief study of social security legislation in India.

Social Problems affecting Industrial Labour: Role's and duties of a professional


social worker in the industry in dealing with victims of alcoholism, absenteeism,
indebtedness, sexual harassment and other maladaptive behaviour of employees.

136
UNIT – III

Corporate Social Responsibilities: Community work by the industry,


purposes, concept of community, community development, NGO corporate
partnership in development activism, advocacy and social change.

UNIT – IV

Problems facing Labour Welfare Activities in Indian Industries: Deep rooted


cultural values, beliefs and superstitions, social stratification, the concepts of
karma and Dharma, poverty, migration, population explosion, child labour etc.
the status of a social worker.

UNIT – V

Counseling: Need for counseling, techniques and skills of counseling,


preventive counseling, the knowledge base of counseling and social work, human
service delivery systems. Skills of a labour welfare officer, simulator, supporter,
guide, interpreter, ameliorator.

References:

1. Moorthy MV - Principles of Labour Welfare, Visakapatnam, Gupta Brothers

2. Developing the Practice of Counseling - Windy Dryden and Colin Feltham,


1994, Sage
Publication, New Delhi.
3. RC Saxena - labour Problems and Social Welfare, K.Nath and Co, Meerut, 1995.
4. AM Sterna - Aspects of Labour Welfare and Social Security, Himalayan
Book House,
Bombay, 1990.
5. Hopkins RR - A handbook of Industrial Welfare, Oxford and IBH, New
Delhi,1955.
6. Punekar Deodar and Shankaran - Labour Welfare Trade Unionism and industrial
Relations, Bombay, Himalayan Publications.

137
7. Vaid K.N - Labour Welfare in India, New Delhi, Shri Ram Centre for
Industrial
Relations
8. Kamik V.B - Indian Labour, Calcutta, Minerva Associates.

ELECTIVE- EXTRA DISCIPLINARY

17. COMPUTER LANGUAGES FOR MANAGEMENT


UNIT – I
Introduction to Programming Language – Generations of Computers and
Computer Languages – Program development life cycle – Flow Charting – Disk
Operating System and Window.

UNIT – II
PC – SOFTWARE package – Text Processing Software – Text Manipulations –
Usages of spell check – Text Formating – Picture Insertion and alignment – Creation of
documents using templates – Mail Merge Concepts.

UNIT – III
MS-EXCEL – Worksheet Preparation – Constructing Excel Formulas - Using
Excel’s Built-in Functions – Creating and Modifying charts.

UNIT – IV
Introduction to C – Data types, constants, variables and arrays, Declarations –
Expression’s operators and statements. Data input and output, preliminaries – the getchar
( ) – putchar ( ) – scanf ( ) – printf ( ) – gets ( ) – puts ( ) functions, control statements,
functions and arrays.

138
UNIT – V
Pointers: Fundamentals – pointer declarations – Passing pointers to Functions –
Structures and union – data files – Opening and Closing a Data file – Creating a Data file
– Processing a Data file – Unformatted Data files.

Theory 75%, Practical 25%


References
1. Forouzan, A structure Programming Apporach Using C, Thomson, 2001.
2. SANJAY SAXENA: A first course in computers 2000 edition – Vikas Publishing
House Pt. Ltd. – first edition, 2000.
3. R.K. TAXALI: “PC SOFTWARE” Tata McGraw Hill Publications.
4. USING MICROSOFT EXCEL 2000 QUE’S APPLICATION TOOLS Prentice
Hall of India, New Delhi.
5. BYRON GOTTFRIED – “Programming with C” Edn.2, 1998.
6. V. RAJARAMAN “COMPUTER PROGRAMMING’C’ Prentice Hall of India
New Delhi.
7. Programming in C Schaum’s Outline Series.

18. SOFT SKILLS III

Refer to PG Soft Skills Syllabus and Regulations.

19. INTERNSHIP
Refer to PG Soft Skills Syllabus and Regulations.

139
FOURTH SEMESTER

20. TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT

Unit I
Introduction to Quality Control – Quality and Cost Considerations – Statistics and
its applications in Quality Control – Sampling Inspection in Engineering Manufacture
Unit II
Statistical and Quality Control by the use of Control Charts – Methods of
Inspection and Quality Appraisal – Reliability Engineering – Value Engineering and
Value Analysis.
Unit III
Theory of Sampling Inspection – Standard Tolerancing ABC Analysis – Defect
Diagnosis and Prevention
Unit IV
Recent Technique for Quality Improvement – Zero Defect – A Quality
Motivation Techniques – Quality Management system and Total Quality Control.
Unit V
Selection of ISO and Model and Implementation of ISO 900 Human Resources
Development and Quality Circles – Environmental Management System and Total
Quality Control.

Reference Books:

1. Evans, the Management & control Qualities, Thomson, 2004.


2. Dahigaard Jens J., Kristensen K., Kanji Gopal K, “Fundamental of Total Quality
Management” Bross Chapman & Hall, London, 1998.
3. George, Stephen and Weimerskirch, Arnold, “Total Quality Management –
Strategies and Techniques Proven”, Mohit Publications, 2001
4. Juran, Joseph M., “Total Quality Management: Mc Graw-Hill Pub
5. Hakes, Chris (editor) Total Quality Management : The Key to Business
Success”, NyChapman and Hall Pub, 1991.
6. Fox, Roy, “Making Quality Happen. Six steps to Total Quality Management”
McGraw-Hill, 1991
7. Jain, “Quality Control And Total Quality Management”, Tata McGRaw Hill, 2002
8. H.Lal “Total Quality Management: A Practical Approach”, New Age International
Private Ltd., 2002
9. Besterfield, “Total Quality Management”, Pearson Education, 1999, Rao, Ashok,
“Total Quality Management: A Cross Functional Perspective”, Wiley & Sons.

140
ELECTIVE
21. ENTREPRENEURSHIP AND MANAGEMENT IN SMALL BUSINESS
UNIT I
The Entrepreneur – Definition – Characteristics of Successful entrepreneur.
Entrepreneurial scene in India: Analysis of entrepreneurial growth in different
communities – Case histories of successful entrepreneurs. Identification of potential
entrepreneurs.

UNIT II
Development and Training of Entrepreneur – Cultural and Social environment in
promoting entrepreneurship – Entrepreneurial environment. Checklist for organizing and
operating small business – Entrepreneur and Business Executive personnel administration
and Management Development.

UNIT III
Small Scale Industries – Definition – Classification of Small Industries –
Organisation structure and plant location of small scale industries. Planning for
production and inventory project counselling and technical feasibility.The significance in
the Indian Economy – Problems and possibilities of ancillary industries – Sickness in
small scale industries – Causes and Remedies.

UNIT IV
Capital structure and working capital: Financiall appraisal of new project, Role of
Banks – Credit appraisal by banks. Institutional Finance to Small Industries – Incentives
– Institutional arrangement and encouragement of entrepreneurship.

Unit V
Marketing Feasibility – New Product ideas and evaluation – Marketing Methods –
Pricing policy and distribution channels – Exports – Problems of Small Scale Units.

Reference Books:
1. VASANT DESAI, Problems and Prospects of Small Scale Industries in India –
Himalaya Publishing House, Bombay.
2. KHAN, Management of Small Scale Industries – Sultan Chand Publication.
3. CLIFFORD and JOSEPH P. MANCUSO, Enterpreneurship and Venture
Management – Paraporawala & Co.
4. J.M. PARKIN, How to Finance Small Business Enterprise.

141
5. K.K. MENON, handbook of Small Industries Management
6. B.C. TANDON, Environment and Enterpreneur.
7. SIPCOT, A Guide to Entrepreneur – Chennai.
8. O.A. DAILEY, Enterpreneurial Management.
9. H.N. PATHAK, the Entrepreneur, Technician and Manager in Small Scale Unit.
10. K.L. SHARMA, Entrepreneurial Performance in Role Perspectives.
11. Schumacher, E.F. Small is Beautiful, New Delhi, Rupa, 1990.

ELECTIVE
22. BUSINESS POLICY AND STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT
UNIT – I

Business as a social System/Economic System: Objective of Business; Business


Environment – Socio economic sector. Technology Sector, Government Sector. The
industry Environment – Customer Sector/Supplier Sector/Competitor Sector.

The International Environment – Opportunities for International activities /


Threats from International activities.

UNIT – II

Society and Business: Business ethics, Social responsibility of Business / Indian


Businessmen, Social Audit.

Business Policy in Various Economic Systems: Capitalist Economy: Economic


System of Socialism and mixed Economic system.

UNIT – III

Business Policy and Corporate Strategy: How to make policy corporate strategy:
Policies: Strategies and Tactices: Policies and procedures.

Policy Formulation and Implementation: Policy Formulation: Objectives,


Direction: Consideration of change: Business Policy concepts. Business Policy –
Characteristics importance. Different Types of policies: Classification, Strategies,
programmes, procedures and rules M.B.O./ M.B.E. Major and Minor policies:
Supporting composite and contingency policies: Parameter of policy: Development
of Business Policy: Swot Analysis: Elements of Business Policy: Implementation of
Policy.

142
UNIT – IV

Major Business Policies: Man Power planning, Product Policies, Marketing


Policies, Production and Purchase Policies, Financial Policies, Capital Procurement
and distribution.

Administration and Control of Policy: Communication System: Policy


Implementation, Rules and procedures: GPI policy: Appended implied and imposed
policy: Oral and written Policies: control and review.

UNIT – V

Corporate Strategy: Functions and importance, strategy alternatives, considering


strategy variations, Strategic choice, implementation.

References

1. Hitt, Strategic Management, Thomson, 2001.

2. Lawrance, Jauch and William Blucck Business Policy and Strategic Mgt., -
McGraw Hill Intl 1998.

3. Mamoria and Mamoria – Business planning and Policy, Himalaya Publishing


house – 1998.

4. Budhiraja SB and Athreya MB, Cases in Strategic Management, Tata McGraw


Hill 1996.

5. Christensen CR, Business Policy: Text and cases, Illinois, Richdar Irwin 1987.

6. Hitt, Strategic Management, competitiveness and Globalization, Thomson, 2001.

7. David Fred, Strategic Management, Prentice Hall of India, 1997.

R. Srinivasan, Strategic Management the Indian context, Prentice Hall of India, 2002.

143
23. PROJECT REPORT

Each student shall be required to prepare on the basis of investigations carried out
by him in a business or industrial organization, a project report on possible solutions for a
typical problem of current interest in the area of Human Resource Management. The
report should demonstrate the capability of the student for some creative potential and
original approach to solve the practical problems in today’s business or industry. The
report should include field studies, surveys, interpretation, planning and design of
improved integrated Human Resource Management Systems and Practices.

24. SOFT SKILLS IV

Refer to PG Soft Skills Syllabus and Regulations.

144
10. M.A. DEGREE COURSE IN HUMAN RIGHTS AND DUTIES
THIRD SEMESTER
SYLLABUS

Core Subjects

1. Human Rights Violations and Remedies

a) Police atrocities
b) Judicial Remedies- Writs
c) Right to Compensation

Prescribed Books
N.R. Madhava Menon (Ed) A Training manual for Police on Human Rights.
P.N. Bagawati, Human Rights in the Criminal Justice System, 11 Bar review
Law of Writs, Ramachandran.
G. Sharma, Human Rights and Legal Remedies (Deep and Deep Publication).

2. Human Rights and Environment


a) Concept of Sustainable Development
b) Rio and Kyoto Protocol
c) Awareness and Education of Environmental Protection

Prescribed Books
P. Leela Krishnan, Environmental Law in India (Butterworths New Delhi, 1999)
A.S. Bedi, R.S. Bedi, Encyclopedia of Environment and Pollution Law (Vol I and II)
Shyam Dhiwan and Armin Rozen Cranz, Environmental Law and Policy in India: Cases,
Materials and Statues, Oxford University Press, New Delhi.

3. Human Rights and NGO’s and Media

a) Role of Print and Electronic Media


b) Amnesty International -Human Rights and Watch
c) Social Movements and Human Rights

Prescribed Books
Facets of Media Law- Madhavi Diwan Garodia.
Law of Press, D.D. Basu.
Right to privacy, A comparative Case Law study in Laws from Allhorizons. Dr. A. David
Ambrose (Comparative :aw Society, Pondicherry 1998).
Brandies. et.al, The Right to privacy 4 Harward Law Review 193 (1890).

145
4. Human Rights and Duties

a) Duty to fellow citizens


b) Duty to State

Prescribed Books
Constitution of India, V. N. Shukla

Elective Subject:VI

5. Introduction to Intellectual Property Rights

a) Patents
b) Copyrights
c) Trademark

Prescribed Books
Intellectual Property Law, Narayanan.
Intellectual Property- Copy Right, Patent and Trade Mark and Allied Rights, William
Cornish and David LLewelyn (6th Ed, 2007).

Extra Disciplinary
6. Basic Computer Education

a) Internet application
b) Computer Documentation

Semester IV

Core Subjects

1. Human Rights and Contemporary Issues


a) Women’s Right-CEDAW
b) Cyber Crimes

2. Human Rights Act 1993

a) National Human Rights Commission


b) Human Rights Courts

146
Prescribed Books
Reports of NHRC

3. Human Rights and New World Order

a) Food Security –World conference on Food Summit.


b) Globalisation consumerism and Human Rights

Prescribed Books
Promod Mishra, Human Rights Global Issues

4. Human Rights and Community Health

a) Health issues in the contemporary Society.


b) Health Policy in India.
c) Right to health as a Basic Human Rights, Waste Management.
d) Role of Corporate World in Preserving in Community health
e) Special Rapporteur on health .

Elective Subject: VII Human Rights, Science And Technology Law

a) IPR and Human Rights.


b) Medical science and Human Rights including Bio-Patent and Foeticide
c) Technology and Human Rights –Right to privacy and genetic
Engineering.

Prescribed Books
Bio Technology and Pattern Law, C. B. Raju and Dr. N.S. Srinivasalu
R.P. Anand and S.P. Bhat (Ed) Law, Science and Environment (New Delhi 1987)
Bio Technologies and International Human Rights, Francisco Francioni.
The Emergence and Growth of Bio Technology in Industrial and Developing Countries,
Rohini Acharya.(Edward Elger 1999)
Genetic Privacy “Resolving the conflict between Donor and Child, Sainonton Basu.
Current Science Vol :86 No: 10 May, 2004.
Reproductive Technology and Procreation Rights of the Unmarried Harward Law
Review Vol: 98 (3) Jan, 1985.

Soft Skill-IV.

147
11. M.A. DEGREE COURSE IN LABOUR MANAGEMENT

THIRD SEMESTER

SYLLABUS

PAPER 11 - HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT

UNIT I

Evolution, Role and status of Human Resource Management in India - Structure


and functions of Human Resource Management - Approaches to HRM. HR Manager -
HR Manager as a changing agent - challenges to HRM.

UNIT II

HR Planning - Concept, Organisation and Practice, HR Planning Techniques -


Short term and Long term planning, Information, HR information systems, Role of
computer in HRP.

UNIT III

Recruitment and Selection - Job Analysis - Description, Job Specification -


Selection Process - Tests and Interviews - Placement and Induction, Promotion and
transfer - Retirement and separation. Performance Appraisal - Purpose - Factors
affecting performance appraisal - Methods and systems of performance appraisal.

UNIT IV

Training and Development - Need and Importance - Assessment of Training


Needs - Training and Development of various categories of Personnel, Training
Programmes in the management of stress and conflict management. Career planning and
development - Career Counselling.

UNIT V

Wages and Salary Administration - Developing sound compensation structure -


Regulatory Provisions - Incentives - Motivation and Job satisfaction. Grievance handling
and Discipline - Developing Grievance handling systems - Collective Bargaining -
Managing Conflicts. Personnel Records, Reports, audit, personnel research.

148
Reference Books:

1. Arun Monappa & S. Saiyuddain: Personnel Management, Tata Mc


Graw Hill

2. Pramod Verma : Personnel Management in Indian


Organisations, Oxford & IBH.

3. Edwin B. Flippo34 : Personnel Management, Mc Graw Hill

4. BP Singh and others PM and IR. Human Resource Management


Gary Dessler : www.prenhall.com/dessler

5. Michael Armstrong : A hand book of Human Resource Management


Practice
Publisher: Kogan Page

6. S.K. Batia : Human Resource Management - A


competitive Advantage: Concepts, strategies and
challenges
Deep & Deep Publications Pvt. Ltd
F-159, Rajouri Garden, New Delhi 110 027

7. R.S.Dwivedi : Managing Human Resource and Personnel


Management
E-mail: galgotia@ndf.vsnl.net.in
Website: www.galgotiabooks.com

8. John Bratton & Jeffrey Gold : Human Resource Management – Theory and
Practice
Website: http.www.palgrave.com

9. Cynthia D. Fisher : Human Resource Management


Lyle F. Schoenfeldt All India Publishers & Distributors Regd
Jame B. Shaw

149
PAPER 12 - RESEARCH METHODOLOGY AND STATISTICAL METHODS

Unit - I

Nature and significance of research - types of research - Planning a research


project - problem identification - formulation - research design - problems in social
research.

Unit - II

Sample - types - selection of sample - hypothesis - data collection - techniques


and tools for collecting data - Interview - questionnaire, observation, case study, as
methods of data collection.

Unit III

Analysis and interpretation - statistical methods - rates, ratios, percentage,


measures of central tendency, mean median, mode, measures of dispersion, standard
deviation and co-efficient of variation - correlation

Unit IV : Advance Statistical Methods

Test of hypothesis - testing of means, samples with population, proportions, large


sample - chi-square and analysis of variance. Time series analysis - regression - index
numbers - decision theory - cluster analysis - probability theory.

Unit V

Scrutiny of the assembled data, preparation of outline, preparation of the research


report, use of computer in report writing.

Suggested readings

1. C.R. Kothari : Research Methodology and Techniques, Wiley


Eastern

2. Ferser : Research Methods in Economics and Business Verdoo


Macmillan

3. R.K. Dwiredi : Research Methods in Behavioural Services,


Macmillan

4. Richard I Levin
Rubin : Statistics for Management, Prentice Hall of India

150
5. S.P. Gupta : Statistical Methods - Sultanchand

6. B.S. Tanden: Research Methodology in Social Services


Chitanya Publishing House, Allahabad

7. Wilkinson and : Methodology and Techniques of Social Research,


Bhandarkas Himalaya Publishing House, Bombay.

8. Saha S. : Quantitative Methods


Mukerji S. Central Education Enterprises, 54B, Patuatola Lane,
Kolkata – 700 009.
Website: http//www.centralgroup.net

PAPER 13 - LABOUR LAWS RELATING TO WORKING AND


SERVICE CONDITIONS

Unit - I
The Factories Act, 1948.
The Child Labour (Prohibition & Regulation) Act, 1986

Unit - II

The Contract Labour (Regulation and Abolition) Act, 1970.


The Plantation Labour Act, 1951 with Rules and upto-date Notification

Unit - III

The Motor Transport Workers Act, 1961.


The Tamil Nadu Shop and Establishment Act, 1947

Unit - IV

The Beedi and Cigar Workers (Conditions of Employment) Act, 1966.


The Tamilnadu Catering and Establishment Act, 1958

Unit - V

The Mines Act, 1952. The Working Journalists and other Newspaper Employees
(Conditions of Service and Miscellaneous Provisions) Act, 1955.
The Regulations and case laws in respect of each of the above Acts.

151
References:

1.D.P. Malhotra and : The law of Industrial Disputes Vol. I & II


K.R. Malhotra Universal Publication

2. G. Saran : Commentaries on Contract Labour (Regulation and


Abolition) Act, 1970, Third Edition, Easter Book Co,
Lucknow.

3. S. Vaidyanathan : Factory Laws applicable in Tamilnadu Vol. I, II & IV,


Madras Book Agency, Chennai

4. S.C. Srivatsava : Industrial Relations & Labour Law


E.mail: chawlap@giasd107.vsnl.net.in
http: //www.ubspd.com

PAPER 14 - ELECTIVE - IV

ENTREPRENEURIAL DEVELOPMENT

Unit I - Conceptual framework:

Meaning and definitions - Scope - Difference between Intrapreneur and


Entrepreneur - Entrepreneur and Manager, Entrepreneur and Inventor, Entrepreneur and
Promoter Types of Entrepreneur, Characteristics of Entrepreneur.

Unit II: Functions of Entrepreneur

Idea generation, Planning, Organising, Motivation - Types of motivation, Project


Identification - Project classification - Project evaluation - Problems and constraints -
Role of Government, Financial Institutions, IFCI, IDBI, ICICI, SIDBI, SISI, IFCI, SBI.

Unit III: Entrepreneur Development Programme (EDP)

Concept - Objectives - Important features - factors influencing entrepreneurship.


Internal, external and socio economic factors. Programmes - Education, Training,
consultancy, skill development, information, marketing, Role of Government and Non
Government agencies.

Unit IV: Management of Projects

Capital required - working and fixed - sources of funds - cost and benefit analysis
BEP Sickness of small scale industries - Measures to prevent. Government protection -
Role of IRCI, BIFR, IDBI, SIPCOT, etc.

152
Unit V: Report writing and case study analysis

Industrial visits - organising seminar and case study discussion on important


issues - panel discussion - Meeting with experts. Preparation of the project reports.

Suggested Reading:

1. Dr. V. Balu : Entrepreneurial Development - Venkateswaran Publication,


Chennai - 4.

2. P. Saravanavel : Entrepreneurial Development - Kay Ess Pee Kay


Principles, Policies and publishing house
Programmes
3. Dr.G.B.Gupta : Entrepreneurship Development - Sultan Chand and
in India Sons

4. Peter F. Drucker : Innovation and Entrepreneurship - Affiliated East West


Practice and Principles Press Ltd Publication
of SISI Govt of India

PAPER 15 - ELECTIVE - V

ADVANCED HUMAN PROCESS LAB

1. Sensitivity Training - Understanding oneself - understanding others -


understanding How Groups Work - Balancing people's needs Vs Goals of the
Organization - Learning to listen to your employees.

2. Encounter Groups - Concept - Self-disclosure, self-awareness, responsibility,


responding to feelings, psychotherapy for growth - basic procedures

3. NLP - Causing Change - Eliciting response, Anchoring, Time Distortion,


reframing

4. NLP for effective communication - Matching representation States, Meta


Modelling, Mirroring

5. Skill-Training - History & Development, basic concepts - Goal setting -


measurement and evaluation. Basic procedures - Assertiveness training,
behaviour rehearsal, Relaxation training, cognitive restructuring

Experiential exercises for all the 5 units

153
References: 1) Kjell Erik Rudestain - Experiential Groups in theory and practice
Brooks / cole publishing company, California.

2) Bradferd L.P., Gibbs. J.R and K.D. Benne (Eds) - T-group theory and the
Laborating method, New York, Wiley

3) Carl Rogers - Carl Rogers on encounter group, New York:


Harper & Row

4) Author: Richard Bandler

i) Frogs into Princes -


ii) Using your brain for a change
iii) Persuasion Engineering
iv) Structure of Magic I
v) Structure of Magic II
Published by Andres Publication

PAPER 16 – FIELD WORK & FIELD VISITS

A distinctive feature of the curriculum is field visits and field work. It


enable a student to integrate and reinforce the knowledge acquired in the class rooms
with actual practice under the supervision of both the faculty and field agency.
Observation visits are arranged as a part of field work. The students shall visit
industries / establishments which include:

1. Engineering Industry
2. Hotel Industry
3. Petroleum and Oil Industry
4. I.T. Industry
5. ESI Corporation
6. EPF Office
7. Labour Department
8. Labour Court
9. High Court
10. Industrial Tribunal
11. Productivity Council, etc.

After completion of Observation Visits, students will be attached with


establishments / industries. They are expected to learn the practical aspects of PMIR for
a period of 30 days or 240 hours.

Each student shall organize a seminar on the observation made and information
collected. They are expected to be well versed on power point presentation.

154
At the end of field work training, students will have to prepare a report not
exceeding 75 typed pages.

SOFT SKILL - III - MANAGERIAL SKILLS

Objectives
• To help students to understand the mechanism of stress particularly negative emotions
such as anxiety, anger and depression for effective management.
• To introduce the basic concepts of body language for conflict management.
• To give inputs on some of the important interpersonal skills such as group decision-
making, negotiation and leadership skills.
• To make students learn and practice the steps involved in time management.
• To impart training for empowerment thereby encouraging the students to become
successful entrepreneurs.

Unit I- Stress management


• Definitions and Manifestations of stress.
• Stress coping ability and stress inoculation training.
• Management of various forms of fear (examination fear, stage fear or public speaking
anxiety), depression and anger.

Unit II- Conflict Management skills


• Types of conflict (intrapersonal, Intra group and inter group conflicts).
• Basic concepts, cues, signals, symbols and secrets of body language.
• Significance of body language in communication and assertiveness training.
• Conflict stimulation and conflict resolution techniques for effective management.

Unit III- Interpersonal Skills


• Group decision making (strengths and weaknesses).
• Developing characteristics of charismatic and transformational leadership.
• Emotional intelligence and leadership effectiveness- self awareness, self management,
self motivation, empathy and social skills.
• Negotiation skills- preparation and planning, definition of ground rules, clarification and
justification, bargaining and problem solving, closure and implementation.

Unit IV- Time Management


• Time wasters- Procrastination.
• Time management personality profile.
• Time management tips and strategies.
• Advantages of time management.

155
Unit V- Towards Empowerment
• Stimulating innovation and change- coping with “temporariness”.
• Network culture.
• Power tactics and power in groups (coalitions).
• Managerial empowerment and entrepreneurship.
• Prevention of moral dwarfism especially terrorism.
• Altruism (prosocial behaviour/helping behaviour).
Spirituality (clarifications with regard to spirituality)- strong sense of purpose- trust and
respect- humanistic practices- toleration of fellow human beings expressions.

PRACTICAL TRAINING
Relaxation exercises- Western (Autogenic Relaxation) and Indian techniques (Shavasana).
Role-play. Transactional Analysis.

REFERENCES
1. Swaminathan. V.D & Kaliappan. K.V. (2001). Psychology for Effective Living.
Chennai. The Madras Psychology Society.
2. Robbins, S.B. (2005). Organizational Behaviour. New Delhi: Prentice Hall of India.
3. Smith, B. (2004). Body Language. Delhi: Rohan Book Company.
4. Hurlock, E.B. (2006). Personality Development, 28th Reprint. New Delhi: Tata
McGraw Hill.

SEMESTER IV

PAPER 17 - HUMAN RESOURCE DEVELOPMENT

Unit I

HRD at the macro level: Concept of HRD at the Macro Level - Concept of human
capital - need for investment in human beings - HRD as a source of National
Development. Role of education and training in facilitating HRD.

Unit II

HRD at the macro level: Concept, objectives and scope of HRD - HRD vs.
traditional personnel functions - Role of HR and line managers in developing human
resources.

Unit III

Mechanisms or techniques of HRD: Training and development - career planning


and development - potential and performance appraisal - feed back and counselling -
Organisational Development - Human Resource Information System (HRIS).

156
Unit IV

International Human Resource Management: HRD practices in Multi National


Corporations. Recent experiences of USA and Japan with HRD.

Trends and Issues in HRD: Business Process Reengineering, Organisational


Learning, knowledge management, Business process outsourcing.

Unit V

Selected Indian Experiences with HRD at the Micro Level.

Suggested Readings:

Dr.K.N. Mathur : Managing Human Resource Development


PublishersL Gyan Publishing House
5, Ansari Road, Darya Ganj, New Delhi 110 002.
Edition 2001
Website:http://www/gyanbooks.com

T.V. Rao, K.K. Verma, Alternative approaches and strategies of Human Resource
Anil K. Development
Khandewal and
E. Abraham.

Jon M. Werner and Randy Human Resource Development -


L. De Simone Thomson

T.V. Rao & Udhai PareeK Human Resource Development - Recent


Experiences in Indian Industries

PAPER 18 – TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT

Unit I – INTRODUCTION

Definition of Quality, Dimensions of Quality, Quality Planning, Quality Costs –


Analysis Techniques of Quality Costs, Basic concepts of Total Quality Management,
Historical Review, Principles of TQM, Leadership – Concepts, Role of Senior
Management, Quality Council, Quality Statements, Strategic Planning, Deming
Philosophy, Barriers to TQM Implementation.

157
Unit II – ORGANISATION

Organisation culture – Organisation Development, HRD, OD interface, change


management, strategic management, performance management, HR Information System.

Unit III – STATISTICAL PROCESS CONTROL (SPC)


The seven tools of quality, Statistical Fundamentals – Measures of Central
Tendency and Dispersion, Population and Sample, Normal Curve, Control Charts for
Variables and Attributes, Concept of six sigma, New Seven Management Tools.

Unit IV – TQM TOOLS


Benchmarking – Reasons to Benchmark, Bench Marking Process, Quality
Function Deployment (QFD) – House of Quality, QFD Process, Benefits, Taguchi
Quality Los function.

Unit V – QUALITY ASSURANCE SYSTEMS

Need for ISO 9000 and Other Quality Systems, ISO 9000:2000 Quality System
Elements, Implementation of Quality System, Documentation, Quality Auditing, 9000,
ISO 14000 – Concept, Requirements and Benefits – TS 16949 – Balrich Award

Reference Books:
1. Total Quality Management By R.S.Nagarajan, A.A. Arivalagar, New Age
International Publishers, New Delhi.

2. Total Quality Management. An integrated approach by Samuel KHO, Crest


Publishing House, New Delhi – 2.

3. Managing for Total Quality from Deming to Taguchi and SPC by N. Logothetis,
Prentice Hall of India 2000

4. Total Quality Management by Suganthi, Anand S. Anand, 2004, Prentice Hall of


India, New Delhi. www.phindia.com

5. Haushal Kumar, “Quality Management”: ABD Publishers, Jaipur


E.mail: oxford@id.eth.net

158
PAPER 19 - SOCIAL SECURITY LEGISLATION RELATING TO LABOUR

Unit - I

The Workmen's Compensation Act, 1923.

Unit - II

The Employees Provident Funds and Miscellaneous Provisions Act, 1952, with

the Employees Provident Fund Scheme, 1952, Employees Deposit Linked Insurance

Scheme 1976, Employees Pension Scheme 1995

Unit - III

The Employees State Insurance Act, 1948.


The Maternity Benefit Act, 1961.

Unit - IV

The Payment of Gratuity Act, 1972.


The Tamilnadu Labour Welfare Fund Act, 1972

Unit - V

The Equal Remuneration Act, 1976. The Payment of Wages Act, 1936. The

Minimum Wages Act, 1948. With rules and upto date notifications, amendments,

regulations and case laws in respect of each of the above acts.

Selected References:

Factory Laws applicable in Tamilnadu Volume - I to III by Madras Book Agency.

D.S.Chopta : The Minimum Wages Act, 1948 - Second Edition -


Eastern Law House, Calcutta.

D.S.Chopta : 'The Payment of Wages Act 1948' - Third Edition


- Eastern Law House, Calcutta.

159
D.S. Chopta : 'Payment of Bonus' Law & Practice - Texman
Publications (Private) Limited, Kucha Chelan,
Khari Baoli, Delhi - 110 006, 1871.
Law Journals like labour law journal, Labour &
Industrial Cases, Factories Journal Reports.

K.D.Srivastava : 'Workmen's Compensation Act' Third Edition


Eastern Book Company, 34, Lalbagh, Lucknow - 226 001

K.D. Srivastava : 'Employees State Insurance Act' Second Edition


Eastern Book Comlpany, 34, Lalbagh, Lucknow - 226 001.

K.D. Srivastava : 'Commentaries on' Employees Provident Fund &


Miscellaneous Provisions Act 1952' - 4th Edition
Eastern Book Company Law Publishers & Book
Sellers, 34, Lalbagh, Lucknow - 226 001.

K.D. Srivastava : 'Commentaries on 'Payment of Gratuity Act 1972'


Second Edition - Eastern Book Company
34, Lalbagh Lucknow - 226 001.
Law Journals like Labour Law Journal Labour &
Industrial cases, Factories Journal Reports.

PAPER 20 - ELECTIVE - VI

CORPORATE SOCIAL RESPONSIBILITY

Unit I
CSR - Definition, concepts, overview of corporate social responsibility, concentration
areas. Corporate social responsibility in Indian context and International. Need to be
social responsible.

Unit II

Business ethics and corporate social responsibility in Global scenario: CSR-business


ethics, corporate governance across the nations, ethical decision-making in different
culture, consumer protection, environment protection, gender issues in multiculturalism,
corruption and safety.

Unit III

Corporate community participation & Role and skills of social worker in CSR:
Corporate, NGO, Government, Citizen, need for partnership, need assessment, corporate
perspective on building successful partnership, tools and techniques. Role and skills -

160
Advocacy, administration, marketing, mediating, budgeting, organizing, documenting,
presenting, public speaking, teaching, supervising, writing.

Unit IV

Corporate social responsibility - Policies and activities: ISO - Standard on CSR,


International standards and norms. National and International CSR activities.

Unit V

Case studies of successful CSR initiative: CPCL, EID Parry / CUMI, Ashok Leyland,
AMM Foundation, Bajaj Auto, Coca-cola India, HMT, Hindustan Unilever, Infosys,
Tata, The Taj Mahal Hotel, Titan, TVS, MRF, Saint Gobain, Orchid, WIPRO, Birla
Group of companies, ICICI, TCS, Times of India and others.

Methodology of teaching:

Lectures, Reading materials, Discussions, assignment, field visits, news clippings.

Suggested Reading:

1. The business of social responsibility - Harsh shrivastava, Books for change,


Bangalore, yr 2000
2. Corporate social responsibility - concepts and cases, CV. Baxi, yr. 2005
3. Global strategic management, Dr. M. Mahmoudi, Deep & Deep Publications Pvt
Ltd, Delhi, yr. 2005
4. International Human Resource Management - Global perspective, SK. Bhatia,
Deep & Deep Publications Pvt. Ltd., Delhi, year 2005

Journals:

1. Harvard business review - corporate social responsibility getting the logic right,
vol. 84, issue 12, yr. 2006
2. Indian journal of social work - CSR in the globalised business environment, Vol.
66, issue 2, yr. 2005.
3. Indian journal of Industrial Relations - CSR: Present practice and future
possibilities, Vol. 40, issue 4, yr 2005

161
PAPER 21 - ELECTIVE - VII

HR MANAGEMENT IN SERVICE INDUSTRIES


(I.T. Hotel and Hospital)
Unit I:

Human Resource Planning: Job analysis – Job description . Job specification.


Employee recruitment and selection – Sources

Unit II:

Performance Appraisal, potential appraisal & career planning, Training and


development – Need Analysis, Task analysis – Records and forms. Compensation

Unit III:

Employee promotion, demotion and transfer – welfare – health and safety – stress
– causes of stress – consequence.

Unit IV:

HRM in I.T. – Personnel office – functions of the office – correspondence / O 7


M in personnel Department, Maintenance of Personnel records. Government policy
on I.T. Industries.

Unit V:

Time Management – Time factor, Time waster, prioritizing work, scheduling,


functions of time office – Electronic, Magnetic flexgile – Read Work arrangement –
Maintenance of Human Resource days.

Bibliography:-

R.C Goyal : Hospital Administration and HRM


Publishers: Prentice – Hall of India (Pvt.) Ltd.
New Delhi – 01.

A.V. Srinivasan : Managing a Modern Hospital


Publishers: Response Book A Division of Sage
Publications, New Delhi – 1.

162
R. Llewellyn Daview : Hospital Planning and Administration Publishers:
H.M.C. Macaulay Jaypee Brothers, New Delhi.

Sudhir Andreues : Hotel Front Office Training Manual


Publishers: Tata Mc Graw Hill Publishing Co. Ltd.

S.K.Bhatnagar : Front Office Management


Publishers: Frank Bros Co.

PAPER 22 - PROJECTS

Each student is required to take up a research project and submit a report in the
form of a dissertation. The students would begin the project activities in the beginning
of the IV Semester and submit the report for evaluation by the Institute/college. The
report shall not exceed 75 typed pages excluding tables, figures, bibliography and
appendices.

The report shall be valued by the Institute/College by constituting a committee


headed by the Professor and Head of Faculty/Department known as VIVAVOCE Exam
Committee. The marks shall be distributed as follows:

Internal : 20 marks (by the faculty/department guide)


External
a) Report : 50 marks (by the University Exam)
b) Viva Voce : 30 marks (VIVAVOCE Exam Committee)
Total :100 marks

Theoretical orientation to research by way of a brief course on Research


Methodology is given to the students before they start on their work.

Necessary guidance will be given to the students for the Dissertation. Students
who involve themselves in the project with interest will be able to develop skills of
research in constructing research tools, analyzing problems and interpreting and
evaluating results.

Wherever the Committees are formed for external evaluation, an external


examiner shall be appointed with the approval of the Head of the Institute/Colleges.

163
SOFT SKILL - IV - COMPUTING SKILLS

Objective: The major objective in introducing the Computer Skills course is to impart training
for students in Microsoft Office which has different components like MS Word, MS Excel, MS
Access, Power point etc., at two levels based on their knowledge and exposure. It provides
essential skills for the user to get adapted to any work environment, as most of the systems in
any6 work place have MS Office installed for their day to day activities. The course is highly
practice oriented rather than regular class room teaching.

Pre-requisite: Pass in Level B are an equivalent course.

Unit I: Word Processing – Formatting – Paragraph and character styles, templates and
wizards, table and contents and indexes, cross referencing; Tables and Columns – creating
manipulating and formatting; Mail Merge, Labels and Envelopes.

Unit II: Spreadsheets – Workbook, Building, Modifying, navigating; worksheet- Autofull,


copying and moving cells, inserting and deleting rows, printing; Formulas and functions-
Troubleshooting formulas, Functions and its forms like database, financial, logical, reference ,
mathematical and statistical – Databases – Creating, sorting, filtering and linking.

Unit III: Presentations – Power point – exploring, creating and editing slides, inserting tables
and charts- special effects- Clip Art, creating and drawing shapes, inserting multimedia content
– presentations – planning, animation, handouts, slideshow..

Unit IV: Databases – Access – Components, creating a database and project, import and
exporting, customizing; Tables- creating and setting fields; Queries –Types, creating, wizard-
Reports- creating and layout.

Unit V: Information Management – Outlook – Starting, closing, contacts, tool bars, file
management; email-reading, composing, responding, attachments, signature, junk mail; tasks-
screen, sorting, creating, deleting, assigning, updating; scheduling- calendar.

Note: All units needs an approach through practical exposure.

References:

1. Working in Microsoft Office; Ron Mansfield, Tata McGraw Hill


2. Microsoft Excel 2007; Guy Hart Davis, Tata McGraw Hill.

Examination:
1. Internal assessment could be based on Theory and/or practicals.
2. End semester is based on practicals.

164
12. M.A. DEGREE COURSE IN NATYA
(FIVE YEAR INTEGRATED)

For Part I & II (Language and English) as applicable to the other entire Undergraduate
courses.

THIRD SEMESTER

SYLLABUS

Title of the Paper


Paper V – Textual Sources on Natya (Tamil) (Theory)
Category of Core
theCourse
Year & Semester Second Year Third Semester
Credits 5 (FIVE)
Subject Code

Course Outline
Sangam Age – Introduction to Pathupattu
Unit – 1
Sangam Age – Introduction to Ettuthogai
Unit – 2
Arangettra Kathai from Silapadikkaram with Adiyarkunallar’s
Unit – 3 commentary
Pancha Marabu - (Kootha Marabu Chapter -4)
Unit – 4
Dramatic literature : (ancient)(Kaanal Vari) (Silapadikaram)
Unit – 5

165
Title of the Paper
Paper VI – Natya III (Practical)
Category of the Core
Course
Year & Semester Second Year Third Semester
Credits 4 (FOUR)
Subject Code

Course Outline
Dance-
Unit – 1 Nrtta Hasthas, Upangas, Charis (Bhumi, Akash), Karavartana,
Bahukarma
Allarippu,Jathiswaram
Unit – 2
Music
Unit – 3 Jathiswaram,(1) Folk song (1), Marriage song (1), Chindu song (1),
Kummi,(1) Kolattam (1), Patriotic song (1)
Theatre
Unit – 4 Actors medium – Body, Voice, Space; Relationship to environment-
Internal and External , Audio and Visual Aspect of an actor,
Movements in different spaces.
Yoga(8 Asanas,1 Pranayama & 1 Surya Namaskar)
Unit – 5

166
Title of the Paper Allied II – Paper II Glimpses of Indian Art History (Theory)
Category of the Allied
Course
Year & Semester Second Year Third Semester
Credits 5 (FIVE)
Subject Code

Course Outline
Indus Valley Civilization-Great Bath,Great Granary ; Mauryas-
Unit – 1 Palaces,Stupas,Pillars,Sanctuaries; Sungas- Stupas,Pillars,Chaitya
Halls,Rock cut Viharas and Cult Images, Kushanas-Style &
examples from Gandhara Art.
Guptas-Special features,Temple of Tigawa,Deogarh Temple,Nachna
Unit – 2 Kuthara,Bhimara,Bhitargaon Temples, Sculpture and Painting.
Chalukyas--Aihole,Badami,Pattadakal; Rasthrakutas—Kailasa
Unit – 3 Temple,Virupaksha Temple,Khajuraho and Ellora; Hoysalas—
Special features,Chennakesvara Temple,Hoysalesvara
Temple,Kesava Temple.
Vijayanagar—Hampi, Vittalaswamy Temple,Hazara Temple;
Unit – 4 Architecture under Bahamani & Deccan Sultanate.
Architecture under the Delhi Sultanate; Mughal Architecture –
Unit – 5 Special features,style with examples.

167
FOURTH SEMESTER

Title of the Paper


Paper VII - Concepts and Classification (Theory)
Category of the Core
Course
Year & Semester Second Year Fourth Semester
Credits 5 (FIVE)
Subject Code

Course Outline
Notation for Music and Dance -Jathiswaram
Unit – 1
Introduction to Sapta talas, 35 Talas
Unit – 2
Lakshanas of Musical forms(Geetham, Swarajati, Jathiswaram,
Unit – 3 Varnam , Padam)
Types of Drama : Rupaka (10), Patra, Daru
Unit – 4
Types of Theatre constructions
Unit – 5

Title of the Paper


Paper VIII – Natya And Nrtya IV (Practical)
Category of the Core
Course
Year & Semester Second Year Fourth Semester
Credits 4 (FOUR)
Subject Code

Course Outline
Dance & Music –Pushpanjali,Kauthwam.
Unit – 1
Dance & Music - Padam (Telugu)
Unit – 2
Dance & Music - Padam (Tamil)
Unit – 3
Theatre Actor’s Training – Physical, Vocal and Psychological
Unit – 4
Yoga (8 Asanas,1 Pranayama &1 Surya Namaskar)
Unit – 5

168
Title of the Paper
Allied II – Paper II – Glimpses of Indian Philosophy (Theory)
Category of the Allied
Course
Year & Semester Second Year Fourth Semester
Credits 5 (FIVE)
Subject Code

Course Outline
Vedas, Upanishads, Bhagavath Gita
Unit – 1
Jainism, Buddhism
Unit – 2
Nyaya, Vaisheshika, Sankhya, Yoga, Mimamsa
Unit – 3
Major Schools of Vedanta (Advaita, Dvaita, Vishisthadvaita)
Unit – 4
Saiva Siddhantha
Unit – 5

FIFTH SEMESTER

Title of the Paper Paper IX– Textual Sources on Natya (Sanskrit) (Theory)
Category of the Core
Course
Year & Semester Third Year Fifth Semester
Credits 5 (FIVE)
Subject Code

Course Outline
Importance of Bhava and Rasa - Abhinavagupta’s Commentary-
Unit – 1 Abhinavabharati
Brief outline of Nrtta Ratnavali, Nartana Adhyaya of Sangita
Unit – 2 Ratnakara,
Brief outline of Abhinaya Darpana.
Unit – 3
Dramatic Literature – select scenes from one Sanskrit play (ancient)
Unit – 4 (Abhijnana Sakuntalam Act VI )
Structure & Practice of Bhagavatha Mela Natakam and Therukoothu
Unit – 5

169
Title of the Paper
Paper X – Natya V (Practical)
Category of the Core
Course
Year & Semester Third Year Fifth Semester
Credits 5 (FIVE)
Subject Code

Course Outline
Dance:
Unit – 1 Viniyoga of Asamyukta Hastas
Viniyoga of Samyukta Abhinaya Hastas
Hastas for Devatas, Bandavas
Dance : Uthukaadu Venkatasubbiar’s Raasasabdham (1)
Unit – 2 Tillana
Music : Composition of Sankardas Swamigal(1) and Bhaskardas
Unit – 3 Swamigal (1)
Two representative Dramatic styles – movements of Bhagavatha
Unit – 4 Mela Natakam and Therukoothu(learning from recorded material )
Yoga (8 Asanas ,1 Pranayama,1Surya Namaskar)
Unit – 5

Title of the Paper


Paper XI - Nattuvangam I (Practical)
Category of the Core
Course
Year & Semester Third Year Fifth Semester
Credits 4 (FOUR)
Subject Code

Course Outline
Recitation of 5 simple korvais
Unit – 1
Handling Tattu – Kazhi - Manai for Adavu in Trikala
Unit – 2 Handling Tattu – Kazhi - Manai for Allarippu
Singing and handling Tattu – Kazhi-Manai for Jathiswaram
Unit – 3
Recitation of Dialogues – Sanskrit(1),Tamil(1),English(1)
Unit – 4
Yoga – Breathing technique for Voice culture
Unit – 5

170
Title of the Paper
Elective I – Ritualistic and Artistic Traditions (Theory)
Category of the Elective
Course
Year & Semester Third Year Fifth Semester
Credits 5 (FIVE)
Subject Code

Course Outline
Ritualistic dance and music in temples – Navasandhi, Kudamurai,
Unit – 1 Araiyar Sevai and Ahamargam
Rare dance and music forms: Simhanartanam, Perani and Prenkani
Unit – 2
Musical instruments for dance as evidenced from temple sculptures
Unit – 3
Study of musical instruments used for dance: Vina, Flute, Violin and
Unit – 4 Mruthangam.
Isai Vellalars: Their Contribution to music and dance (Nadaswaram
Unit – 5 & Tavil); Tanjore Quartet, Eminent dancers, Nattuvanars, Vocal and
Instrumental performers.

SIXTH SEMESTER

Title of the Paper


Paper XII – Theatrical Expression (Theory)
Category of the Core
Course
Year & Semester Third Year Sixth Semester
Credits 5 (FIVE)
Subject Code

Course Outline
Puppet theatre, masks, mask-like make up
Unit – 1
Pulluvan Pattu, Tala Madalle, Udukkadi Pattu, Theyyam
Unit – 2
Kuravanji Natakam , Pallu
Unit – 3
Harikatha Kalakshepam and others story telling traditions.
Unit – 4
Basics of Aharya: Costume designing, Make-up and Jewellery (for
Unit – 5 Bharata Natyam) Solo / Dance dramas, Historical and Social Plays.

Title of the Paper


Paper XIII – Natya VI & Nattuvangam II (Practical)

171
Category of the Core
Course
Year & Semester Third Year Sixth Semester
Credits 4 (FOUR)
Subject Code

Course Outline
Sabdam, Varnam.
Unit – 1
Jati Recitation and handling the talam for Sabdam,Varnam.
Unit – 2
Representative dramatic style – Harikatha Methodology
Unit – 3
Patterns of Karagam,Kavadi,Oyillattam/Kummi,Kollattam
Unit – 4
Theatre Skills – Movement/ Voice modulation
Unit – 5

Title of the Paper


Elective II- Choreography (Practical)
Category of the Elective
Course
Year & Semester Third Year Sixth Semester
Credits 5 (FIVE)
Subject Code

Course Outline
Choreography for :
Unit – 1 Given Jathis.
Given songs / song text and movements.
Unit – 2
Group of 5 or 6 dancers.
Unit – 3
Ragas and Moods (9).
Unit – 4
Play production –Selection, Music, Movements.
Unit – 5

172
Title of the Paper Elective III– Cultural Scenario 14th TO 20th Century A.D.
(Theory)
Category of the Elective
Course
Year & Semester Third Year Sixth Semester
Credits 5 (FIVE)
Subject Code

Course Outline
Contribution to the revival of culture and Arts in South India during
Unit – 1 14th century to 16th century.
Nayak kings and Marathas of Thanjavur
Unit – 2
Theatre styles of Tamil Nadu during 19th-20th centuries: Thanjavur
Unit – 3 Marathi theatre, Madurai, Tamil theatre movement, (Bhaskardas,
Shankardas, Pammal Sambandar)
Music Trinity,Tamil Trinity,Dance compositions & composers (14th
Unit – 4 -20th centuries). Cultural scenario of Bharathanatyam during 19th -20th
centuries (based on literary sources), Kamba Ramayana and Villi
Bharatam
Guru Sishya relationship in Indian Culture and Purpose and Ethics of
Unit – 5 Natya

1. Recommended Texts:

1. Dr. S. Singaravelan , 2005, Tolkappiyam : Simple notes (in Tamil) (Eluthu


Adhikaram, Sol Adhikaram, Porul Adhikaram) Tirunelveli, South India. Saiva
Siddhanta Kazhagam Limited,154, T.T.K. Salai, Chennai-18.

2. Dr. S. Ilakkuvanar. M.A, M.O.L, Ph.D, Tholkappiyam: In English with critical


studies, Neelamalar Educational Publishers, Madras.600 101.

3. P. Sambamoorthy, South Indian Music, 6 Vols., Indian Music Publishing House


Madras (Eng).

4. R.S. Nagar – Edited, Natyasastra of Bharatamuni (Sanskrit) with


The commentary of Acharya Abinava Gupta. Vol. I. Chapter (1-7), Vol II.
Chapter (8-18), Vol III. Chapter (19-27), Vol IV. Chapter (28-36).

5. Dr.Man Mohan Ghosh, Naatya Sastra I &II. (A Treatise on Ancient Indian


Dramaturgy and Histrionics ascribed to Bharatha Muni) Vol I- (chapter 1-27) Vol II –
(Chapters 28-36).

6. Ghosh, Manmohan, Nandikesvara’s Abhinayadarpanam,Manisha Granthalaya Pvt


Ltd.,Calcutta,1981.

173
7. Sri. T.V. Ananthanarayanan, Learning Through Yoga published by Krishnamacharya
Yoga Mandiram, Ch – 28.

8. Dr. E. R. Gopalakrishnan, Be a Healthy Dancer, Yoga Maiyam, Chennai – 20.

2. Reference Books:

1. S. V. Subramanian and V. Veerasami – Edited, Cultural Heritage of the Tamils


International Institute of Tamil Studies.

2. Dr. Padma Subrahmanyam, Karanas - Common Dance codes of India and


Indonesia, Nrithyodaya, Chennai .Vol I

3. Dr. K.K. Pillai. 1975 ,The History of TamilNadu & Social History of Tamils.

4. Hiriyanna, M. Art Experience, 1954, Mysore: Kavyalaya Publishers,

5. ------------------Indian conception of values: 1975, Mysore: Kavyalaya


Publishers.

6. Pandey, 1959, K. C., Comparative Aesthetics, Vol. I Indian Aesthetics, Varanasi.


Chowkhamba Sanskrit Series Office.

7. Radhakrishanan, S.,Indian Philosophy in 2 Vols.London: Allen & Unwin.1958.

8. Raghavan, V.,The Number of Rasas,The Adyar Library and Research Centre,


Madras- 600 020.1975.

9. Ramachandran, T.P., The Indian Philosophy of Beauty Vols. I & II, Madras:
University of Madras.

10. Swami Prajnananda, Cultural Heritage of Indian Fine Arts.

11. Tejomayananda,Swami, Hindu Culture: An Introduction,Mumbai: Central Chinmaya


Mission Trust.2000.

12. Khokar, Ashish Mohan, Bharatanatyam, Rupa & Co, New Delhi.2002.

13. Rukmini Devi Arundale, Birth Centenary Volume,The Kalakshetra Foundation,


Chennai.2003.

14. Vatsyayan Kapila: Indian Classical dance, Publications Division, New Delhi, 1992.

15. Varadpande, M.L: History of Indian Theatre: Loka Ranja panorama of Indian Folk
Theatre, Abhinav publications, New Delhi, 1992.

174
16. Vastsyayan, Kapila: Traditional Indian Theatre: Multiple Streams, National Book
Trust, New Delhi, 1980.

17. Dr. Padma Subrahmanyam: Legacy of a Legend, A collection of articles.


Nrithyodaya, The Academy of Performing Arts, Mumbai – 22

18. De, S.K. Sanskrit poetics as study of Aesthetics with notes by Edwin Gerow.
Berkeley and Los Angeles: University of California Press 1963.

19. Manjul Gupta A study of Abhinava Bharathi on Bharata’s Natya Sastra and Avaloka
on Dhananjaya’s Dasaroopaka. Dramatgrical Principles.

20.------------------- Abhinavagupta, An Historical and Philosophical study, Varanasi.


Chowkhamba Sanskrit Series Office, 1935.

21. Subramanyam, Padma., Natya Sastra and National Unity, Kerala : Sri Ramavarma
Government Sanskrit College, Tripunithura, 1997.

22. ------------------- Bharata’s Art, Then and Now. Bhulabhai Memorial Institute Bombay
– 36 & Nrithyodata, Madras – 20, 1979

23.Bashyam, A.L. (1975), Cultural History of India, Oxford Clarendon Press, UK

24. Epson, E.J. (Ed.) (1979), Cambridge History of India: Vol I. Ancient India, S. Chand,
New Delhi.

25. Sathianathaier, R., (1972), Political and Cultural History of India, Vol-1, S.
Vishvanathan Printers & Publishers, Madras

26. Smith, V, (1958), Oxford History of India, Oxford University Press, UK

27. Thapar, Romila, (1996), History of India, Vol – 1, Penguin, London.

28. Tripathi, Ram Shauhar. (1987), History of Ancient India, Motilal Banarasidas, New
Delhi

29. Dr. A. N. Perumal : Tamil Drama, Origin and Development, International Institute of
Tamil Studies, Chennai – 20

30. Adya Rangacharya, Drama in Sanskrit Literature, Popular Prakasan

31. M. Christopher, Concept of Ancient Indian Theatre, Munshiram Manoharlal


Publishers Pvt. Ltd.

32. K.K. Pillay, Social History of the Tamils, University of Madras 1975

175
3. Website, e-learning resources:
1. www.indian-heritage.com 2.www.thehorizons.com
3 www.nadanam.com 4. www.chandrakantha.com
5. www.carnatica.net 6. www.kutcheribuzz.com
7. http://web.mit.edu/natya 8. www.artindia.net
9. www.nrityagram.org 10.www.rangbahar.com/folkdances.htm
11 www.narthaki.com 12. www.softsolutions.co.in

Instruction for Course Transaction (for all courses in each semester)

For
For Theory Practical
Papers
Lecture Hours 4
Library Hours 1
Field work Hours which includes attending of Seminars/ 1
Symposium/ Conferences
Practical Learning Hours 4
Listening (cassettes/ compact discs/ records etc.) hours which 1
includes listening to live concerts
Self learning writing/ teaching aids like notation, cassettes, etc. 1

Model Question Paper Total marks:75.


Core paper I Introduction to Natya Time : 3 Hrs.

Part –A-(50 words) Answer any 10 out of 12 questions= 10x1=10


1. What is the Indian conception of values called?
2. Define Natya. Is it synonymous with Nrtta?
3. Name the authors of Nātya Śāstra and Tolkappiyam.
4. Which are the adhikarams in Tolkappiyyam?
5. Name four dance styles popularly known as ‘classical’ in India today?
6. What is meant by Muthamizh?
7. From which play has the word Bharata been explained as Bhava,Raga and Tala?
8. Define the two distinct heads under Iyal .
9. Name two commentators of Silappadikaram.
10. Two famous Bharatanatyam dancers:
11. Name 2 commentators of the Natya Sastra.
12. Which chapters deal with Angika Abhinaya in the Natya Sastra?

Part –B- (200 words) Answer any 5 out of 7 questions= 5x5=25


1. Distinguish between Nātya Veda and Nātya Śāstra.
2. Define Abhinaya. Explain the different types.
3. How many types of Puruśartha-s are there? Explain.
4. Name the chapters in the Nātya Śāstra that deal with music.
5. What is the nature and purpose of Nātya?
6. Explain the term Purvaranga.Who are the main characters in it?
7. Explain Bharata’s theory of Rasa.

176
Part –C-(500 words) Answer any 4 out of 6 questions= 4x10=40
1. Write an essay on any two major folk dance forms of Tamilnadu.
2. Elaborate on Meippattiyal of Tolkappiyyam.
3. Explain briefly about the contents of the Nātya Śāstra.
4. Elaborate upon the mythological origin of Nātya.
5. Compare and contrast any two of the following dance
styles: Bharathanatyam, Odissi, Kathak and Kathakali.
6. Compare and contrast Rasaadyaaya of Natya Sastra and Meipattiyal of Tolkappiyam
--------
Programme Structure for PG course

Title of the Paper


Paper XIV - Bhava & Rasa (Theory)
Category of the Core
Course
Year and Semester Fourth year Seventh Semester
Credits 4 (FOUR)
Subject Code

Unit - 1 Bhava
Unit - 2 Rasa
Unit - 3 Mei padu and Suvai
Unit - 4 Nayaka and Nayika bheda lakshanam
Unit - 5 Concepts of Aucitya, Vakrokti, Ninda Stuthi, Apahnuti, in Nrtta

Title of the Paper Paper XV - Early literary sources for Natya and
Koothu(Theory)

Category of the Core


Course
Year and Semester Fourth year Seventh Semester
Credits 4 (FOUR)
Subject Code

Unit - 1 References to Natya in the Vedas.


Unit - 2 References to Natya in Ramayana and Mahabharata
Unit - 3 References to Koothu in Sangam literature
Unit - 4 References to Koothu in Silapathigaram
Unit - 5 Natya Sastra; Date & Mythologies

177
Title of the Paper
Paper XVI - Natya VII (Practical)
Category of the Core
Course
Year and Semester Fourth year Seventh Semester
Credits 4 (FOUR)
Subject Code

Unit - 1 Netraabhinaya and Yoga


Unit - 2 Tamil Padhavarnam/ Pravesha Daru
Unit - 3 Thillana
Unit - 4 Karanas (1 – 27)
Unit - 5 Music Thirupavai(1), Thiruvampavai(1) and above items

Title of the Paper


Paper XVII - Nattuvangam & Direction III (Practical)
Category of the Core
Course
Year and Semester Fourth year Seventh Semester
Credits 4 (FOUR)
Subject Code

Unit - 1 Choreography of Jathiswaram- Solo.


Unit - 2 Rechoreography of Jathiswaram for 2/more dancers
Unit - 3 Nattuvangam for Jathiswaram
Unit - 4 Nadai for Characters
Unit - 5 Recitation of Vachanas (Vachika Abhinaya)

178
Title of the Paper Elective I – Pan Indian Classical Dance forms:
Kuchupudi/Mohiniattam (Theory)

Category of the Elective


Course
Year and Semester Fourth year Seventh Semester
Credits 3 (Three)
Subject Code

Unit - 1 History and Themes


Unit– 2 Angika -Repertoire
Unit– 3 Vachika-Language and music
Unit– 4 Aharya-costumes and jewellery
Unit– 5 Famous performers

Title of the Paper


Elective II- Cultural Tourism in India (Theory)
Category of the Elective
Course
Year and Semester Fourth year Eighth Semester
Credits 3 (Three)
Subject Code

Unit 1 Cultural Sites


Unit 2 People: Heritage and Customs
Unit 3 Fairs and Festivals
Unit 4 Handicrafts
Unit 5 Food

179
Title of the Paper
Paper XVIII - Dance sculpture in temples (Theory)
Category of the Core
Course
Year and Semester Fourth year Eighth Semester
Credits 4 (FOUR)
Subject Code

Unit - 1 Temple as the focal centre for dance


Unit- 2 Relationship of Natya Sastra with Agama Sastra
Unit - 3 Karana Sculptures of Thanjavur
Unit - 4 Karana Sculptures of Chidambaram, Kumbakonam,Darasuram
Unit - 5 Karana Sculptures of Thiruvannamalai, Virudhachalam

Title of the Paper


Paper XIX - Natya Therapy (Theory)
Category of the Core
Course
Year and Semester Fourth year Eighth Semester
Credits 4 (FOUR)
Subject Code

Unit - 1 Therapy for dancers, actors


Unit - 2 Therapy through Natya – Physiology
Unit- 3 Therapy through Natya – Psychology
Unit - 4 Speech therapy
Unit - 5 Music Therapy

180
Title of the Paper
Paper XX – Natya VIII (Practical)
Category of the Core
Course
Year and Semester Fourth year Eighth Semester
Credits 4 (FOUR)
Subject Code

Unit -1 Karanas (28 – 55)


Unit - 2 Mallari
Unit - 3 Karanas-(56-81)
Unit - 4 Music Tamil Kritis (4), Tevaram(1),
Unit - 5 Bhasa: Karna Bharam(One Act Play)

Title of the Paper


Paper XXI - Nattuvangam IV(Practical)
Category of the Core
Course
Year and Semester Fourth year Eighth Semester
Credits 2 (TWO)
Subject Code

Unit - 1 Vachika in Tala


Unit - 2 Learn recitation of following theermanams:
Thrikalajathi in Adi Thalam
Unit - 3 Thrikalajathi in RupakaThalam
Unit - 4 Theermanam in Khanda ChapuThala
Unit - 5 Theermanam in Misra ChapuThala

181
Title of the Paper
Elective III – Philosophy Of Beauty (Theory)
Category of the Elective
Course
Year and Semester Fourth year Eighth Semester
Credits 3 (THREE)
Subject Code

Unit - 1 Definition and Nature


Unit - 2 Beauty in Nature
Unit- 3 Beauty in Art
Unit - 4 Some Important Theories in Aesthetics
Unit - 5 Some Important Aestheticians.

Title of the Paper


Elective IV - Pan Indian Classical Dance Form: Kuchupudi/
Mohiniattam (Practical)
Category of the Elective
Course
Year and Semester Fourth year Eighth Semester
Credits 3 (THREE)
Subject Code

Unit - 1 Basic steps


Unit - 2 Invocatory Item
Unit- 3 Nrtta item -1.
Unit - 4 Abhinaya item-1
Unit - 5 To sing any one of the above.

182
NINTH SEMESTER
Title of the Paper
Paper XXII –Professionalism (Theory)
Category of the Core
Course
Year and Semester Fifth year Ninth Semester
Credits 4 (FOUR)
Subject Code

Unit - 1 Pedagogy
Unit - 2 Elements of choreography
Unit - 3 Music in relation to Natya
Unit - 4 Sound and Lighting system for a presentation
Unit - 5 Management of Art Institutions and performances

Title of the Paper


Paper XXIII - Natya in Space and Time (Theory)
Category of the Core
Course
Year and Semester Fifth year Ninth Semester
Credits 4 (FOUR)
Subject Code

Unit -1 Natya Sastra and Martial Arts


Unit - 2 Pan Indian nature of Natya Sastra – Karanas in Satara
Unit - 3 Pan Asian view of Natya Sastra and Ithihasas – Karanas in Prambanan
(Indonesia)
Unit - 4 Traditional Indian Natya forms - Ramaleela, Rasleela, Ankia Nat-
Sattriya,Bhavai,Tamasha.
Unit - 5 Contributions of Masters to Dance Music – Melattur Venkatrama Sastri,
Gopalakrishna Bharati, Uttukadu Venkatasubbaiyyar.

183
Title of the Paper
Paper XXIV - Natya IX(Practical)
Category of the Core
Course
Year & Semester Fifth year Ninth Semester
Credits 4 (FOUR)
Subject Code

Unit - 1 1 Astapadi
Unit- 2 1 Javali, 1 Bhajan
Unit - 3 1 Abhang, 1 Dasar Padam
Unit - 4 Improvisation – 1 scene from traditional/ folk theatre
Unit - 5 Karanas (82-108)

Title of the Paper


Elective V - Choreography and Direction (Practical)
Category of the Elective V
Course
Year & Semester Fifth year Ninth Semester
Credits 3 (THREE)
Subject Code

Unit - 1 Learn to sing and do nattuvangam for all the items learnt in dance practical
Unit- 2 Teaching practical classes for students of final year B.A
Unit - 3 Choreographing a half hour long dance drama involving atleast 8 – 10 students
Unit - 4 Play production for children
Unit - 5 Yoga Therapy module for performers

184
Title of the Paper
Elective VI : Nataraja Tattvam(Theory)
Category of the Elective VI (Offered to other departments)
Course
Year & Semester Fifth year Ninth Semester
Credits 2/3 (TWO/THREE)
Subject Code

Unit - 1 Concept of Thandava – 7, 12, 108.


Unit- 2 Sculptural Representation
Unit - 3 Philosophical Significance
Unit - 4 Chidambaram – Tamil Nadu, Uttara Chidambaram – Maharastra
Unit - 5 Two Major Works on Nataraja

Title of the Paper


Internship Paper – Aharya (Practical Internship)
Category of the Internship
Course
Year and Semester Fifth year Ninth Semester
Credits 2(TWO)
Subject Code

Unit - 1 Audio balancing


Unit - 2 Lighting
Unit - 3 Preparation of stage décor and usage
Unit - 4 To observe Choreography and Rehearsal methodology under a professional
troupe
Unit - 5 Costume designing

185
TENTH SEMESTER
Title of the Paper
Paper XXV - Research Methodology(Theory)
Category of the Core
Course
Year and Semester Fifth year Tenth Semester
Credits 4 (FOUR)
Subject Code

Unit 1 Purpose & Types of Research


Unit - 2 Problem & Hypothesis
Unit - 3 Data Collection
Unit - 4 Research Design
Unit - 5 Writing a research proposal and report

Title of the Paper


Paper XXVI - Concert I Choreography & Direction (Practical)
Category of the Core
Course
Year and Semester Fifth year Tenth Semester
Credits 2 (TWO)
Subject Code

Unit - 1 Nattuvangam & Choreography for Thillana- Solo.


Unit - 2 Rechoreography of Thillana for 2/more dancers
Unit - 3 Choreography of Padam based on the Navarasas.
Unit - 4 Choreography of Padam based on Astanayika
Unit - 5 Directing a skit/mime on a social issue/problem.

186
Title of the Paper
Paper XXVII – Concert II Performance (Practical)
Category of the Core
Course
Year and Semester Fifth year Tenth Semester
Credits 2 (TWO)
Subject Code

Unit - 1 Performance (Dance)


Unit- 2 Performance (Drama)
Unit - 3 Performance (Music)
Unit - 4 Performance (Yoga)
Unit - 5 Multimedia Presentation of the arts.

Title of the Paper


Paper XXVIII– Project Work/Dissertation Viva -Voce(Theory)
Category of the Core
Course
Year and Semester Fifth year Tenth Semester
Credits 6 (SIX)
Subject Code

Title of the Paper


Paper XXIX – Resources & Docummentation of Natya
Category of the Core
Course
Year and Semester Fifth year Tenth Semester
Credits 4 (FOUR)
Subject Code

Unit - 1 Literary Sources


Unit- 2 Oral Tradition
Unit - 3 Sculptural and Epigraphical Sources
Unit - 4 Documentation Through Written forms
Unit - 5 Documentation through Audio, Video

Title of the Paper Elective VII – Classical and Folk dances of Madras from 1600
A.D to the present day.
Category of the Elective
Course
Year and Semester Fifth year Tenth Semester

187
Credits 3 (THREE)
Subject Code

Unit - 1 17th Century.


Unit- 2 18th Century.
Unit - 3 19th Century.
Unit - 4 20th Century
Unit - 5 21st Century

Instruction for Course Transaction (for all courses in each semester)

For
For Practical
Papers
Lecture Hours 4
Library Hours 1
Field work Hours which includes attending of Seminars/ 1
Symposium/ Conferences
Practical Learning Hours 4
Listening (cassettes/ compact discs/ records etc.) hours 1
which includes listening to live concerts
Self learning writing/ teaching aids like notation, cassettes, 1
etc.

188
13. M.A.DEGREE COURSE IN PHILOSOPHY

THIRD SEMESTER

SYLLABUS

CORE PAPER-IX: PHILOSOPHY OF RELIGION

1.Introduction:
Nature and scope of philosophy of religion - its relation to philosophy, psychology and
theology.
2.Origin and Development of Religion:
Primitive or tribal religion - animism, spiritism , totemism- fetishism- mana and magic -
chief characterisitc features of national or priestly religion and universal or prophetic
religion-definition of religion - basic religious beliefs.
3.Psychology of Religion:
The psychological basis of religion - attitudes to religion, intellectual, moral and
emotional.
4.The Nature and Types of Religious and Mystical Experience:
Illustrations from the lives of the mystics of all religions - characteristic features of
religious and mystical experience - criticisms of psychologists and philosophers – Pseudo
mystical experience- values and significance of religious and mystical experience.
5.The Metaphysics of Religion:
The nature and attributes of God - God as a necessary Being-omnipresent, omniscient and
omnipotent - the personality of God - God as personal - God as ethical - God as
immanent and transcendent – God as absolute.
The problem of evil - the idea of evil in history of religion - nature and moral evils - evil
and omnipotent God - human freedom (solutions) and evil- current solutions for the
problem of evil.

Books for Study: (Relevant Chapters Only)

1. George Galloway, The Philosophy of Religion


2. E.S.Brightman, The Philosophy of Religion
3. W.K. Wright, Students Philosophy of Religion
4. Evelyn Underhill , Mysticism and Philosophy.
5. John Hick, Philosophy of Religion (Ed)
6. Y. MASIH, Introduction to Religious Philosophy

189
CORE PAPER-X PHILOSOPHY OF KANT - I

1. The Critique of Pure Reason:

Unit – I
The influence of hume and liebnitz on kant – historical background – the problem of
kant.
Unit – II
General problem of metaphysics – the transcendental ? Of critical method- copernican
revolution.

Unit – III
Apriori knowledge-types of judgment-are there synthetic apriori judgments?-sense and
sensibility.

Unit - IV
Space and time as intuition, as metaphysical deduction and as transcendental deduction.
Schematism of the categories-the system of all principal-idioms of intuition.

UNIT – V
Anticipation of perceptions, analogies of experience – postulates of empirical thought –
phenomena and noumena – the refutation of idealism - transcendental illusion – the
paralogisms of pure reason – antinomies of pure reason – the ideal of pure reason

Books for study: (Relevant Chapters Only)


1. H.J. Paton, Kant's Metaphysics of Experience, 2 Vols.
2. S.Korner, Kant (Penguin)
3. Justus Hartnack, Kant's Theory of Knonwledge.
4. A.C.Ewing, A Short Commentary on Kant's Critique of Pure Reason.
5. Abbot (Trl)., Kant's Theory of Ethics.
6. H.B. Acton, Kant's Moral Philosophy.
7. C.D. Broad, Five Types of Ethical Theory (Chapter on Kant)
8. H.J. Paton, The Categorical Imperative (Hutchinson).
9. H.W. Cassirer, A Commentary on Kant's Critique of Judgement, Barnes noble
and Methun.

CORE PAPER-XI POLITICAL PHILOSOPHY

1. Greek Political Thought:


City-state - the relation of state and citizen - forms of government - relation of
ethics and politics.
Plato: Method of politics - works - theory of state - theory of justice - theory of
education - theory of communism- property and family - Republic and laws.
Aristotle: Method of politics - theory of state - justification of slavery - citizenship
- on government - best constitution - rule of Law , New art of the states.

190
2. Origin of State:
The divine right theory - the force theory - the social contract theory - Hobbes,
Locke, Rousseau - Historical or evolutionary theory.

3. Machiaveli:
Political background - denial of divine law - denial of natural law - conception of
human nature - the prince.

4. HINDU POLITICAL THOUGHT:


The Theory of property, Law and Social order. The Theory of state, Rajya, state
authority.

5. Political Thought of Thiruvalluvar.

Books for Study: (Relevant Chapters Only);

1. D.R. Bhandari, History of European Political Philosophy.


2. V.D. Mahajan, Recent Political Thought.
3. A.C. Kapoor, Principles of Political Science.
4. G.H. Sabine, A History of Political Theory.
5. Tirukkural (Ed) Madras University Publication
6. M. Venkataraman - A guide to Political Philosophy

CORE PAPER-XII PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE

1. Perspectives in Philosophy of Science: Historical (Toulmin and Kuhn) and


Logical Empiricistic Perspectives. Hempell, Rudolf, Carnap.
2. Philosophical aspects of Biology: Organismic Biology - Reductionism. The
relation of physical science to Biology.
3. Space and Time: Idealistic (Kant), Realistic (Samuel Alexander), Relativistic
(Einstein) and anti - intellectualistic (Henri Bergson) theories.
4. Methodological Problems of Social Sciences
5. Cosmologies (Steady state and Big Bang Theories)

Books for Study:

1. Peter Caws, Philosophy of Science


2. Ernest Nagel, The Structure of Science
3. Bernard Baumrin, Philosophy of Science
4. Durbin, Philosophy of Science
5. R.Harre, Philosophy of Science
6. R.Harre,An Introduction to the Logic of Sciences
7. Stephen Toulmin, The Philosophy of Science
8. Thomas Kuhn, The Structure of Scientific Revolution

191
EXTRA - DISCIPLINARY II PHILOSOPHY OF HUMAN RIGHTS

UNIT – I NATURE OF RIGHTS

- Right – definition
- the rights of man – fundamental rights by nature – five freedoms
- rights and duties
- classification of rights – moral rights, legal rights, civil rights and political rights.

UNIT – II THEORIES OF HUMAN RIGHTS

- Introduction, definition and features of human rights


- the theory of natural rights
- social welfare theory and legal theory
- the concept of liberty, equality, peace and human rights.

UNIT – III UNIVERSAL DECLARATION OF HUMAN RIGHTS

International covenants of human rights


Indian constitutional guarantee on human rights
Fundamental rights. Part iii of the constitution

Directive principles of the state policy part iv of the constitution.

UNIT – IV RIGHTS OF THE EMERGING SECTORS:

Children rights exploitation, labour


Women’s rights – right to inheritance, right to divorce, right to marry, right to education
& right to equality.
Minority rights – religious and linguistic rights

UNIT – V ENFORCEMENT OF HUMAN RIGHTS:

Uno amnesty international, asia watch.


National human rights commission
Ngo’s activities and movements.
Ref: 1. Introduction to ethics – william lillie
2. Sivagami paramasivam – human rights a study. Sri ram computer prints and
offset, salem, tamil nadu.

192
Books for study:

1. Patrick Hayden (ed) 2001. The Philosophy of Human Rights, St.Paul, MN,
Paragon House.
2. Rorty, "Human Rights, Rationality and Sentimentality"
3. Harman, "Moral Relativism as a Foundation for Natural Rights"
4. Locke,Second Treatise on Government - Chapter - II
5. Louis Pojman, "Are Human Rights based on Equal Human Worth?"
6. J.Roland Pennocck, "Rights, Natural Rights,and Human Rights? A General View"
7. Michael J.Perry, (August 1997). "Are Human Rights Universal? The Relativist
Challenge and Related Matters," Human Rights Quarterly, Vol. 19, 3.

Elective - III Philosophy of Education


Unit – 1
Meaning of Education – Science, Philosophy and Education – Aims of Education-
Scope of Philosophy of Education

Unit - 2
Naturalism in Education – Rousseau’s formulations of the principles of Education-
Education for different stages-Influence of Rousseau

Unit – 3
Pragmatism in Education – John Dewey’s Philosophy of Education- Process of
Instruction and Methods of teaching- Aims of Education and organization of curriculum-
Discipline and interest-Dewey’s influence on modern Education.

Unit – 4
Psychological Tendencies in Education – Pestalozzi’s Educational Principles-
contribution of Pestalozzi – John Frederick Herbart’s Psychology of Education –
Doctrine of interest – need for instruction – curriculum and correlation – method of
instruction – Process of instruction.

Unit – 5
Philosophies of Education – Rabindranath Tagore, Mahatma Gandhi and Swami
Vivekananda.

Books for Study:


1. R.P. Sharma, Educational Theories and Modern Trends
2. K.K. Bhatia and C.L. Narang, Philosophical and Sociological Formulations of
Education
3. S.K. Murthy, Philosophical and Sociological Foundations of Education
4. John S. Brubucher, Modern Philosophies of Education
5. B. Guha, An Introduction to Philosophy of Education.

193
FOURTH SEMESTER

CORE PAPER-XIII - PHILOSOPHY OF MANAGEMENT

Unit - 1
Nature and scope of
(A) philosophy management
(c) philosophy of management

Unit - 2
Managerial effectiveness: a model based on indian ethics
Wisdom worker
The psycho-philosophical model
The sadhana for a wisdom worker
The concept of self in indian psycho-philosophy.

UNIT – 3
Self – management
Be satisfied with yourself
Do your work with full concentration without any anxiety for results.
Develop an appropriate mental attitude in you.
Needs and desires – existence, knowledge and happiness.

UNIT - 4
Leadership – skills
Communication skills
Decision – making skills
Conceptual skills

UNIT – 5
Art of living
The fundamental problem in life
Selection of the problem
The purpose of life
Macro vision

Books for Study: (Relevant Chapters only)

1. S.k. chakraborty, managerial effectiveness and quality of work life: indian insights
2. G.d. sharma, management and the indian ethos
3. Christopher hodgkinson, the philosophy of leadership
4. Nalini v. Devi, vedanta and management

194
PAPER-XIV SAIVA SIDDHANTA

1. History:
(A) Traces of Saivism in the Rig Veda, the Yajur Veda and the Atharva Veda. The
ideas of Rudra-Pasupti and Stamba worship.

2. Development of Siddhantic thought:


(A) The Upanishads, especially the Svetasvatara.
(B) Traces of Saivite thought in the Tolkappiyam and Sangam literature .
(C) Devotional literature of the Samayacharyas and Nayanmars.
(D) Philosophical literature of the Santanacharyas.
(E) Systematization of worship in the Agamas.

3. Theory of Knowledge:
Pramanas - Sense - Perception. Reasoning and Authority para and apara vidyas .
Theories of truth and error. (Prama and Bhrama)

4. Metaphysics:
The three ultimate Realities : Pati, Pasu and Pasa Satkarya vada. The idea of
causation.
(A) Nature of Pati-Criticism or Nirguna vada . Divine motherhood and the redemptive
principle of grace - Criticism of the doctrine of Avatara, Form, Formless and
Linga concepts - Pancha kritya - Nataraja dance.
(B) Nature of Pasu-Saiva Siddhanta Psychology - Plurality of souls - characteristics of
the soul and its relation to God - soul as sadasat - classification of souls -avasthas.
(C) Nature of Pasa - The three - fold character- anava, maya and karma - the thirty six
tattvas and their relation to the soul.

5. Ethics and Religion :


(A) The highest purushartha : Mukti or redemption.
(B) Means of attaining salvation (carya, kriya, yoga, jnana and diksha)
(C) Five lettered mantra - Significance.

Books for Study :

1. Suryanarayana Sastri: Article in Cultural Heritage of India


2. Nilakanta Sastri: Article in the Cultural Heritage of India Volume.
3. V. Paranjoti: Saiva Siddhanta.
4. John Piet: A Logical Presentation of Saiva Siddhanta.
5. C.V. Narayana Iyer: Origin and Early History of Saivism in South India
6. Article in A History of Philosophy - Eastern and Western.
7. V.A. Devasenapathi: Saiva Siddhanta, University of Madras.

195
CORE PAPER XV PHILOSOPHY OF KANT - II

CRITIQUE OF PRACTICAL REASON

UNIT- I

Analytic and Dialectic – three formulations of moral principles: (1) as a categorical


imperative (2) as a principle of human dignity and (3) as a principle of self legislation

UNIT – II

Hypothetical and categorical imperative – motive and consequences – “person” and


“thing”

UNIT – III

Formalism – regorism and stringency of Kantian ethics

UNIT IV

The postulates of morality – freedom of the will, immortality of the soul and existence of
God – alleged inconsistency and insufficiency of the postulates

UNIT – V

CRITIQUE OF JUDGEMENT

Analytic of beautiful – Analytic of Sublime – Analytic of Teleological judgement

Book for study:

Abbot (Trans.) Kant’s Theory of Ethics


H. B. Acton, Kant’s Moral Philosophy
C.D. Broad, Five types of ethical theory
H.J. Paton, The Categorical Imperative
H.W Caassier, A Commentary of Kant’s Critique of Judgements

196
CORE PAPER XVI INDIAN CULTURE
Unit – 1

Culture
Meaning and Scope – Culture and Civilization-General Characteristic – Features of
Indian Culture – Geographical Impact of Indian Culture, Indus Valley Culture

Unit – 2

Culture in Sangam Age and Post-Sangam Age


Sangam Literature – Society-Political and Economical Conditions-Trade-Religion
and Fine Arts

Unit – 3

Pallavas’ Contribution to Indian Culture


Origin-Pallavas Administration-Society-Economic and Religious Conditions-Art
and Architecture-Literature and Education.

Unit – 4

Cholas’ Contribution to Indian Culture


Chola Polity-Local Administration-Election Method-Social and Economic
Conditions-Religion-Silver Age of the Cholas-Literature and Fine Arts.

Unit – 5

Cheran and Pandiyan Contributions to Indian Culture:


Administration-Society-Social & Economic Condition-Religion-Fine Arts

Prescribed books:

1. N. Subramaniyam, History of TamilNadu


2. B.N. Lunia, Evolution of Indian Culture

Books for Reference:

1. Subrate K. Misra, Culture and Rationality


2. R.N. Saletore, Encyclopedia of Indian Culture

3. K.A. Nilakanda Sastri, A History of South India


4. S.K. Aiyangar, The Contribution of South India of Indian Culture
5. Charles A Moore, Philosophy and Culture

197
ELECTIVE PAPER IV INDUSTRIAL PSYCHOLOGY

Unit – 1

Introduction
Definition-Nature-Scope-Problems in Organizational Psychology

Unit – 2

Personnel Psychology
Employee Selection-Interview-observation-Training and Development in Organization.

Unit – 3

Organizational Psychology
Leadership-Motivation-Job Satisfaction-organizational Structure.

Unit – 4

The work place


Conditions of Work-Employee safety and health-Stress in work place.

Unit – 5

Engineering Psychology
Introduction-Time and Motion Analysis-Man Machine Problem-Computers-Industrial
Robots.

Prescribed Book:

Duane P. Schutz, Sydney Ellen Schultz, Psychology and Industry Today

Books for study:

1. P.K. Ghosh, M.B. Ghorpade, Industrial Psychology.


2. Thomas W, I larrel, Industrial Psychology
3. M.K. Blum and J.C. Naylor, Industrial Psychology – it’s theoretical and Social
foundations.

198
14. M.A. DEGREE COURSE IN POLITICAL SCIENCE
SYLLABUS

THIRD SEMESTER

CORE 9 - ISSUES IN INDIAN POLITICAL THOUGHT

Unit I

Nature and context of Modern Political Thought in India --Origins of various Social
Reform Movements in India, Arya Samaj, Brahma Samaj- Colonialism, Caste, Order and
Politics and Religion

Unit II

Nationalism- Spiritual Nationalism (Aurobindo) Vivekannada, Militant Nationalism –


Extremism—Balagangadhar Tilak--- Revolutionary Nationalism

Liberalism- Gokhale- Constitutionalism Democracy --Dr. B.R.Ambedkar

Unit III

Socialism – Democratic Socialism ---Radical Humanism: Rammanohar Lohia,


Jawaharlal Nehru, M. N. Roy

Social revolution – Social Change – Secularism: Jyotirao Phuley, E.V. Ramasamy


Naicker, B.R.Ambedkar

Unit IV

Gandhism – Truth and non-violence – Satyagraha – Swaraj – Trusteeship

Unit V

Sarvodaya, Total Revolution: Vinoba Bhave, Jayaprakash Narayan

Reference:

Mehta V.R. & Thomas Pantham (eds) Political Thought Ideas in Modern India: Thematic
Explorations, New Delhi, Sage 2006

Rodriguez, V (ed) The essential writings of B.R.Ambedkar, New Delhi OUP 2002

Parikh, Bhikhu, Gandhi’s Political Philosophy New Delhi, Ajanta, 1995

V.R.Mehta, Indian Political Thought New Delhi, Manohar 1996

199
CORE 10 - RESEARCH METHODOLOGY

Unit – I Philosophical Foundations

Applied Philosophy – Epistemology – Metaphysics – Logic, Ethics and


Aesthetics – Philosophy of Science – Philosophy of Social Sciences – Social Science
Research – Quantitative studies, Qualitative studies and Interpretive studies.

Unit – II Research Problem

Classification of Quantitative studies Formulation of the research Problem-


Review of Literature – Research Design – Hypothesis – Null Hypothesis – Observation
Comparative Studies Cross sectional and Longitudinal – Theoretical framework.

Unit – III Data Collections

Secondary Sources – Print Sources – Non – Print Sources – Online and Internet
Resources – Archival Research – Databases and Abstracts, Primary Sources, Interviews,
Questionnaire, Field studies, Participative Methods – Errors in data collection

Unit – IV Data Analysis

Processing of data, Analysis of data, Descriptive Statistics and Probabilistic


Statistics, Data Processing and SPSS

Unit – V Presentation of Research Output

Writing the Report: a) for awarding Diplomas/Degrees/Certificates – Reporting


for Mass Media – Reporting for Peer view (Workshop, Seminar, Symposium,
Conference, Colloquium) – CAD and Multimedia – Power Point Presentation.
Presentation of the Report Language and style – Footnotes, Endnotes, Bibliography
Plagiarism and its consequences

Reference:

Kothari, C.R. Research Methodology: Methods and Techniques New Delhi: Vikas, 2004.

200
CORE 11 - HUMAN RIGHTS

Unit – I Introduction

Concept, meaning, nature of Human Rights – classifications of human rights –


approaches to human rights – Thesis of human rights – human rights and duties

Unit – II Development of Human Rights

UN Charter and human rights – Universal Declaration of Human Rights –


International government – International instruments – conventions – conferences &
protocol – UN Commission for Human Rights

Unit – III Human Rights in India

Indian Constitution & Human Rights – National Commission on Human Rights –


National Human Rights Commission – State Human Rights Commission – National
Commission or minorities, SC/ST & women

Unit –IV Issues in Human Rights

Violation of Women’s rights – Violation of child rights – Bonder labour –


injustice against marginalised and Dalits – problems of refugees and displaced persons –
Tortures

Unit – V Promotion of Human Rights

Role of Police – Administration & Intervention – Human right Courts – Role of NGOs–
Role of Media

Reference:
1. S. Subramanian, Human Rights: International challenges, Manas, Delhi.

2. V.R. Krishna Iyer, Dialectics & Dynamics of Human Rights, Eastern Law House

3. C.J. Nirmal(Ed) Human Rights in India, Oxford University, New Delhi

4. Ibohol Singh, Human Rights in India – Constitutional & Legal provisions,

vibher law

5. Vinod Sharma, Human Rights Violation, APH publisher, New Delhi

6. Ram Ahuja, Social Problems in India, Rautav publisher, New Delhi

201
7. Upendra Daxi, future of Human Rights in India, Oxford University publisher
ELECTIVE - 3

URBAN AND RURAL GOVERNMENTS IN INDIA

Unit – I

History of Local Government in India – Community Development Programme –


Balwantrai Mehta committee Report

Unit – II

Recent developments in the Panchayat Raj System – G.V.K. Rao Committee –


L.M. Singhvi committee – P.K. Thungan committee – Panchayat Raj under Rajiv Gandhi
– 73rd Constitutional Amendment Act (Role and functions of Rural Local Government)

Unit – III

Emerging Trends of urbanization in India – the 74th Constitutional Amendment


Act and Urban Government – Municipal Corporation – Municipal Council – Cantonment
Board – Township – Town Planning.

Unit – IV

Personnel Administration in Rural Local Government – Personnel Administration


in Urban Government – Finances of Rural Local Government – Finances of Urban
Government.

Unit – V

Role of women in local government administration – Role of political parties and


elections in rural-urban government – Right to Information and transparency in rural-
urban governments.

Reference:

1. Maheswari S.R. – Local Government in India, Lakshmi Narain Agarwal, Agra,


2006.

2. Joshi R.P. and Narwani G.S. Panchayat Raj in India, Rawat Publication, Jaipur,
2005.

202
ELECTIVE -4
GLOBALISATION AND POLITICAL DEVELOPMENT

Unit – I

Implications of globalization for state power, security, culture and governance.


Diffusion of globalization and its causes

Unit II

Actors and agenda --- Role of ideas, interests and institutions in the adjustment to
globalization -- Political movements, issues of governance -- Creation of new multilateral
institutions like WTO

Unit III

Nature of economic strategy in India that preceded globalization -- spread of neo – liberal
economic orthodoxy-- The shift to economic liberalization and stimulus for it --
Nature and development of globalization and India’s experience with it --- Impact on
India’s economy, society and polity

Unit IV

Contesting globalization: anti- globalization movements, challenges, responses and risks


of globalization, Strategies, politics and ideas that shape and constrain globalization
conflicts and the consequences of globalization

Unit V

The future of democracy, Transformation of state sovereignty -- Future role of states and
inter governmental organizations and the evolution of non – territorial forms of
nationalism, nature and evolution of the ideas of sovereignty, New forms of global
governance

Reference:

Nayar, Baldev Raj (ed): Globalization and Politics in India, Delhi, 2007.

Lane, Jan – Erick: Globalization and Politics, Ashgate, 2006

203
IV SEMESTER

CORE 12 -CONTEMPORARY POLITICAL THINKERS

Unit I:

Introductory survey of contemporary analytic, normative and critical political theory with
a focus on Marxism, communitarianism, Feminism, Liberal equality and Green Political
Theory.

Unit II:

Gramsci’s political themes such as hegemony, the distinction between political society
and civil society and historic block and his influence on the left thinking

Unit III:

Hannah Arendt’s thoughts on totalitatarianism, Revolution and Human condition

Unit IV:

John Rawls’s Perspectives on Justice and political liberalism

Unit V:

Habermas’s development of the concept and theory of communicative reason, his defence
of modernity and civil society

Books for reading:

1. Kymlica, W Contemporary Political Philosophy: An Introduction

2. Parikh Bhikhu, 1982, Contemporary Political Thinkers, Oxford, Martin


Robertson Political Thought, Cambridge University Press

3. Benewick Robert and Philip Green (ed.), 1998, The Rutledge Dictionary
of Twentieth-Century Political Thinkers, London, rout ledge

4. Ball Terence and Richard Bellamy (ed.), 2003, The Cambridge History of
Twentieth Century

5. Adams Ian and R.W.Dyson,2004, Fifty Great Political Thinkers, London, Rout
ledge

6. Trivey Leonard and Anthony Wright ,1992, Political Thought Since 1945,
Aldershot, Edward Elgar

204
CORE 13 - STATE POLITICS IN INDIA

Unit I
Significance of the study of state politics --- Diversity and complexity of politics in
Indian states -- Salient features of state politics ---- Socio-economic determinants of state
politics –emerging trends in state politics

Unit II

Leadership in states – Elections in Indian states and Coalition and Minority governments
in states

Unit III

Impact of national politics on state politics – Growth if regional political parties and their
linkages with national parties and the federal setup, Issues of autonomy and
decentralization -- Identity Politics in states

Unit IV
Caste and politics – Religion, politics and violence –communal violence

Unit V
Economic Reforms and India’s economic future--- The politics of ongoing economic
transformation --- Welfarism and Development debates- Relations of the state
government with local governments

Books Recommended for Study

B. Arora and D. V. Verney (eds.) Multiple identities in a single state, Indian Federalism
in a Comparative Perspective, Delhi. Konark, 1995.
G. Austin, Working a Democratic Constitution: The Indian Experience, Delhi, Oxford
University Press, 2000
M. Chandda Ethnicity, Security and Separatism in India, Delhi, Oxford University Press,
1997.
P. Chatterjee (ed.) State and Politics in India, Delhi, Oxford University, Press 1997.
R. Chatterjee (ed.) Politics in India: The State - Society Interface, New Delhi, South
Asian Publishers, 2001.
Z. Hasan, Politics and State in India, New Delhi, sage, 2000.
A. Kohli, Democracy and Discontent: India's Growing crisis of Govern ability,
Cambridge, Cambridge University Press, 1991.
......., (ed.) the success of Indian democracy, Cambridge, Cambridge University Press,
2001.
S. Pai, State Politics: New dimensions: party system, Liberalization and politics of
Identity, Delhi, 2000.
L. Saez, Federalism without a Center: The impact of political and economic reform on
Indian system, New Delhi, sage 2002

205
CORE 14 – PROJECT

ELECTIVE-5
TRADITIONAL AND NON-TRADITIONAL SECURITY

Unit I

Actors- Role of the states -How the threats affect inter state relations—Security threats to
society –Kinds and historical developments

Unit II
Non – traditional threats:

Human security: “Freedom from want”(Economic) “Freedom from fear” (Political and
Human rights) from state to individual as a unit

Unit III

Environment: degradation, struggle for resources (Energy, Water), Migration and human
trafficking organized crime, Epidemics, Natural Disasters

Unit IV

Linkage to traditional security, Non state actors (organized crime and NGOs), Interplay
of traditional and non – traditional security threats

Unit V

Barry Burzan and Amartya Sen’s Perspectives on Human Security

References:
1. Farah Faizal and Swarna Rajagopalan (editors)Women, Security, South Asia - A
Clearing in the Thicket, Sage Publications, 2005
2. Sen, Amarthya K, Development as Freedom Oxford London ,1999
3. Graham and N. Poku: Migration, Globalisation and Human Security, London,
Routledge, 2000
4. Burzan Barry, Old Weaven and Japp de Wilde Security: A New Frame Work for
Analysis, Boulder: Lynee Reinner, 1997

206
15. M.A. DEGREE COURSE IN PUBLIC ADMINISTRATION
SYLLABUS

THIRD SMESTER

CORE 9 - HUMAN RIGHTS IN INDIA

Unit – I- Introduction

Origin, nature and scope of Human Rights – Theories of human Rights –


Classification of Human Rights – Human Rights and Duties.

Unit- II- Indian Constitution and Human Rights

Preamble – Fundamental Rights – Constitutional Remedies of Human Rights


Violation- Directive Principles of State Policy

Unit-III-Administration of Human Rights

United Nations Charter and Human Rights – Universal Declaration of Human


Rights (UDHR)-National Commission on Human Rights – State Human Rights
Commission- Human Rights Courts

Unit- IV- Issues in Human Rights

Right to Dissent –Communal Violence in India- Violation of Women’s Rights -


Violation of Child Rights – Female Infanticide- Refugees and Displaced Persons -
Bonded Labour – Under trials and Presence – Suspension of Human Rights
during. Emergency – (UNHCR)

Unit- V-Promotion of Human Rights

Human Rights and Media- Human Rights and Voluntary Organizations in India
-Promotion of Human Rights – Challenges of Human Rights – Human Rights
and Global Perspectives-Human Rights in New era.

Reference:
1. Dr.S.Mehartaj Begum, (2000) Human Rights in India- Issues and Perspective,
APH Publishing Corporation , New Delhi.
2. P.L.Mehta and Neena Verma, (1999) Human Rights Under Indian Consitution,
Deep & Deep Publications, New Delhi.
3. Vinod Sharma, (2002) Human Rights Violation – A Global Phenomenon, APH
Publication, New Delhi.
4. Dr. (Mrs.) Sivagami Paramasivam,(1998) Human Rights – A Study, Sriram
Computer Prints and Offset, Salem (Tamil Nadu)

207
CORE 10 - RESEARCH METHODOLOGY

Unit – I
Scientific Research – Aims, Characteristics; Types and Methods of Scientific
research – Aims of social research.

Unit – II
Concept, Constructs, Variables, Hypothesis – Types, functions

Unit – III
Research design – Selection of research topic – characteristics of good research
design – sampling

Unit – IV
Techniques of data collection – Questionnaire interview, schedule, observation,
case study, content analysis.

Unit – V
Data processing and Analysis – Report writing – Comparison of mean, median,
mode.

Reference:

1. Good and Hatt, Social Science Research Methods

2. Johnson and Joslyn – Research methods in Political Science

3. Kothari Research Methodology

4. Wilkinson and Bhandarkar – Methodology and Techniques of Social research

Himalaya Publishing co, New Delhi, 1993.

CORE 11- GENDER AND PUBLIC ADMINISTRATION

Unit I

Status, Power, Leadership, Legitimacy and Change-


Gender inequalities in earnings and employment,

Unit II

Policies toward families, Gender and development, Gender based analysis, Glass Ceiling

208
Unit III
Strategies that have influenced policies, Women’s historical progress as public
employees.

Unit IV
Status of women employees in federal, State and local governments, Leadership

Unit V
Gender responsive budgeting- Mainstreaming Gender in organizations and budgeting

Reference:
Gender Images in Public Administration Strivers, Camilla Policy, Sage, Politics 2002 and
Gender Staudt, Kathleen, Kumarian Press, 1998.

CORE 12 - INTERNATIONAL ORGANISATION AND ADMINISTRATION

Unit I
Global Governance and Institutions in a changing world - Promises of international
institutions

Unit II
Theories of international organizations: Realist, Power based theories, Liberal
institutional theories, and Organizational theories

Unit III
Pathologies of International Organisations- Non-State actors in Global governance

Unit IV
Global Financial Institutions – IMF, World Bank; Regional and Multilateral Trade
Institutions- WTO

Unit V
International Environmental Institutions- Environmental Regulations and issues and
problems

Reference:

Margaret Karns and Karen Mingst.2004. International Organizations: The Politics and
Process of Global Governance. Boulder: Lynne Reinner Publishers. ISBN: 1555879632

Lisa Martin and Beth Simmons .2001.International Institutions: An International


Organization Reader. Cambridge: MIT Press. ISBN: 0262632233.

209
ELECTIVE -3
URBAN MANAGEMENT IN INDIA

Unit I
Urbanization Trends and Development-- Planning and Management of cities: Role of
Government

Unit II
Basic Services: Nutrition, Health, Education, Water/ Sanitation, Housing

Unit III
Role of markets in financing cities; cities and the new economy,
Land ceiling Act, Development authorities. Rent controls, Housing Boards, Pollution and
Waste Management

Unit IV
Urban Poverty: - Issues and approaches, Management of urban services- Raising finances
for urban local bodies

Unit V
Urban water management – urban environmental management - Community participation
in management

Reference:

1. S.L.Goel, Urban development and Management, Manohar


2. Kulwant Singh and Steinberg, Florian, Urban India in Crisis , New Age International
New Delhi, 1996.

FOURTH SEMESTER

CORE 13 - POLICE ADMINISTRATION


Unit – I

Nature, scope and importance of police administration – Evolution of police


administration – Approaches to police administration

Unit – II

Central police system – Armed, unarmed and auxiliary in police administration –


Role of Home ministry in police administration – state police system – District police –
police in union territories – women police

210
Unit – III

Police Recruitment – Training – promotion and Retirement – pay and


compensation – Job enrichment – Autonomy and Accountability in police administration

Unit – IV

Police ethics and code of conduct (violence and cultural corruption) – police
reforms

Unit – V

Police and Judiciary – police and mass media – police and terrorism and
insurgency – police and Juvenile delinquency – police and economic crimes – police and
information technology

Refernce:

1. Aparna, S, Role of police in a changing society, APH publications, New Delhi, 1999.

2. Ghosh S.K. and Rustamju K.F. Encyclopedia of police in India. Vol I to IV

3. Girija Shah, Indian Police, Cosmo publication, New Delhi, 1986

4. James Vadakkumcheri, police and Delinquency in India, AT.H Publications,


New Delhi, 1996.

5. Mohan Rao, Police Personnel Management, Anmol publications, New Delhi

6. Srivatsav, Indian Police Law and Reality, Manas publications, New Delhi, 1997.

7. Ramakkant, Police Administration, Amson publications, New Delhi, 1990.

CORE 14- NEW PUBLIC MANAGEMENT AND GOVERNANCE

Unit I

Core themes and features of New Public Management --- Managerialism -- Is


Managerialism ideological? How has Managerialism affected the public sector ---
Inherent tensions of New Public Management --- Difference between `new' Public
Management and `old' Public Administration

211
Unit II

Strategic management in public sector --- Barriers for effective strategic management --
scope of competition and markets --- Introduction of competition in Public services ---
changes marketing brought to public sector – how far markets replaced hierarchies

Unit III

Performance indicators and Performance Measurement --Management in public sector


organizations --- Performance Evaluation—Quality management in public sector-
What are performance indicators and measures? Why measure and evaluate
performance? Limitations of performance evaluation

Unit IV

Reasons for contractualisation -- contracting mechanisms --- Long term and short term
contracts---- Variety of roles of government in contracting regimes

Unit V

Governance and Government – Networking with stakeholders and engaging with citizens
and stakeholders

Reference:
Hughes, O.E., Public Management and Administration, Macmillan, London,. 1998

Lane, Jan-Erik New Public Management, Rout ledge, London, 2000

Bovaird, Tony and Loffler, Elke (eds) Public Management and Governance, Rout ledge,
London, 2003

PROJECT

212
ELECTIVE- 4

ISSUES OF DISINVESTMENT AND PUBLIC SECTOR UNDERTAKINGS IN


INDIA

Unit I

Public Enterprises in India: Its Importance and Development in Indian Economy


---Concept of Public Enterprises - Genesis and Growth of PEs --Development of PEs
During Plan Period - Government Policy on PEs - Rationale and Importance of PEs in
India

Unit II

Public Enterprises at the state level : Kinds of Public Enterprises that emerged, Types of
Public Enterprises organizations – Working of Public Enterprises – Efficacy of Public
Enterprises

Unit III

Human Resource Management in PEs- Recruitment- Training- Compensation- State level


Public Enterprises

Unit IV

Economic development, Financial performance of public Enterprises; Accountability


issues, Parliamentary control over public enterprises in India,

Unit V

The effects of ownership and competition on efficiency; Liberalisation and Privatisation,


Rationale and methods of Privatisation- Disinvestment in India, Policy, Procedure,
proceeds, performance of disinveted public enterprises in India

Reference:

1. Naib, Sudhir, Disinvetment in India, Sage, 2004

2. Yadav, B.S. & Aggarwal, Poonam, Disinvestment of Public Sector Enterprises in


India, Eastern, Delhi, 2006

3. Mathur, Vibha Disinvestment of Public Sector Enterprises in India: Policies and


Challenges, New Century Publications, 2004
4. Health, John Public Enterprise at the crossword.Essays in Honour of V.V.
Ramanatham, Routledge, 1990, London

213
16. M.A. DEGREE COURSE IN PUBLIC RELATIONS
SYLLABUS

THIRD SEMESTER

Core 9 - Communication Research Methods


Unit 1: Fundamentals of Social Research
Knowledge, Paradigms, role of theory in research
Unit 2: Varieties of Research Designs-
Survey, Experimental, Textual methods-Applications (e.g. Opinion Polls)
Unit 3: Social Measurement
Guidelines for Questionnaire Design
Unit 4: Basic Statistical Techniques
Application of statistical models for social research
Unit 5: Data Analysis
Strategies for Data Analysis and Interpretation-Data Presentation Graphs
References
Communication Research: Strategies and Sources Rebecca B. Rubin (Author), Alan M.
Rubin (Author), Linda J. Piele (Author)

Core 10 - Media Skills II: PR Writing(Practical)


Unit 1: Theoretical Influences- Leal, Ethical, Cultural Influences on Writing
Unit 2: Message Design, Audience Analysis, Background Research
Unit 3: PR Writing-Forms, Structure and Style, Flow-different media
Unit 4: Features, Newsletters, Annual Reports, Press Releases
Unit 5: PR Writing Exercises-Drills

Core 11 - Corporate Communication


Unit 1: Fundamentals of Corporate Communication (CC),
Functions of corporate communication, Leadership
Unit 2: Tools and Techniques
Guidelines for Corporate Communication (Annual Reports), Audit, Image Audit
Unit 3: Corporate Communication a
Role of Human Resource Management in PR
Unit 4: Crisis Communication-
Stages and Process-Reputation Management
Unit 5: Investor-Mergers, Acquisitions-CC

References
Treadwell,Donald and Tredwell, Jill (2005).Public Relations Writing. Sage Pubication

214
Elective- 5

Entertainment & Society

Unit 1: Entertainment Definition-


Characteristics of Mass Mediated Entertainment
Unit 2: Perspectives on Entertainment
Pleasure Principle, Narrative Theory, Dramatic Theory
Unit 3: Understanding Entertainment Audiences-
Audience analysis, choices and characteristics
Unit 4: Media Effects
Cultivation/Cultural Effects), News as Entertainment
Unit 5: Business of Entertainment
Markets, Trends, Regulations, Interactive Media
References
Sayre,Shay and King, Cynthia (2003) Entertainment and Society. Audiences, Trends, and
Impacts. Sage Publication
Elective- 6

Community Relations

Unit 1: Role of Public Relations in Community Developments


Definitiions and Functions of Community Relations and Community development
Unit 2: Corporate Social Responsibility,
Need for CSR. Difference between CSR and Cause Related Marketing, Cases studies
Unit 3: Public Relations in Non-government Organizations
PR& NGOs-Media Advocacy, Fund Raising and Media Relations
Unit 4: Strategies for Community Relation building
Participatory Approaches, Community Involvement, Tools and Techniques
Unit 5: Media Advocacy-Case Studies (E.g Health Campaign)
Case Studies of NGO-Relations-Health Communication and Awarness Campaigns

References

Kumar, Smessh (2002) Methods of Community Participation.A Complete Guide to


Practioners Vistaar Publication
Mikkelsen, Birtha(1995).Methods for Development Work and Research.A Guide for
Practioners.Sage Publicatiuon

Soft Skills

Internship

215
FOURTH SEMESTER

Core 12- Media Planning and Budgeting


Unit 1: Scope of Media Planning
Marketing Strategy and Media Planning
Unit 2: Steps in Media planning-
Relationship between media, advertising and consumers
Unit 3: Basic Measurement
Media Planning Metrices-Audience Measurement (Frequency Reach, share etc.)
Unit 4: Strategic Media Planning
Principles and Practices of Strategic media planning in a competitive, multimedia
enviornment
Unit 5: Case Studies and Exercises
Evaluation, Analysis of Media Data, Campaign Development
References
Sisdors and Bumba. Advertising Media Planning (1995). NTC Business Books

Core 13- Advanced Public Relations


Unit 1: PR Organization,
Department, Client-Relationship- PR Business Enviornment
Unit 2: Human Resource Management
PR-Labor Relations-Public and Pivate Sector parternerships
Unit 3: Crisis Communication-Case Studies
Stages of Crisis and Role ofCommunication-Issues in Crisis Communicaiton
Unit 4: New Media
Online media as a public relations tool-Applications and Assessments
Unit 5: Media Advocacy-Ethical Issues-PR and Society
Internal Research, Social Issues Integration, international PR
References
Moss and DeSanto (2002).Public Relations Cases. International Perspective. Routledge

Core 14 - Research Project Work

Core 15 - Media Skills III: Event Management/ PR Campaign (Practical)


Unit 1: Elements of Public Relations Campaign
Unit 2: Steps and Process of Event Management
Unit 3: Organizing, Scheduling, Operational Issues
Unit 4: Media Relations (Press Conferences)
Unit 5: Evaluation of the Campaign
Specialization (Practical)

216
Elective – 7

Media Management &Economics


Unit 1: Media Management Context and Media Organizations
Media Business in India. Issues, Trends and Challenges
Unit 2: Media Market Analysis
Media Market Analysis-Readership and Audience Segmentation
Unit 3: Marketing
Strategies for Media Selling, Media Planning
Unit 4: Cost Structure and Revenue Models
Economics of Media-Newspapers, TV. Industrial Organizational Model
Unit 5: Cases and Exercises
Case Studies in Media Management
References
Lavine, John M and Daniel B. Wackman. (1988) Managing Media Organizations:
Effective Leadership of the Media. Longman. New York
Kothari Gulab, Newspaper Management In India. (Intercultural Open University, The
Netherland's,1995)

Soft Skills

217
17.M.A. DEGREE COURSE IN SANSKRIT

SYLLABUS

Paper XI – Grammar – I
Text Prescribed: (i) Madhya Siddhanta Kaumudi – Samjna, Sandhi,
Karaka, Ajanta Pullinga

Unit I - Samjna
Unit II - Ac sandhi- visarga Sandhi
Unit III - Hal Sandhi
Unit IV - Karaka
Unit V - Ajanta Pullinga

Paper XII – Introduction to Darsanas –II

Text Prescribed : Yogasutra of Patanjali; Adhyaya 1

Unit I - Yoga Sutra Adhy. 1. Sutra 1 to 6


Unit II - Yoga Sutra Adhy. 1. Sutra 7 to 20
Unit III - Yoga Sutra Adhy. 1. Sutra 21 to 32
Unit IV - Yoga Sutra Adhy. 1. Sutra 33 to 42
Unit V - Yoga Sutra Adhy. 1. Sutra 43 to the end.

PaperXIII - Campu

Text Prescribed : Visvagunadarsa Campu of Venkatadhvarin. Portion verse26 to 380.


Pub: Chowkhamba Vidyabhavan, Varanasi, 2004.

Unit I -Text – Initial Portion i


Unit II -Text – initial portion ii
Unit III -Text – Middle portion i
Unit IV -Text – Middle portion ii
Unit V -Text – end portion i & ii

Elective I – Special I- Paper I-

See attachment
Elective II Special II- Paper I

See attachment

218
FOURTH SEMESTER

Paper XIV – Grammar - II


Text Prescribed : (i) Madhya Siddhanta Kaumudi – bhu, edh,
lakarartha, krt (Krtya), taddhita (Saisika &
Svarthika), samasa up to the end of Dvandva

Unit I - bhu, edh & lakarartha


Unit II - krt,
Unit III - taddhita
Unit IV - samasa- Avyayi Bhava , Tatpurusha
Unit V - Bahuvrihi - Dvanta

Elective V – Modern literature in Sanskrit


Text : Anarkali by Dr.V.Raghavan Acts – I to V

Unit I - Intrduction to Morden literature


Unit II - Acts 1 &2
Unit III - Act 3
Unit IV - Act 4
Unit V - Act 5

Paper XV – Indian Logic


Text : Tarka Sangraha Dipika by Annam Bhatta

Unit I - Introduction
Unit II - up to buddhi Section.
Unit III - Pratyaksha
Unit IV - Anumana Section
Unit V - from upamana to the end.

Elective 3 – Special I- Paper II-

See attachment

Elective 4 - Special II- Paper II

See attachment

219
Extra Disciplinary : Paper II Indian Philosophical classics
Text : Gouda pada Karika Prakarana One and two

Unit I : Introduction
Unit II : first Adyaya first half
Unit III First Adhyaya second half
Unit IV: Second Adhyaya First half
Unit V : Second Adhyaya Second Half

Special Papers Attachement

1. Vedanta

Paper I (3 Credits) :
Prescribed Text : Vedanta Paribhasa of Dharmaraja Adhvarin
Paper II (3 Credits):
Prescribed Text : (1) Yatindramatadipika of Srinivasadasa
(2) Pramanalakshna and Mayavadakhandana of
Anandatirtha

2. Alamkara
Paper I :
Prescribed Text : Dhvanyaloka (Adhys. 1, 2& 4 only)
Paper II:
Prescribed Text : Rasagangadhara First anana up to end of Santarasa
discussion

3. Vyakarana
Paper I (3 Credits) :
Prescribed Text : Siddhanta Kaumudi of Bhattoji Diksita
(Samjna, Paribhasa, Sandhi & Karaka only)
Paper II (3 Credits):
Prescribed Text : Mahabhasya of Patanjali (Ahnika 1-3)

4. Nyaya

Paper I (3 Credits) :
Prescribed Text : Nyayabhasya of Vatsyayana, Ch. 1 and 2

Paper II (3 Credits):
Prescribed Text : Siddhanta Muktavali of Visvanathanyayapancanana
(Pratyaksha and Anumana Only)

220
18. M.A. DEGREE COURSE IN SOCIOLOGY
SYLLABUS

THIRD SEMESTER

CORE 9 - RURAL SOCIOLOGY

Unit – I Introduction

• Characteristics of Agrarian and Peasant Society


• Habitat and Settlement in Rural Society
• Caste and Religion in Rural Society
• Family in Society

Unit –II: Agrarian Structure and Change

• Socio-Economic inequality
• Land reforms and social change
• Green revolution and social change

Unit-III: Planned Change for Rural Society

• Panchayati Raj and Local Self Government


• Community Development Programmes
• Rural Development Strategies

Unit – IV: Agrarian Movement

• Peasant Movements: Causes and Structure


• Farmer’s Associations
• Agricultural Labourers Associations

Unit – V: Problems of Rural Society


• Landless Labourers
• Rural Poverty and Rural Indebtedness
• Problem of Rural Industries and Rural Marketing
• Impact of CATT & WTO

References

1. Berch, Berberoguse, (1992) Class, State and Development in India 1,2,3 and 4
Chapters, Sage, New Delhi
2. Desai A.R., (19970, Rural Sociology in India, Popular Prakashan, Bombay
3. Mencher J.P., (1983), Social Anthropology of Peasantry Part III, OUP

221
4. P.Radhakrishnan, (1989), Peasant Struggles : Land Reforms and Social Change in
Malabar 1836-1982, Sage Publications, New Delhi
5. Thoner Daniel and Thoner Alice, (1962) Land and Labour in India, Asia Publications,
Bombay
6. Dhanagare D.N., (1988), Peasant Movement in India, OUP, New Delhi

CORE 10 - SOCIOLOGY OF ORGANIZATION

Unit I Understanding organization


• Scope and purpose of organisation
• Forms of organsations- Formal, Informal, Tall and Flat organisations
• The emergence of large scale organizations

Unit II Theories and models of organisation


• Classical theory
• Resource dependency theory
• Institutional theory
• Economic theory
• Theory of Density-Dependent evolution
• Organizational equilibrium theory
• Models of organisation : Mechanistic, The organic and the contingency models

Unit III Dimensions of new organisation


• New economy and new organisation
• Continuity and change at work
• Corporations and culture

• Unit IV Organisational Dynamics


• Change and innovation
• Communication and leadership
• Stress, work and emotion
• Team building
• Identity work

Unit V Organisational analysis


• Methods and levels of organizational analysis
• Organisational development, change and transformation

References:
1. Michael J.Handel. 2003.-The Sociology of organisations -Sage Publications,
NewDelhi
2. Paul Thompson and David Mchugh, 2002, –Work organizations -Palgrave,
Newyork

222
3. David Dunkerley, 1972--The study of organisation-Routledge &Kegan Paul Ltd,
London
4. Amitai Etzioni-Modern organisation, 1964 -Foundations of modern Sociology series,
Prentice Hall, New jersey
5. Michael Armstrong,2005 -Human resource management Practice-Kogan Page,
London
6. Organization: Structure. Process and out come- Richard .H.Hall
7. Organisation Theory: Modern, Symbolic and Post modern Perspectives- Mary Jo
Hatch, Oxford University Press
****

CORE 11 - INDIAN SOCIAL PROBLEMS

Unit- I: Introduction
The Concept of Social Problem- Characteristics of Social Problems- Causes of
Social Problems- Types of Social Problems- Methods of Studying Social
Problems

Unit-II: Poverty and Unemployment


The Concept- Incidence and Magnitude- Causes of Rural Poverty- Problem of the
Poor and the Pains of Poverty- Strategies for Alleviating Poverty.
Present Features of Unemployment in India- Types- Causes – Consequences.

Unit-III: Child Abuse and Child Labour


Child Population and the Working Children- Concept and Types of Child Abuse -
Incidence of Child Abuse- Causes of Child Abuse - Problem of Child Labour.

Unit- IV: Violence against Women


Women’s Harassment- Nature, Extent and Characteristics of Violence Against
Women- Violence Against Widows- Victims of Violence- Types of Violence-
Motivation in Violence.

Unit-V: Terrorism
The Concept- Characteristics- Objectives- Origin and Development- Perspectives-
Mass Support- Support Base – Terrorism in India – Terrorism in other Countries.

References:

 Ahuja Ram, Crime against Women, Rawat Publications, Jaipur, 1987.


 Attachand, Poverty and Underdevelopment, Gian Publishing House, Delhi, 1987.
 Prasad, Population Growth and Child Labour, Kanishka Publishers distributors,
New Delhi, 2001.

223
 Bhattacharya, S.K., Social Problems in India, Regency Publications, New Delhi,
1994.
 Kattakayam and Vadackumchery, Crime and Society, A.P.H, Publishing
Corporation, New Delhi, 1999.
 Kohli and Sharma, Poverty Alleviation and Housing Problem, Anmol
Publications, Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi, 1997
 Kempe, R.S and Kempe C.H., Child Abuse, Fontana, London, 1978.

****

CORE 12 - SOCIOLOGY OF HEALTH

Unit-I: Introduction
Concept of health- Scope and importance of Sociology of Health. Development of
Medical Sociology and Social Medicine in the West and in India. The emerging
relationship between medicine and sociology- Dimensions of health.

Unit-II: Sociological Perspectives on Health


The Sick role- Illness as lived experience- social structure, health and disease –
social and psychological factors in health and illness- Parsons’role theory and
health interaction.
Social context of health: Community health, Relevance of sex education, the
contribution of sociology to social policy.

Unit-III: Social Epidemiology


Epidemiological approach to health, Socio-Cultural factors bearing on health in
India. Common occupational diseases and prevention of occupational diseases.
Preventive and protective hygienic habits.
Infectious and Physical Deficient Diseases:
A) Tuberculosis, Malaria, B) Heart diseases, diabetes, obesity.

Unit-IV: Health Professionals and Health Care Organizations


Professional qualities of physician- Professionalization of physician. Doctor–
Patient relationship- Role of nurse in health care- Hospital as a social
organization. Structure and function of a hospital. Medical social service in a
hospital.

Unit-V: Health Planning in India


Health policy and five year plans, Health infrastructure in India- National Health
programmes. Implementation of Health Programmes and their effectiveness.
Role of International Organization- WHO and other UN Agencies.

224
TEXT BOOKS:

1. Cockerham, William, C. Medical Sociology (Ninth Edition), Pearson


Prentice Hall, New Jersey, 2003.
2. Cockerham, William, C. Readings in Medical Sociology, Prentice Hall,
New Jersey, 1997.
3. Park K. Text Book of Preventive and Social Medicine, M/S, Banarsidas
Bhanot Publishers, Jabalpur, 2000.

REFERENCES

 Anne, Marie Barry and Chris Yuill, Understanding Health- A Sociological


Introduction, Sage Publications, New Delhi, 2002.
 Blaxter Mildred., Health, Polity Press,Cambridge, UK, 2004.
 Bury, Michael and Jonathan Gabe, et. al., The Sociology of Health and Illness- A
Reader, Routledge Publication, U.K, 2003.
 Conrad, Peter et.at., Handbook of Medical Sociology, Prentice Hall, New
Jersey,2000.
 DAK T.M. Sociology of Health in India, Kaveri Printers Private Ltd., New
Delhi, 1991.
 Eugene B. Gallagher and Janardan Subedi, Global Perspectives on Health Care,
Prentice Hall, New Jercy, 1995.
 Graham Scombler Sociological theory and Medical Sociology, Tavistock
Publications: London and New York, 1987.
 Kevin White, An Introduction to the Sociology of Health and Illness, Sage
Publicatoins, New Delhi, 2002.
 Madhu Nagla, Medical Sociology, printwell publishers, Jaipur, 1988.
 Rajiv Misra et al., India Health Report, Oxford University Press, New Delhi,
2003.
****
ELECTIVE II
INDIAN SOCIETY

Unit- I: Approaches to the study of Indian Society


• Indological Approach
• Structural Functional Approach
• Dialectical Approach
• Subaltern Approach

Unit-II: Characteristics of Indian Society


• Caste System: Structure- Changing trends in Caste –Caste Conflicts
• Joint Family System – Characteristics – Changing Scenario
• Village Organization: Physical- Social- Economic – Political Organization

225
• Social and Cultural Diversity in India

Unit- III: Colonial Context

• Colonial Ethnography and Fragmentary view of Society


• Imperial Gazetteer and Colonial Policy
• Colonial Legacy, Neo-Colonialism

Unit – IV: Postcolonial Context

• Indian Constitution
• Legislative History
• Social Legislation, Social Policy and Social Change

Unit – V: Current Debates


• Contextualisation
• Indigenization
• Text and Context
• Sociology for India

References

 Ahuja Ram., Indian Social System, Rawat Publication, Jaipur, 2002.


 Atal Yogesh, Indian Sociology- from where to where, Rawat Publication, New
Delhi, 2003.
 Beteille Andre, Caste, Class and Power: Changing Patterns of stratification in a
Tanjore Village, University of California Press, USA, 1965.
 Chandra Bipan et. al., India After Independence, Viking Penguin India
Publication, New Delhi, 1999.
 Desouza, P.R. (ed), Contemporary India, Sage Publication, New Delhi, 2000.
 Dhenagare D.N., Themes and Perspectives in Indian Sociology, Rawat
Publication, Jaipur, 1993.
 Dube S.C., Indian Society, National Book Trust, New Delhi, 1996.
 Dube S.C, The Indian Village, Routledge Publication, London, 1967.
 Dumont Louis., Homo Hierarchicus: The Caste System and its Implications,
Vikas Publication, New Delhi, 1970.
 Fadia B.L., Indian Government and Politics, Sahitya Bhawan Publications,
Agra,2000.
 Kashyap C. Subhash, Our Constitution- An Introduction to Indian Constitution
and Constitutional Law, National Book Trust, New Delhi, 2004.
 Mukherjee D.P., Diversities, People’s Publishing house, Delhi, 1958.
 Oommen T.K., and P.N. Mukherjee., (etd) Indian Sociolgy: Reflections and
Introspections, popular prakashan, Bombay, 1986.

226
 Singh Y., Indian Sociology: Social Conditioning and Emerging concerns, Vistaar,
Delhi, 1986.
 Singhi K. Narendra (etd)., Theory and Ideology in Indian Sociology, Rawat
Publication, New Delhi, 1996.
 Srinivas M.N., India’s Villages, Asia Publishing House, Bombay, 1960.
 Vani Prabhakar, Third World Sociology, Dominant Publisher and distributor,
New Delhi, 2003.
****

Elective – Extra Disciplinary

HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT

Unit- I: Introduction: Definition of Human Resource Management- Nature and Scope –


Evolution, Role and Status of Human Resource Management in India- Structure and
Function- Systems view of HRM- Vital importance of Human Resources in
Organizations.

Unit-II: Manpower Planning: Definition- Organization and Practice- Manpower


Planning – Techniques- Short- term and long term planning.

Unit-III: Recruitment, Selection & Placement: Definitions, Job Analysis –


Description- Job Specification- Selection process- Tests and Interviews- Placement and
Induction.

Unit-IV: Performance Appraisal: Definition – Purpose – Factors affecting Performance


Appraisal- Methods and Systems of Performance Appraisal – Counselling.

Unit-V: Training and Development: Definition- Need and importance- Assessment of


Training Needs- Training and Development of various categories of personnel.

Unit-VI: Workers’ Participation in Management: Meaning and Purpose of Workers’


Participation in Management- Effectiveness of Workers’ Participation.

Text Book:

1. Monappa, Arun, Personnel Management, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi.

References:
 Agarwal, R.D, Dynamics of Personal Management in India, Tata McGraw Hill,
Bombay,1973.
 Davis, Keith, Human Behaviour at Book, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 1983.
 March, J.G. (etd.), Handbook of Organizations, Chicago Rand McNally, 1965.

227
 Venkataretinam, C.S., Personal Management and Human Resources, Tata
McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 1990.

FOURTH SEMESTER

CORE 13 - NGOS AND DEVELOPMENT PRACTICE

Unit-I: Alternative Development:


• Concepts: Alternative Development- Grass Root Development,
Sustainable Development.
• Philosophy of Voluntary Service: Social Justice and Distributive Justice
• Social Action: Social Action and Social Activism- Objective of Social
Action

Unit-II: Voluntary Organization and Development Initiatives:


• Genesis and development of Voluntary Organizations & Types of NGOs
• NGOs as Catalysts of change and development
• Social action for social advocacy, policy formulation, enforcement of
social legislations, social empowerment and alleviation of social problems
• Internationalization of NGOs.

Unit- III: NGO Management:

• Social Entrepreneurship- Concept, Theories, Principles and Organization


• Structure of NGOs
• Governance and Accountability
• Organizing Development practice
• Assessing NGO Performance

Unit-IV: Project Management:

• Types of Development Projects


• Project Identification and project selection
• Fund Raising
• Project planning and project formulation
• Institution building and project implementation
• Project monitoring and evaluation
• Project documentation

Unit-V: Development Practices- Case Studies

• Poverty Alleviation

228
• Women and Development
• Health and Development
• Environmental Protection and Natural Resource Management

REFERENCES:

 Bhose S.G.R Joel., NGOs and Rural Development, Theory and Practice, Concept
Publising Company, New Delhi, 2003.
 Lewis David and Tina Wallace (etd), Development and NGO’s and the
Challenges of Change- New Roles and Relevance, Rawat Pub, Jaipur, 2003
 Lawani B.T., NGOs in Development, Rawat Pub, Jaipur, 1999
 Pawar S.N et.al, NGOs and Development, The Indian Scenario, Rawat Pub,
Jaipur, 2004
 Dharmarajan Shivani, NGOs As Prime Movers, Sectoral Action for Social
Development, Kanishka Publication and Distributions, New Delhi, 2001
 Edward Micheal and Alan Flower, NGO Management, Earth Pub, New Delhi,
2003
 Somesh Kumar, Methods for Community Participation, Sage Pub, New Delhi,
2002
 Bhatia Anju, Women’s Development and NGO’s, Rawat Pub, Jaipur, 2000
 Sen and Derez, The Amartya Sen & Jean Derez Omnibus, OUP, New Delhi, 1999
 Roa Mohan, (etd) Disinvesting in Health – The World Bank’s Perception for
Health, Sage Publication, New Delhi, 2001
 Baviskar, Anitha, In the Belly of the River, OUP, New Delhi, 1997.
****

CORE14- URBAN SOCIOLOGY

Unit – I: Introduction

• Classical Theories; Emile Durkheim, Karl Marx, Max Weber & Tonnies
• Urban Community and Spatial Dimensions: Park- Burgess, Mekenzie, Simmel,
Louis Wirth and Redfield

Unit – II: Urbanization in India

• Trends in Urbanization
• Factors of Urbanization
• Causes of Urbanization
• Consequences of Urbanization

Unit – III: Urban Centres

229
• Classification of Town, Cities and Metropolis
• Characteristics of Urban Society
• Urban Social Structure: Caste, Class, Family

Unit – IV: Urban Social Problem

• Urban Housing
• Slums
• Urban Crime
• Environmental Problems

Unit –V: Urban Management

• Urban and Regional Planning


• Urban Services
• Urban Development Programmes and Polices

REFERENCES:

1. Pickwance C.G (ed) 1976, Urban Sociology, Critical Essays, Methuen.


2. Saunders Peter, 1981, Social Theory and Urban Question, Hutchionson.
3. Bose Ashis, 1978, Studies in India Urbanization 1901-1971, Tata McGraw Hill,
Delhi.
4. Abrahimson M, 1976, Urban Sociology, Englewoot, Prentice Hall.
5. Ronnan, Paddison, 2001, Handbook of Urban Studies, Sage Publication, India.
6. Bharadwaj., R.K., 1974, Urban Development in India, National Pub House, New
Delhi.
7. Gold, Harry, 1982, Sociology of Urban Life, Prentice Hall, Englewood Cliff.
8. Alfred De Souza, 1979, The Indian City, Poverty, Ecology and Urban Development,
Mahonar, Delhi.
9. Desai A.R and Pillai S.D (ED) 1970, Slums and Urbanization, Popular Prakashan,
Bombay.
10. Ramachandran R, 1991, Urbanization and Urban Systems in India, OUP, Delhi.
11. Elllin Nan, 1996, Post-Modern Urbanism, Oxford, U.K.

****
ELECTIVE III
ORGANIZATIONAL BEHAVIOUR

Unit-I: Introduction
• Definition and types of organizations

230
• Theoretical approaches to the study of organization
• Classical organization theory – Bureaucracy – Scientific management
• Human relations approach (Hawthorne experient)
• Modern organizational theory- open systems approach and contingency approach

Unit-II: Organizational Behaviour


• Elements of Organizational behaviour systems
• Models of organizational behaviour: Autocratic- Custodial- Supportive- Collegial
model

Unit-III: Group Dynamics


• Formal and informal groups
• Nature of groups
• Group cohesiveness, group performance and Group norms

Unit-IV: Leadership
• Leadership style
• Types of leadership
• Leadership skills

Unit- V: Organizational Communication


• Inter personal communication
• Downward Communication
• Upward communication
• Interactive Communication

Text Books

Fred, Luthans (1989) Organizational Behaviour, McGraw Hill, International


Editions,New York.

Hugh, Arnold and Danial, Heldman (1989) Organizational Bahaviour

Keith, Davis and John Newstorm (1989), Human Behaviour at work: Organizational
Behaviour, McGraw Hill Book and Co., New York.

****

231
19. M.A. TOURISM AND TRAVEL MANAGEMENT
SYLLABUS

THIRD SEMESTER

PAPER IX - FRONT OFFICE MANAGEMENT

UNIT – I

The Lodging Industry – Hospitality Industry – Level of Service – Ownership and


Affiliation – Reasons of Traveling

UNIT – II
Hotel Organization – Organization Charts – Classify Functional Areas – Room
Division – Food and Beverage Division - Sales and Marketing Division – Account
Division – Engineering and Maintenance Division – Security Division – Human
Resource Division – Front Office Operations – Organization – Goal and Strategies – Job
Description – Job Specification.

UNIT – III
Front Office Operation - Guest Cycle – Front Office System – Front Office forms
– The Front Desk – Front Office Equipment – Telecommunication –Property
Management System – Reservation – Types of Reservation – Reservation Maintenance –
Reservation Report – Registration – Pre Registration – the Registration Record – Method
of Payment.

UNIT – IV
Front Office Responsibilities – Front Office Communication – Inter Departmental
Communication – Guest Service – Guest Relations – Front Office Security Functions -
Managing Human Resources – Recruiting – Selecting – Hiring – Skills Training.

UNIT – V
Front Office Accounting – Accounting Fundamentals – Creation and Maintenance
of Accounts – Internal Control – Settlement of Accounts – Concept of Revenue
Management.

Books for Reference:

Michael L Kesavana and Richard M Brooks, 2005, Front Office Procedures,


Educational Institutional American Hotel and Motel Association.
M.A. Khan, 2005, Front Office, Anmol Publication Pvt Ltd., New Delhi.

232
Ahmed Ismail, 2005, Front Office Operations and Management, Thomson Delmar
learning.

James A Bards, 2004, Hotel Front Office Management, Jhon wileg and Sons inc, New
Jersy
www.ftindia.com/frontoffice.htm Date: April 2006
www.fibrezfashion.com/jobs/office-administration-jobs.aspx Date: April 2006

PAPER X - HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT

UNIT - I
Introduction to Personnel Management and Objectives – Scope and Functions of
Personnel Management – Qualities of a good Personnel Manager

UNIT - II
Personnel Management in India – Origin and growth of Personnel Function –
Factors impending the growth of Personnel Management in India – Future of Personnel
Management in India
UNIT - III
Manpower Planning – Definition of Manpower Planning – Significance, Nature,
Need of Manpower Planning – Stages and steps in Manpower Planning – Objectives of
Human Resource planning – Advantages and disadvantages of Manpower Planning

UNIT - IV
Recruitment Sources – Merits, Demerits of Recruitment – Recruitment Policy –
Selection – Steps in Selection Procedure - Interview – Induction - Promotion - Transfer –
Training – Communication-Performance Appraisal

UNIT – V
Employee Morale-Management of Grievances- Compensation Management –
Methods of Wage Payment – Sound Wage Plan – Incentive Wage Plan – Types of
Incentive Plans – Factors influencing Wage Structure – Top Evaluation – Merit Rating –
Wage Regulations – National Wage Policy-Employee Safety-Industrial Health-Trade
Unions.
Books for Reference:
G.R.Krishna, P.G Aquinas, 2004, Personnel/Human Resource, Management: Authors
Press, Delhi.
C.B.Mamoria & S V Gankar, 2005, Personnel Management, Himalayan Publishing
House, Mumbai.

233
S.Gupta, 2004, Human Resource Development, Deep and Deep Publications Ltd,
Delhi.

S.K.Bhatia, 2004, International Human Resource Management, Deep


and Deep Publications Ltd, Delhi.
P.C.Tripathi, 2004, Personnel Management and Industrial Relation, Sultan Chand and
Sons, New Delhi.
L. M. Prasad, 2003,Human Resource Management, Sultan Chand and Sons, New
Delhi.
S. L. Goel, 2003, Personnel Management, Sultan Chand and Sons, New Delhi.

Arya P Pand Tandon B.B., 2004, Human Resource Development, Deep and Deep
Publications Ltd., Delhi.

Subbah Rao, 2004, Human Resource Management, Sultan Chand and Sons, New
Delhi.
www.indiainfoline.com/bisc/hrpg.htmt Date: April 2006

www.iimlac.in/faculty/rm.htm Date: April 2006

PAPER XI - RESEARCH METHODOLOGY

UNIT I

Introduction to Research Methodology – Meaning of Research – Objectives of


Research – Motivation in Research – Types of Research – Significance of Research –
Methodology, Criteria for Good Research

UNIT II
Research Design and Sampling Design – Meaning of Research Design – Need
for Research Design – Features of a good Design – Concepts relating to Research Design
– Developing Research Plan – Steps in Sampling Design – Characteristics of a Good
Sampling Design – Types of Sample Design

UNIT III
Data Collection – Collection of Primary Data – Collection of Data through
Questionnaires and Schedules – Collection of Secondary Data – Processing and Analysis
of Data – Sampling Fundamentals

234
UNIT IV

Testing of Hypothesis – What is Hypothesis? – Basic Concepts – Procedure for


Hypothesis – Tests of Hypothesis

UNIT V

Report Writing – Significance of Report Writing – Different Steps in Writing


Reports – Layout of Research Reports – Types of Reports – Oral Presentation –
Mechanics of Writing a Research Report – Role of a Computer in Research
Books for Reference:
C.R. Kothari, 1995, Research Methodology, Sultan Chand and Sons, New Delhi.
P.C. Tripathi, 1998, Research Methodology, Sultan Chand and Sons, New Delhi.
G N O. Prakash, Srivastava, 1997, Advanced Research Methodology, Sultan Chand and
sons, New Delhi.
Santosh Gupta, 1998, Research Methodology and Statistical Techniques, Deep and
Deep Publications, New Delhi.
Ganesh Pandey and Verma, 2000, Research Methodology, Deep and Deep Publications,
New Delhi.
Arya. P.P. and Y Pal, 2002, Research Methodology in Management, Deep and Deep
Publications, New Delhi.
www.nbcindia.com Date: April 2006
www.competition.commission.india.nicf.in/workshop/GR.Bhatia-173.06pdf
Date: April 2006

ELECTIVE III - MANAGEMENT INFORMATION SYSTEM IN


TOURISM

UNIT – I

Introduction - Concept – Role and Impact of MIS in Tourism Industry - Modern


Media Techniques – Internet and Tourism Industry - Computers in Cargo, Airlines,
Hotels and Railways. CRS - Galileo, Abascus – Amadeus

UNIT - II

Process of Management – MIS A Tool for Management Process – Basic Model


of Organisation Structure – MIS and Organisation

235
UNIT - III

Decision Making Concepts – MIS - Decision Support System – Characteristics


and Capabilities of DSS – Components of DSS

UNIT - IV

System Approach and MIS – Data Base Management System RDBMS

UNIT - V

Function Management, Marketing, Personnel, Production and Finance,


Information System

Books for References:

Gordon B Davis and Margrette H Olson, 2003, Management Information System,


Tata Mc Graw Hill Company.
Gerald V Post and David L Anderson, 2004, Management Information System, Tata
Mc Graw Hill Company.
Avdesh Gupta and Aurag Malik, 2006, Management Information System, Fire Wall
Media Publications.
Verma,.S.B., 2006, Information Technology and Management, Deep and Deep
Publication Delhi.
Goel, D.P.O., 2005, Management Information System-Concept and Applications,
Deep and Deep Publications, Delhi.
R.K. Subha, 1999, Leisure Tourism, Dominant Publishers and Distributors, Delhi.
Arnold O. Putnam, 2003, Management Information System.
www.educationforallinindia.com/page3.html Date: April 2006
www.som.iltkgp.ernet.in/faculty/debjani/Bayero1.pdf Date: April 2006

EDC II - COMMUNICATIVE SKILL IN FRENCH LANGUAGE - II

UNIT –VII
Suivez le guide…. Pages 111-126

236
UNIT - VIII
A La mode… Pages 127-144

UNIT - IX

Le cinema … pages 145-164

UNIT - X

D’hier a demain… pages 165-182

UNIT - XI

Les sports…. Pages 183-202


UNIT – XII
Un air de fete…. Pages 203-225

Books for Reference:

J.O. Courtillon, LIBRE ECHANGE-TOME 1-G D, de Salins,Hatier/Dider,Paris. 1995.


Rajeshwari Chandrasekar, RekhaHangal,Chitra Krishnan, Claude Le Ninan, Asha
Mokashi,Hachette Livres, A VOTRE SERVICE – TOME I, General Book Depot,
NewDelhi, 1999.
Apprenons le francais Mahita Ranjit,Monica Singh,Saraswathi House Pvt ltd ,New Delhi
2005.
La cle des champs ,I,R Geoffroy Dominique Lo Cascio,Marinie
Rivas,Larousse,Paris,1991.
Farandole,I C Le Hellaye,D Barzotti,Hatier/Didier,Paris 1992.
Mes premiers pas en francais,Mariette Barraud Hachette ,Paris 1990.

Pile Ou Face I,JeanneVassal,Cle International,Paris,1991.

237
FOURTH SEMESTER

PAPER XII - AIR TICKETING AND FARE CONSTRUCTION

UNIT - I

Civil Aviation in India - Air Transport: Airlines Abbreviations, Codes and


Definitions-Chicago Convention-Warsaw Convention – Aircraft and in-flight services –
Airport Facilities and Special Passengers – Automation- Baggage- International
Regulations-Bilateral Agreements –Travel Guides-Aviation Geography-IATA.

UNIT - II
Airfares and Ticketing-1: Arrangement of the Tariff Manuals-Guidelines for
International Tariff Rules – Terms and Definitions – Published Fares-Arrangement of
Foreign Currency-RBI Regulations and Formalities – Currency Regulations – Round and
Circle Trip Fares – Journeys in Different Classes – Special Fares – Discounted Fares –
Taxes –Ticketing Instructions – BSP Procedures – Stock Control and Security of
Accountable Documents.

UNIT - III

Airfares and Ticketing-2: Review of Basic Fare Construction Principles-General


Ticketing Instructions-MCO(Miscellaneous Charges Order)-PTA(Prepaid Ticket Advice)
– The Mileage System – Lowest Combination Principle – Round and Circle Trip Fares –
Journeys in Different Classes of Service – Around the World Fares – “Open Jaw”
Journeys – Special Fares – Re-routings – Collection of Fares.

UNIT - IV
Tour Programmes: Terms and Abbreviations – Types of Tours – How and why
Tours are Produced – Items included in a Tour Brochure – Booking Conditions –
Reservation Procedures.

UNIT - V
Travel Formalities: The Passport – Health Certificates – Taxes, Customs and
Currency – Travel Insurance-Credit Cards-Travel Freight Formalities-Travel Formalities
– General Preventive Measures – The Travel Information Manual (TIM) – Consequences
of Negligence.

238
Book for reference:

Guides to IATA/ UFTAA, Training Courses and Journals Published by International


Air Transport Association and Universal Federation of Travel Agent Association.
Jagmohan Negi, 2004, Air Travel Ticketing and Fare Construction, Kanishka
Publishers, NewDelhi.
Jagmohan Negi, 2004, International Tourism and Travel, S. Chand and Company Ltd,
NewDelhi.

PAPER XIII - ECO TOURISM

UNIT – I

Basic Principles of Tourism Ecology - Definition of Ecology – Five Basic Laws


of Ecology – Environment – Eco System – Basic Properties of Eco Systems and their
Relevance in the context of Tourism – Eco System Diversity – Habitat, Species,
Community – Cultural – Eco System – Absorbing Capacity – Carrying Capacity –
Stability – Dynamics – Multi-functionality, Integrity and Sustainability.

UNIT – II
Eco Tourism –Interaction of Ecology and Environment for Tourist activities –
Various Types of Eco Tourism - Eco Cultural Tourism, Health Tourism, Heritage
Tourism, Adventure Tourism - Farm Tourism – Angling (Fishing Tourism) and Water
Sports related Eco Tourism activities.

UNIT – III
Conservation of Ecology – Management of Eco Systems – Basic Principles, goals
and strategies with special emphasis on Tourism Codes of Conduct for different Stake -
holders - Ecological Planning – UN initiatives on Ecology and Environment – National
Policy on Ecology and Environment – Future Prospects and Policy Alternatives.

UNIT – IV
Introduction to Human Ecology – Tourism Geography – Pollution Ecology –
Energy Environment nexus – Non-equilibrium Ecology – Ecological Footprints
Ecological and Socio-Economic Indicators - Ecological Economics – Eco-Cultural
Tourism Adaptive/Sustainable Management of Eco System with special reference to
Tourism.

239
UNIT – V
Environmental Education and Legislation – Needs and Strategies with special
emphasis on Tourism – Suggestions for Long Term Sustainable Tourist activities – A
Critical Review of Tourist Policy and Eco Tourism Policy of India – Tourism Planning
and Implementation in India - Sustainable Tourism Planning for Ecologically Sensitive
Areas and Protected Areas - Methodology for Developing New Tourism Activities
without affecting existing Ecology and Environment.

Books for References :


David B. Weaver, 2005, The Encyclopedia of EcoTourism , Oxford University Press.

P.C. Sinha, 2005, The Encyclopedia of EcoTourism, Anmol Publications , NewDelhi

Prabhas Chandra, 2003, International Ecotourism, Environment Rules and


Regulation, Kanishka Publication,Delhi.

Prabhas Chandra, 2003, Global Ecotourism, Codes, Protocols and Charter, Kanishka
Publication,Delhi.

P.C. Sinha, 1998, Eco Tourism and Mass Tourism, Anmol Publications, New Delhi.

ELECTIVE IV - GLOBAL TOURISM - I

UNIT - I

International Tourism: Growth and Trends – Tourism and International Economy


– Tourism and International Understanding

UNIT - II

Tourism in Europe-Austria-Belgium-U.K - Denmark-France-Germany-Greece-


Ireland-Italy-Spain-Portugal-Norway-Sweden-Switzerland

UNIT - III
Tourism in USA-New / York-New / Jersy-Florida-California-San Fransisco-
Washington D.C - Hollywood-Chicago-Illinois-Hawaii-Miami-Niagara-Philadelphia-
Georgia-Texas-Important Landmarks in Latin America- Australia- New Zealand

UNIT - IV
Tourism in South East Asia: Singapore, Malaysia, Hong Kong, China, Japan

240
UNIT - V

Contemporary Issues in Global Tourism –Future of Global Tourism

Books for References :

Lonely Planet, 2005


Rough Guide, 2005.
Foder Explorer, 2005.
Let’s go Travel guide 2005-Europe
G.S. Badra, 2004, Globalisation and Marketing Management, Deep and Deep
Publications New Delhi.
www.google.com Date: April 2006
www.internationtourism.com Date: April 2006
www.searchengine.com Date: April 2006

ELECTIVE V - GLOBAL TOURISM - II

UNIT - I

Future of Global Tourism-Obstacles in Tourism-Tourism as a Great Economic


and Social Force-Travel, Trade, Fairs and Exhibitions

UNIT - II
Tourism in Pakistan-Bangladesh-Sri Lanka

UNIT - III
Tourism in South Africa and Middle East

UNIT - IV

Importance of Geography in Tourism-Natural and Climatic Regions of the World


in brief-Impact of Weather and Climate on Tourist Destinations.

UNIT - V

Global Tourism Geography-Map Reading-Latitude-Longtitude-International Data


Line-Time Zones-Calculation of Time-Time Difference-Variations-Standard Time.

241
Books for Reference:

Lonely Planet to Middle East, 2005.


Rough Guide, 2005.
Foder`s Explorer S.Africa, 2005.
Let`s Go Travel Guide, 2005
G.S. Badra, 2005, Globalisation and Marketing Management, Deep and Deep
Publications New Delhi.

www.google.com Date: April 2006


www.internationtourism.com Date: April 2006
www.searchengine.com Date: April 2006

PAPER XXI - PROJECT

_____________________

242
20. MASTER OF SOCIAL WORK (M.S.W)
SYLLABUS

THIRD SEMESTER

SPECIALIZATION – SOCIAL WORK WITH FAMILIES

Paper – XI – Social Work with Children Total Teaching Hours : 60

Objectives
To sensitize the students on the situation of children in India in the context of child
rights.
To develop an understanding of the policies, programmes and legal provisions for the
child.
To enhance understanding on the role of social work in the implementation of child
rights..

Unit I 15 hours
Concept of child rights, demographic profile of the child in India. Constitutional
safeguards for children in India, National Policy for Children, U.N. Charter on the Rights
of the Child. Situational analysis of the child in the context of child right to survival,
health, nutrition, education and protection. The status of the girl child in India and
programmes for the girl child. National Charter for Children 2004, National Plan of
Action 2005. Changing trends in working with children from charity to rights based
approach.

Unit II 15 hours
Health and Nutritional Services for the Child in India – the ICDS project, school health
programmes, health and nutrition programmes for the child Governmental and
nongovernmental programmes for children.
Educational Needs of the Child in India - alternatives to formal education, Sarva Siksha
Abhiyan, transit schools, non-formal education, vocational education.

Unit III 10 hours


Children in special circumstances: Overview of the problem of the destitute child,
delinquent child, street child – definition, nature, causes, prevention and services -
Institutional and non-institutional services, cottage system of care, SOS children’s
village, Governmental and Non Governmental programmes. Juvenile Justice system in
India. Role of Social Work with children in special circumstances.

Unit IV 10 hours
Socially exploited and oppressed children: Overview of the problem of Child Labour,
Child Abuse, Child Beggars, Child Prostitution, Child trafficking. Definition, Nature and
extent of the problem, causes and effects. National Child Labour Elimination Programme.
Child Labour Prohibition and Regulation Act (1986). National Commission for

243
Protection of Child Rights Act, Overview of the programmes for care and protection of
the child. Role of social work. with socially exploited and oppressed children

Unit V 10 hours
Children in need of Special Care: Overview of the problem of the differently abled child
(physically and mentally challenged), emotionally disturbed child, learning disabled,
children living with HIV/AIDS, children of prisoners. Definition, Nature, types, extent,
causes and effects, treatment and prevention. The Persons with Disability Act,1995. Role
of the Child Guidance Clinic. Application of social work methods for children in need of
special care.
Substitute Services for children Sponsorship: Meaning requirement, procedures in
sponsorship, role of social worker in Sponsorship programme.
Adoption: Meaning, nature of adoption, legal provisions and procedures regarding in-
country and inter-country adoption of the Indian child. Problems in adoption, role of the
social worker in an adoption service.
Role of NGO’s and INGO’s in the service of children.

References
1. Baruah, Arunima (2003) Child Abuse, Reference Press, New Delhi
2.Chaturvedi, T.N. (ed.) (1979), Administration for Child Welfare, Indian
Institute of Public Administration, New Delhi.
3. Chowdry, Paul. D. (1963), Child Welfare Manual, Atma Ram and Sons, New Delhi.
4. Devi, Laxmi (ed.), (1998), Child and Family Welfare, Institute for
Sustainable Development, Anmol Publications Pvt., Ltd., New Delhi.
5. Gandhi, Anjali 1990 School Social Work, Commonwealth Publishers, New Delhi.
6. Holmes, Robyn M. (1998) Field Work with Children. Sage Publications, New Delhi.
7. Kaldate, S.V. (1982), Society, Delinquent and Juvenile Court, Ajanta Publications,
New Delhi.
8. Kanbargi, Ramesh (ed.) (1991), Child Labour in the Indian Sub Continent,
Dimensions & Implications, Sage Publications, New Delhi.
9. Mander, Harsh & Vidya Rao, (1996), An Agenda for caring – interventions
for Marginalised Groups, Voluntary Health Association of India, New Delhi.
10. Mazumdar, Vina & Krishna (Eds.) (2001) Enduring Conundrum India’s Sex Ratio
Centre for Women’s Development Studies. Rainbow Publishers Ltd.
11. Pati, R.N. (ed.) (1991), Rehabilitation of Child Labourers in India, Ashish
Publishing House, Delhi.
12. Sarkar, Chandana, 1987, Juvenile Delinquency in India, An Etiological analysis,
Daya Publishing House, Delhi.
13. Sibert, Jo, (1992), Society & Community Pediatrics Edward Arnold, London.
14. Tardon, R.K. & Sudarshan, K.N. (1998), Directory & Hand book on Children,
Asish Publishing House, New Delhi.
15.Unicef Mapping India’s Children. An Agenda for Action. New Delhi.
16. Central Adoption Resource Authority (2006), Guidelines for Adoption from India.
New Delhi, Govt. of India.
17.Web resources: www.wcd.nic.in www.unicef.org www.tn.gov.in

244
SPECIALIZATION – COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT AND EMPOWERMENT

Paper – XI – Urban Community Development Total Teaching Hours : 60


Objectives
_ To enable students to gain an understanding about the urban poor.
_ To develop sensitivity and commitment for working with the urban poor.
_ To provide knowledge on various developmental efforts.
_ To expose students to skills and techniques of working with urban poor.
Unit I (12 Hrs)
Concept of Urban, Urban Development, Urban Community Development, Urbanization.
Urbanism, Differences between urban development and Urban Community Development.
Principles and Approaches of UCD.

Unit II (12 Hrs)


Slum : Definition, Characteristics, types, causes and consequences of growth of slums.
Theory of slums, Power structure of Slums. The Tamil Nadu Slum Areas (Slum
Clearance and Improvement) Act, 1971 – Policies, structure and functions of the Tamil
Nadu Slum Clearance. Problems of slum dwellers, squatter settlement dwellers, street
children. – programmes for the development of slum dwellers. Critical analysis of the
Programmes and approaches.
Unit III (12 Hrs)
Urban Community Development in India – Delhi and Hyderabad projects – Urban
Community Development in Tamil Nadu – MUDP and TNUDP
Governmental agencies in Urban Community Development – structure and functions of
the Tamil Nadu Housing Board, HUDCO, Corporation of Chennai, CMDA – Non-
Governmental agencies in Urban Community Development.
Unit IV (12 Hrs)
People’s participation in Urban Community Development – concept of involvement –
importance and scope of people’s participation – factors hindering promoting people’s
participation.
Unit V (12 Hrs)
Conscientization – goal settings; identifying and developing leadership, resource
mobilization; human resource development resolving group conflicts, programme
planning and service delivery, eliciting people’s participation, monitoring and
evaluation.
References
1. Ashish Bose, (1971), India’s Urbanisation : 1990 – 2001, McGraw Hill, New Delhi.
2. Bhattacharya, B., (1979), Urban Development in India, Shree Publishing House,
Delhi.
3. Bidyut Mohanty, (1993), Urbanization in Developing Countries Basic Services and
Community Participation, ISS and Concept Publishing Co., New Delhi.
4. Clinard, Marshall, B., (1970, Slums and Urban Community Development, The Free
Press, New York.

245
5. Desai, A.R. & Devadas Pillai (ed.) (1972), Slums and Urbanization, Popular
Prakashan, Bombay.
6. Paul Wiebe, (1975), Social Life in an Indian Slum, Vikas Publishing House, Delhi.

SPECIALIZATION – HUMAN RESOURCE AND MANAGEMENT


Paper – XI – Labour Legislations Total Teaching Hours : 60
Objectives
_ To help students learn the basic facts concerning Labour Law.
_ To assist the students to acquire attitudes that are apt in the practice of Labour Law
_ To enable them to realize the need to have suitable skills for the practice of Labour Law
Unit I (12 Hrs)
Labour Legislation : History of labour legislations in India; Labour in the Indian
Constitution; Industrial jurisprudence; industrial Law as distinguished from
common law; International Labour Code (ILC), Judicial set up and Administration of
Industrial and Labour Judiciary-Administration set up and functions of Factory
Inspectorate
Unit II (12 Hrs)
Legislations Pertaining to Working Conditions:
Factories Act, 1948, Industrial Employment (Standing Orders) Act, 1946, Apprentices
Act, 1961, Contract Labour (Regulations and Abolition) Act, 1970,Plantations Labour
Act, 1951.
Unit III (12 Hrs)
Shops and Establishment Legislation
Tamil Nadu Shops and Establishments Act, 1947, The Tamil Nadu Catering
Establishment Act, 1958, The Tamil Nadu Industrial Establishment (conferment of
permanent Status to workmen) Act, 1981, The Tamil Nadu Payment of Subsistence
Allowance act, 1981, Tamil Nadu Industrial Establishment (National and Festival
Holidays) Act,1951- Tamil Nadu Labour Welfare Fund Act, 1972.
Unit IV (12 Hrs)
Wage Legislation and Social Security Legislations
Payment of Wages Act, 1936
Minimum Wages Act, 1948
Payment of bonus Act, 1965
Workmen’s Compensation Act, 1923
Employee’s State Insurance Act, 1948
Employee Provident Fund and Miscellaneous Provisions Act, 195
Maternity Benefit Act, 1961
Payment of Gratuity Act, 1972
Unit V (12 Hrs)
Industrial Relations Legislations
Trade Unions Act, 1926
Industrial Disputes Act, 1947
References
1. Bhagoliwal, T.N., (1967), Economics of Labour and Social Welfare, Sahitya
Bhavan, Agra.

246
2. Government of India, Ministry of Labour, (2002), Report of the National
Commission on Labour, Vol- I, II, III Manager of Publication, New Delhi.
3. Misra.S.L (1983) Labour and Industrial Laws, Pioneer Publication, New Delhi.
4. Puri, S.K., (1984), Introduction to Labour Law & Industrial Law, Agricultural
Institute, Allahabad.
5.Srivastava,S.C (2000) Industrial Relations and Labour Laws, Vikas Publishing
House, New Delhi.
6. Suryanarayan Misra, (1982), Introduction to Labour Law & Industrial Law,
Agricultural Institute, Allahabad.
7.Tripathi,P.C. (1998) Industrial Relations & Labour Laws, Sultanchand Publication,
New Delhi.

SPECIALIZATION – MEDICAL AND PSYCHIATRIC SOCIAL WORK


Paper – XI – Medical Social Work Total Teaching Hours : 60
Objectives
• To know and understand the beginnings of social work in the medical setting and
its development and current status.
• To develop a holistic and integrated approach to social work practice in the field
of health.
• To develop a deeper understanding of common physical diseases and health
problems of vulnerable groups
• To develop the capacity to perceive the relation of environment and socio cultural
and psychological factors in the causation, treatment and prevention of diseases.
Unit I (12 Hrs)
The Concept and Definition of Medical Social Work: The meaning of health, hygiene,

diseases, illness and handicap; medicine as per WHO; Changing concept of health;

Concept of patient as a person. Historical Development in Medical Social Work in India.

Trends in Medical Social Work practice in Chennai. Scope of Medical Social Work.

Unit II (12 Hrs)


Health care models – Medical health Prevention and Promotion model, Integrative model
and Development model; holistic approach to health; alternative system of health-Yoga,
meditation, Naturopathy.
Health Education : Concept and Principle, Models, Methods and Techniques: Social
Action, Empowerment, Lobbying, Advocacy & Social marketing.

Unit III (12 Hrs)


The Psychosocial Problems of
Major communicable diseases – TB, STD, AIDS, Polio, diarrhoeal diseases, Malaria,
typhoid, leprosy, leptospirosis, Respiratory Tract Infection (RTI).
Major no communicable diseases – cancer, diabetes, hypertension, cardiac disorders,
neurological disorders, asthma

247
Physically challenged
Nutritional disorders
Occupational health problems
Women’s health problems
Pediatric health problems
Geriatric health problems
(12 Hrs)
Unit IV
Organization and administration of Medical Social Work Department in hospitals
Medical social work in relation to different disciplines
Multidisciplinary approach and team work
Patients right in health care
Implications of hospitalization for the patient and his family.

Unit V (12 Hrs)


Medical social work practice in different settings – hospitals, out-patient departments,
emergency / crisis care ART centres . Hospice, special clinics and community health use
of volunteers, social support and self help groups. Role of Medical Social Worker in
Hospital setting.
Problems encountered by medical social workers in the field.

References
1. Anderson R. & Bury M. (eds) (1988), Living with chronic illness – The Experience
of Patients and their families, Unwin Hyman, London.
2. Bajpai P.K. (ed.) (1997), Social Work Perspectives in Health, Rawat Publications,
Delhi.
3. Barlett H.M. (1961), Social Work Practice in the health field; National Association
of social workers, New York.
4. Crowley M.F., (1967), A New look at nutrition; Pitman Medical Publishing Co., Ltd.,
London.
5. Field M., (1963), Patients are people – A Medical – Social Approach to Prolonged
Illness; Columbia University Press, New York.
6. Gambrill. E. (1997), Delhi Social work in the 21st century, Pine forge press, New
Delhi.
7. Golstein D., (1955), Expanding horizons in medical social work, The University of
Chicago Press, Chicago.
8. Pokarno K.L., (1996), Social Beliefs, Cultural Practices in Health and diseases;
Rawat Publications, Delhi.

SPECIALIZATION – SOCIAL WORK WITH FAMILIES


Paper – XII – Social Work with Youth Total Teaching Hours : 60
Objectives
_ To understand the concept of youth development, the need and
importance of working with youth.
_ To understand the various factors influencing youth .

248
_ To understand the specific problems pertaining to youth.
_ To understand different governmental / non governmental programs for the welfare and
development of youth.
_ To develop an understanding of the different methods of working with youth

Unit I (12 Hrs)


Youth development: Concept, definition, aims and objectives – demographic profile of
the youth in rural and urban India, youth policy and programmes for youth.

Unit II (12 Hrs)


Needs of the youth – physical, intellectual, emotional, social and religious needs of the
youth. Socialization of the youth – influence of the family, peers, neighborhood,
reference groups, religion, impact of westernization, modernization, urbanization and
globalisation.

Unit III (12 Hrs)


Specific problems of the youth --- Behavioural problems, Drug abuse, alcohol
dependence, Sexually transmitted diseases, sexual problems, HIV/AIDS, Eating disorders
and obesity
Emotional problems – identity crises, alienation, low self-esteem, Suicide, career conflict,
conflicts in selecting a partner.

Unit IV (12 Hrs)


Role of youth in social change involvement – youth in polities, youth and leadership,
youth in conflict situations, terrorism, youth and entrepreneurship
Government Schemes for rural and urban youth. Governmental, NREGA, NCC, NSS,
Scouts, Guides, Hostel facilities, youth festivals, career counseling, Rajiv Gandhi
National Institute of Youth Development. Other programmes – Nehru Yuva Kendra,
Vishva Yuvak Kendra, Bharat Seva Samaj, Servants of India Society, Students
Federation of India, Democratic Youth Federation of India, All India Catholic
Universities Federation

Unit V (12 Hrs)


Application of Social Work methods in working with youth and youth groups. Training
for youth development.

References
1. Chowdhry D Paul, (1993), Youth Participation and Development, Atma Ram
and Sons. New Delhi
2. Elliot and Merill, (1965), Social Disorganizations, 4th ed., Harper and Brothers,
London.
3. Erikson H Erik, (1968), Identity Youth and Crisis, W.W., Norton.
4. Fred Milson Paul, (1972), Youth in a Changing Society, Routledge and Kegan
Paul Ltd,

249
5. Gore, M.S. (1978), Indian Youth – Process of Socialization; Vishva Yuvak. New
Delhi
6. Laskhminarayana. H.D., (1985), College Youth Challenge and Response,
Mittal Publications,
7. Madan, G.L., (1994), Indian Social Problems, Allied Publishers.
8. Mehta, Prayag, (1980), Indian Youth Emerging Problems and Issues, Allied
Publishers, New Delhi.
9. Nair P.S. (1991), Indian Youth, Mittal Publications. New Delhi
10. Ruhala S.P. (2001), Sociology of Youth Culture in India, India Publishing
House. New Delhi
11. Vishwa Yuvak Kendra , (1985), For Youth in India – Schemes of the Central
and State Government. New Delhi
12. webresources: www.yas.nic.in www.rgniyd.gov.in

SPECIALIZATION – COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT AND EMPOWERMENT


Paper – XII – Rural Community Development Total Teaching Hours : 60
Objectives
_ To develop in students an in-depth understanding of rural communities.
_ To provide knowledge of the various methods, programmes, strategies and
developmental efforts towards rural community development
_ To understand the role and contribution of professional social work in the
development process.

Unit I (12 Hrs)


Community Development
Definition, concept, philosophy and objectives, scope of rural community
development – approaches to rural community development – process, area
applied, need, spatial, sectoral.
Concepts and Definition of Rural Community Development
Rural development (RD), Rural Community Development (RCD), difference
between RD and RCD – philosophy, objectives, approaches, principles.

Unit II (12 Hrs)


History of Rural Development in India
Early pioneering period (Sriniketan, Marthandom and Guragon)
Probation trial period (Baroda, Etawah, Nilohkeri and Firka) projects
Launching period – post launching: Technical integration. Administrative
adaptation and Panchayati Raj.

Unit III (12 Hrs)


Community Development Administration
Organization and administration of community development from block to
national levels. Components of block administration, development programmes
and their coordination. Functions of BDO and other functionaries. Training for
community development functionaries.

250
Unit IV (12 Hrs)
Land, Water and Analysis of Rural Problems.
Systems of land tenure; Land reform measures, Land alienation. Water
harvesting, watershed management, Agricultural development program.
Poverty – alienation, rural bondedness – Unemployment and underemployment,
deprivation. Social problems – casteism, ill health, housing, illiteracy,
conservation, agricultural labourers, marginal and small farmers.
Rural power structure – Economic, political and social
SCs, STs, BCs, National Rural Employment Guarantee Act, 2005 – objectives,
characteristics, strategies, organization and administration, World Bank and Rural
Development. Impact of Globalisation on Rural Development

Unit V (12 Hrs)


Role of A Community Development Worker
Identifying leaders, resource mobilization, activating and mobilizing people,
organizing and working with groups, influencing, lobbying, facilitating,
negotiating, Cooperation.
Panchayat systems and local self-government in ancient India. Balwanthrai
Mehta Committee report. Three tier system, administrative set up and
functions, finance and problems of Panchayatiraj, Tamil Nadu Panchayat Act,
1994 and the 73rd amendment.

References
1.Agarwarl .A.N (2001) Indian Economy, Nature , Problems and Progress, Vikas
Biraj, Prakash, New Delhi
2. Dayal, Rajeshwar, (1974), C.D. Programme in India, Kitab Mahal Pvt, Ltd.,
Allahabad.
3. Desai, A.R., (1971), Rural Sociology, Popular Press, Bombay.
4. Desai, Vasanth, (1994), Dynamics of Entrepreneurial Development,
Himalaya Publishing House, New Delhi.
5. Dubhashi, P.R., (1977), Rural Development Administration in India, Popular Press,
Mumbai.
6. Jain, S.C., (1985), Rural Development Institute and Strategies, Rawas Publications.
7. Kartar Singh, (1986) Rural Development-Principles, Policies and Management,
Sage Publications, New Delhi.
8. Michel Lipton, (1982), Why Poor People remain poor, Heritage Publishers, New
Delhi.
9. Mukerji, B., (1961), Community Development in India, Orient Longman, Chennai.

251
SPECIALIZATION – HUMAN RESOURCE AND MANAGEMENT
Paper – XII – Human Resource Management and Human Resource Development
Total Teaching Hours : 60
Objectives
_ To help students build a knowledge base appropriate to Human Resource
Management
_ To enable the students to perceive the attitudes required for the successful
application of Human Resource Management.
_ To assist them to perceive and develop the skills appropriate to the field
practices

Unit I (12 Hrs)


Management : Principles and Functions, Concept of Business Management :
Principles, Functions, POSDCORB. Concept of Business Organisations,
Outline of different Management functions – Production, Sales, Advertising &
Marketing, Finance, Capital Mobilization, Stocks and Shares.
Human Resource Management : Concept, History, Role and importance as part of general
management objectives and Classification of Functions.

Unit II (12 Hrs)


Human Resource Planning : Concept and Process of Human Resource Planning,
Recruitment, using modern technology for recruitment, Selection, Job Design, Job
Analysis, Job Description, Job Classification, Job Evaluation, Induction and placement.
Reward Systems : Employee compensation systems and models of compensation,
compensation bench marking. ESOP, perks and benefits,
flexible pay, variable pay, performance linked incentive programme. Personal
taxation.

Unit III (12 Hrs)


Training and Development : Objectives, principles and theories of training.
Training policy. Methods and techniques of training. Training evaluation.
Professional training organizations : (ISTD, HRD Network and NIPM)

Unit IV (12 Hrs)


Modern Management Practices : JIT, 5S, TPM, TQM, Quality Control, Kaizen, ISO,
PCMM, BPR, BPO, Balance Score Card

Unit V (12 Hrs)


Human Resource Development : Definition, Importance of good HR practices;
contribution of HR instruments, Processes, Outcomes for Organizational Effectiveness.
The HRD Function : The tasks structure and functions of the HRD department; Qualities
and competency requirements of HRD managers.
HRD and Systems Concepts : Elements of a good HRD system; Various HRD sub-
systems. HR and IT – office automation – HR Audit and HRIS, People soft, SAP, ERP.

252
References
1. Bhonsle, Y.B. Personnel Management Indian Scene, Ruth Benedt Deborah
Prayer House.
2. Brahman, John, (2000), Human Resource Planning, Universities Press (I)
Limited, Hyderabad.
3. Koontz and Weihirich (1980) Essentials of Management, McGraw Hill, New York.
4.. Mamoria, C.B. (1996), Personnel Management, Himalayan Publications, New Delhi
5. Mondy, Robert & Share (1996).Human Resource Management, Prentice Hall, New
Delhi.
6. Pigors, Paul,.& Myers (1993) Personnel Management Mc Graw Hill, New York.
7. Rao, T.V. & Pereia, D.F. (1986), Recent Experience in HRD, Oxford & IBH
Publishing Co., New Delhi.
8. Rao, T.V. & Pereia, D.F. (1990), The HRD Missionary, Oxford and IBH
Publishing Co., New Delhi.

SPECIALIZATION – MEDICAL AND PSYCHIATRIC SOCIAL WORK


Paper – XII – Mental Health and Social Work Total Teaching Hours: 60
Objectives

• To understand psychiatric social work in the context of changing trends in


health care.
• To understand the concept of mental health and acquire knowledge in mental
Disorders and their treatment
• To develop skills in identifying mental disorders in health settings and
community.
• To understand the role of the psychiatric social worker.

Unit I (12 hrs)


Psychiatric Social Work: history and scope of psychiatric social work, changing
perspectives of psychiatric social work, changing trends in mental health care, Indian
view of mental health and well being.

Unit II (12 hrs)


Psychiatric Assessment – Case history taking and mental status examination,
Psycho- social and multidimensional assessment of mental disorders in Psychiatric Social
Work practice. Use of scales in mental health assessments and intervention.

Unit III (12 hrs)


Common Mental Disorders and their treatment modalities: Organic Mental Disorders,
mental and behavioural disorders due to psychoactive substance use, schizophrenia and
delusional disorders. Mood disorders, behavioural syndromes associated with
physiological disturbances, disorders of psychological development, behaviour and
emotional disorders with onset in childhood and adolescence. Neurotic, stress related and

253
somatoform disorders. Disorders of adult personality disorders and behaviour, sexual
disorders, mental retardation and suicide. Epilepsy and culture bound syndromes.

Unit IV (12 hrs)


Institutional and non institutional models of care for management of mental disorders.
Role of psychiatric Social Worker in the mental health field. Practice of psychiatric social
work in non psychiatric settings. Collaborating and networking with various
organizations; new avenues of mental health.

Unit V (12 hrs)


Psychosocial rehabilitation: concept, principles, process and programmes.

REFERENCES
1.Ahuja, Niraj (2002) A Short textbook of Psychiatry, Jaypee Brothers Medical
Publishers Ltd., New Delhi.
2.American psychiatric ASSN. 1994 Diagnostic criterion from DSM-IV American
Psychiatric assn,
3.Barker P. Child Psychiatry; Granada Publishing Ltd.
4.Bellack A.S. (1984) Schizophrenia, treatment Management in Adult, Bailliere Tindall,
London.
5.Berrios, G.E. & Dawson J.H. (1983) Treatment and Management in Adult Bailliere
Tindall, London.
6.Colin Pitchard, (2006), Mental Health Social Work, Routledge Publishers
7.Hepworth D.H. & Larsen J.A. (1986) Direct Social Work Practice, Theory and Skill
Third Edition.
8.Kaplan, H.I. Freedom A.M. and Sadock B.J. (1980) Comprehensive Textbook of
Psychiatry, (third ed.) vols. 1,2 &3; Williams and Wilkins, Baltimore / London.
9.Kappur, M Sheppard. Ralph and Renate (Eds) (1993) Child Mental Health –
Proceedings of the Indo – US
10.Mane P. & Gandevia K. (Eds.) (1993) Mental Health in India Issues and Concerns;
Tata Institute of Social Sciences, Mumbai
11.Robert, Albert R. Greene,Gilbert J., (2002), Social Workers’ Desk Reference,
Oxford University Press, New York.
12.Sekar, K. Parthasarathy,R.,Muralidhar,D. Chandrasekhar Rao (2007) Handbook of
Psychiatric Social Work, NIMHANS, Bangalore
13.Srinivasa Murthy & Burns B. (Eds) (1992) Community Mental Health –
Proceedings of the Indo-US Symposium, NIMHANS, Bangalore.
14. World Health Organisation, Geneva (1992) The ICD 10 Classification of
Mental and Behavioural Disorders. Clinical Description and Diagnostic Guidelines;
Oxford University Press.

254
ELECTIVE
Paper – XIV –Counseling Total Teaching Hours : 60
Objectives
• To help students distinguish between counseling, Case Work and Psychotherapy
• and to acquire the required knowledge in this regard.
• To sensitize the students to the attitudes required for the practice of counseling
• To engage the students to identify and practice the appropriate skills.
Unit I (12 Hrs)
Counseling
Definition, Elements, Characteristics and Goals,
Evolution of counseling
Foundations of Counseling
Philosophical Foundations – dignity of the human person
Sociological foundations – influence of social system
Psychological foundations – concept of self, goal directed behaviour, learning
principles, developmental needs at different stages.

Unit II (12 Hrs)


The Counseling Relationship
Regard and respects - Authenticity - Empathy
Personal Growth and Effectiveness of the Consellor
Concerns of self, attitudes, values, beliefs, relationships, self-esteem, openness
to others, accepting personal responsibility, realistic levels of aspiration, self
actualization.
The portrait of the helper
The portrait of a trainee

Unit III (12 Hrs)


Counseling Process
Stage – I – Problem Exploration and Clarification
Stage – II – Integrative Understanding – Dynamic Self-Understanding
Stage – III – Facilitation Action; Developing New Perspectives, Preferred
Scenario.

Unit IV (12 Hrs)


Group Counseling and Counseling in different settings
Definition, types, goals, Group counseling process – Group development.
Counseling in Family, School, Industrial & Health setting – De-addiction
centers, correctional settings, HIV / AIDS.

Unit V (12 Hrs)


Theoretical Approaches to Counseling
Client-centered – TA – Rational emotive therapy – Cognitive approach –
Family Therapy – Behaviour – Eclectic approach.

255
References
1. Association of Psychological and Practice, (!982), Counseling in Asia, Perspective
and Practices, Educational Counsellors of Asia.
2. Bengalee, M., Ehroo D., (1972), Guidance if you please, Macmillan, Bombay.
3. Currie, Fr. J., (1989), Barefoot Counseling – A Primer in building relationship,
Asiam Tarding Corp, Bangalore.
4. Dave, Indu, (1953), The Basic Elements of Counseling, Sterling, New Delhi.
5. Delaney & Eisenber, (1973), The Counseling Process, Dept. of Mental Health
Education and Mental Health Programme, Report NO.1, 11 US.
6. Fuster, J.M., (1972), Helping Personnel Growth – A New Approach to Counseling,
Thompson Publication.
7. Welfare Egan, Gerard, (1982), The Skilled Helper, Brooks / Cole Publishing Co.
California.

ELECTIVE
Paper – XIV – Management of Developmental and Voluntary Organizations
Total Teaching Hours : 60
Objectives
To understand the overall environment and its impact on the nature, structure and
development of the organizations in corporate, public and voluntary, sectors in context of
social work profession
To understand policies and procedures involved in establishing and maintaining human
service organizations, need for change.
To acquire skills to network and participate in the management of resources – human,
material, environmental and network.
To develop skills to participate in management of programmes, as a part of the inter-
disciplinary team and initiate as well as develop new programmes.
To develop ability to analyze the practices applied in specific settings.

Unit I (12 Hrs)


Social Services
Development and Welfare Organization’s response to societal needs; role of state
voluntary and corporate sector

Unit II (12 Hrs)


Management services
Types of settings, organizational characteristics like origin, nature, size, structure, and
design, organizational climate and impact socio-political environment impact
Management Process: Vision of planning, organizing, directing staff, cooperation,
evaluation
Establishments, registration, different types of legislations, legal status, constitution, rules
and procedure, goals
Financial Resources: Organizational budget, sources of finance, fund raising records,
audit.

256
Physical: all activities related to acquiring, hiring and maintaining importable structure
and infrastructure, maintenance of premises and daily upkeep.
Enhancing the involvement and the potential of people in organization’s executive
boards, committees, professionals and other staff, relationship, communication, team
building, supervision, and participation in training.

Unit III (12 Hrs)


Programme Development
Programme management: Long term, short term, and documentation;
Project proposals based on felt needs, nature of resources, eligibility criteria, records,
evaluation and research
Impact analysis-qualitative and quantitative

Unit IV (12 Hrs)


Public Relation
Public relations need and its promotion by all in the organization. Representing the
organization, networking, public, corporate and voluntary sector, resource building,
accountability, transparency, social audit, use of Media for publicity.

Unit V (12 Hrs)


Change and its Management
Understand and manage change, innovation-in a rapidly changing social environment: for
policy programmes and structure
Organizational Understanding conflict, conflict resolution, creating positive climate

References

1. Choudhari, D. Paul, (1983), New Delhi,Social Welfare Administration, Atma ram


and Sons,
2. Garain, S. (1998), Organizational Effectiveness of NGOs, University Book House,
Jaipur
3. 1988), Social Welfare Administrative : Theory and Practice, Vol. I, and II, Deep
and Deep Publications, New Delhi.
4. Haimann, A. (1982), Professional Management and Practice, Eurasia Publication,
Delhi.
5. Kapoor, K.K. (1986, Directory of Funding Organization, Information and News
Network, Delhi.
6. Lauffer, A. (1977), Understanding your social agency, Sage Publications, London.
7. Lauffer, A., (1977), Getting the Resources you Need, Sage Publications, New Delhi.
8. Luthans, Fred, (1990), Organizational Behaviour Boston, McGraw Hill, Irwin.
9. Siddiqui, H.Y. (1984), Social Work and Social Action, Hamam Publication, New
Delhi.
10. Slavin, S. (ed.) (1978), Managing Finance Personnel and Information in Human
Services, Howorth Press, New York.
11. Slavin, S., (ed.) (1978), Social Administration, The Haworth Press, New York.
12. Weiner, M., (1982), Human Service Management, The Dorsey Press, Illinois.

257
INTER –DISCIPLINARY
Paper – XV – Social Policy and Social Legislation
Total Teaching Hours : 60
Objectives
_ To develop an understanding of the social policy in the perspective of the National
Goals as stated in the Constitution, particularly with reference to fundamental rights and
the directive principles of the state policy.
_ To develop the capacity to recognize the linkage between development issues and
social policy in terms of the plans and programmes
_ To develop an understanding of the concepts of social policy and social welfare policy
to emphasize the relationship between the production and the redistribution of the
resources at the micro and the macro level
_ To develop an understanding of the relevance of social policy to social work practice.

Unit I (12 Hrs)


Social Policy and Constitution
Social policy, social welfare policy, its relation to the constitution, fundamental rights
and Directive Principles of State Policy and Human Rights.
Definition, needs and contents, evolution of social policy in India, social policy and
planned social change and development.

Unit II (12 Hrs)


Policy Formulation
Approaches to social policy
Unified, Integrated and Sectoral
Different models of social policy and their application to Indian situation
Process of Policy Formulation
Social Policies, Plans and Programmes
Policies in India – a historical perspective policy regarding backward classes, scheduled
classes. Scheduled tribes, denotified communities, women, children, youth, handicapped,
aged, populations, family welfare, urban & rural development, education, health, poverty
alleviation
Review of Five year plans
Programmes and policies of 11 th Five year plan.

Unit III (12 Hrs)


Policy and Planning
Concept of social – developmental Planning, Scope of social planning, linkages between
social policy and planning.

258
Unit IV (12 Hrs)
Planning Process and Planning Machinery
Indian Planning – historical perspective. Political systems. Political process, co-
ordination of center and state, Panchayati Raj, Peoples participation. Political judiciary,
social movement and voluntary action, legal aid and public interest litigation.
Planning Machinery and Monitoring
The Machinery process of social planning in India
Implementation of social planning at various levels
Monitoring and evaluation of planning

Unit V (12 Hrs)


Overview of Major Social Legislation in India
Hindu law : legislation pertaining to marriage divorce and succession, Hindu
Marriage Act 1955, Hindu Adoption and Maintenance Act, 1956, Hindu Minority and
Guardianship Act ,1956, Hindu Succession Act ,1956.
Special Marriage Act, 1954 , Provision regarding marriage and divorce in Mohammedan
law.
Legislation pertaining to children: Child Labour (abolition & regulation) Act
1986. Juvenile Justice Act 2001.
Legislation pertaining to social problems: Protection of Civil Rights Act (1976),
SC/ST. Prevention of Atrocities Act, 1989. Dowry Prohibition Act (1961)
Immoral Traffic Prevention Act (1956) Tamil Nadu Slum Areas (Improvement and
Clearance) Act (1971) the Mental Health Act, 1987, Medical Termination of Pregnancy
Act 1971. Manual Scavenging and Dry Latrines (prohibition) Act 1993, the Bonded
Labour Abolition Act 1976, Transplant of Human Organs Act 1994, Family Court’s
Act 1984, Protection of Human Rights Act, 1993 Tamil Nadu Prohibition of Eve teasing
Act 1988. Tamil Nadu Prohibition of Ragging Act 1997. Persons With Disabilities Act
1995.

References
1. Adoms Robert, (2002), Social Policy for Social Work, Palgrove.
2. Baldock John, (2000), Social Policy,Oxford, Oxford University Press.
3. Dubey S.N. (1979), Administration of Social Welfare Programmes in India,
Soymaiya Publications, Bombay.
4. Gangrade, K.D., (1991), Social Legislation in India, Concept Publishing, New Delhi.
5. Kulbarai P.D., (1999), Social Policy of Social development in India, ASSWI.
6. Kulkarni. P.D., (1965), The Central Social Welfare Board, Asia Publishing House,
New Delhi.
7. Nair, T. Krishnan (ed.) (1976), Social Work Education & Development of Weaker
Sections, Madras-Association of Schools of Social Work in India.
8. Shanmugavelayutham .K. (1998) Social Legislation and Social Change, Chennai,
Vazhga Valamudan Publishers
8. Yeetes Nicole, (2001), Globalization of Social Policy, London Sage Publication.

259
INTER – DISCIPLINARY
Paper – XV – Human Rights Total Teaching Hours : 60
Objectives
To provide a perspective and foundation for a human rights culture among
students.
To study the Indian Constitution and human rights and how it can be enforce.
To create awareness on the Indian legal system, rule of law, human rights
related to custody and detention.
To enable students to work for the promotion and protection of children’s rights
women rights, dalit rights, workers rights (especially unorganized labour) right
of the urban poor and victims of displacement and resettlement.
To understand statutory provision, for protecting the environment, consumer
protection, local governance and right to information.
To equip students with knowledge about the human rights movements and new
rights gained.
To prepare students to play a role in promotion and protection of Human Rights
using advocacy strategies.

Unit I (12 Hrs)


Introduction to human rights; categories and foundation of human rights,
International Human Rights Law and how to use it.
Indian Constitution and human rights protection and enforcement. Writ
jurisdiction and Public Interest Litigation.

Unit II (12 Hrs)


Understanding law and the State. The relationship between human rights,
democracy, sustainable development, equality, sovereignty, secularism and non
discrimination.
The Indian Legal System, Indian Penal Code, Criminal Procedure Code and
Civil Procedure Code. Human rights in relation to custody and detention.

Unit III (12 Hrs)


Global Market and Human Rights
Business corporations and human rights standards Science, technology and
human rights. Protection and regeneration of natural resources. Intellectual
Rights

Unit IV (12 Hrs)


Empowering the most exploited and oppressed
Children rights, rights of coastal Communities, women’s rights, dalits rights,
workers rights, especially unorganized labour rights of the urban poor, victims
of displacement and resettlement.
Law and Strategy regarding protecting the environment, consumer protection,
local governance empowerment and right to information.

260
Unit V (12 Hrs)
Human rights struggles and the Human rights movement in India
Statutory Commission and Human Rights Courts for the protection of rights.
Procedures for intervening in this process.
Strategies and skills for human rights advocacy.

References
1. Baxi, Upandra, (2005) future of human Rights Oxford University Press,London
2. Chandra, Sathish (1996) Interntrional Documents of Human Rights, Mittal
Publications, New Delhi.
3.Chakrborthy, Somen, (2004) Human Rights Trainer’s Manual,Indian Social Insitutute,
New Delhi.
4.Donnelly, Jack (1989) universal Human Rights in Theory and Practice, Cornell
University, Press, USA.
5. Mathew P.D & Mathew, P.M (2005) Indian Legal System: An overview, Indian Social
Institute, New Delhi
6.Shanmugavelayutham,K. Social Legislation and Social Change , Vazhga Valamudan
Publishers, Chennai
7. Srivastava and Narayan (2002) united Nations on Human Rights, Indian Publishing
Distributors, New Delhi.
7.United Nations, 1994: Human /Rights and Social Work , A Manual for Schools for
Social Work and the Social Work Profession, Centre for Human Rights United Nations,
Geneva.

Web Sites
www. hrw.org.
www. humanrightsinfo.com
www.unhcr.ch

261
SEMESTER – IV
SPECIALIZATION – SOCIAL WORK WITH FAMILIES

Paper – XVI – Social Work with the Elderly Total Teaching Hours : 60
Introduction
The course aims at providing knowledge of theories, concepts and perspectives
in gerontology, information of changing demography of older persons, vulnerability for
abuse in old age and guiding principles of work with other persons. It also provides
understanding of psychodynamic, ecological and advocacy approaches in social work
with the elderly.

Objectives
To understand the theories, concepts and perspectives in gerontology and gerontological
social work
To examine the historical norms of roles, power and status of older persons and emerging
trends and issues in the context of liberalized political economy and changing
demography.
To study the physical, mental, sexual, emotional, economic, social and spiritual aspects
of ageing and emerging needs.
To understand and analyze the policies, laws and programme affecting older persons.
To acquire skills in developmental programmes for the aging, their family members and
the community in general.
.
Unit I (12 Hrs)
Roles, Power and Status of Elderly – Historical norms in different cultures, urban / rural,
tribal, economic, age and gender contexts. Situational analysis of the aged with respect to
age, gender, place of residence, economic status and globalization. Demographic
characteristics of the Elderly

.Unit II (12 Hrs)


Health of the Elderly - Longevity and physical health, Mental and emotional health Ill
health, disabilities and care giving
Sexuality in old age, Spirituality in old age
Review of health policies for the disabled and their implementation with references to
elderly
Health intervention : periodical check up, information and awareness about prevention of
problems, recreation and creative art programmes, spiritual discourses, counseling,
physical aids and access to geriatric treatment.

Unit III (12 Hrs)


Elderly and Family
Interventions of elderly with parents, spouse, children, children-in-laws, grand children
and others.
Care giving roles between elderly and the family. Stress management of caregivers
Issues of division of property, housing and social security.

262
Issues of neglect, abuse, violence and abandonment
Review of laws for inheritance and protection from abuse
Intervention needs : Raising family awareness about bereavement, And bereavement
counseling

Unit IV (12 Hrs)


Policy, Legislation and Schemes for Elderly
National policy for elderly, 1999 Scheme for the welfare of the aged,
institutional care and non institutional care in day care and mobile Medicare
units, Laws affecting elderly Policy and Plans for elderly.

Unit V (12 Hrs)


Intervention
Developmental programmes for ageing: Development programmes for
preparations for old age, retirement planning, programmes for preparation for
understanding death and bereavement planning, and raising family and
community awareness about ageing and death.
Non-institutional services / Community services: Continuing educations,
mutual/self help groups, second career, training of elderly as volunteers,
counseling and legal aid to elderly, multi-services / day care centers,
home/family-based services, telephone help lines, information and referral
services, and death with dignity.
Minimizing the need for and humanizing the existing institutional services.
Training of para professionals and volunteers for care of the elderly.

References
1. Dandekar, K. (1996), The Elderly in India, Sage Publications, New Delhi.
2. Desaum N abd Suva Rahym (2000), Gerontological Social Work in India,
Some Issues and Perspectives, B.R. Publishers, Delhi.
3. Irundaya Rajan, S. Mishra, U.S. and Sarma P.S., (!997), Indian Elderly: Asset
or Liability, Sage Publications, New Delhi.
4. Khan, M.Z., (1997), Elderly in Metropolis, Inter India Publishers, New Delhi.
5. Krishnan, P and Mahadevan, K. (eds.) (1992), The Elderly Population the
Developed World: Policies, Problems and Perspectives, B.R. Publishing, Delhi.

263
SPECIALIZATION – COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT AND
EMPOWERMENT
Paper – XVI – Development Planning Total Teaching Hours : 60
Objectives
_ To develop theoretical understanding of development and planning
_ To enable students to gain an understanding of the administrative machinery
involved in development.
_ To provide knowledge on various methods strategies and development efforts.
_ To understand the role and contribution of professional social worker in the
development.

Unit I
Development Planning (12 Hrs)
Planning – Concept – models, approaches – types planning process – need and
importance of planning for development. Development – definition – concepts
– indicators – types – models, social development and planning as a major development
thrust in India.

Unit II
Participatory Planning (12 Hrs)
Participatory planning and development – history of participatory development
in India – models and approaches – participatory planning in Panchayati Raj
institutions.

Unit II (12 Hrs)


Agriculture
Government’s plan for Agricultural development – agricultural productivity –
causes and problems of agriculture in India – marginal and small farmers
agricultural problems and strategies to solve them.

Unit IV (12 Hrs)


Co-operative Movement in India
History, Principles – legislations planning to cooperatives – Role and
achievements of cooperative – problems and limitations of cooperatives –
problems and limitations of cooperatives – types of cooperatives – Role of
Cooperatives to develop the poor.

Unit V (12 Hrs)


Development of SC & ST
Concept, constitutional provision, problems and programmes for their
development – control and state schemes – Role of Professional Social
Workers, NGO’s in the development of SC & ST, Refugees and displaced.

264
References
1. Chakravarthy, Sukhamoy, (1996), Development Planning the Indian
Experience, Oxford University Press.
2. Cottrell, Stella, (2003), Skills for Success, The Personal Development
Planning Handbook, Palgrave.
3. Dahiya, S.B., (1988), Development Planning Models, Inter India.
4. Kabra Kamal Nayan, (1997), Development Planning in India Exploring an
Alternative Approach, Sage Publications, Delhi.
5. Parman Mary, (1993), Development Planning in India, Reliance Publication.

SPECIALIZATION – HUMAN RESOURCE AND MANAGEMENT


Paper – XVI – Industrial Relations And Labour Welfare
Total Teaching Hours : 60

Objectives
_ To assist the students to acquire a global as well as local perspective on
Industrial Relations and trade unions, labour welfare, the facts and its history.
_ To sensitize the students to adopt suitable attitudes for practice of Industrial
Relations
_ To help the students see the need for appropriate skills in this regard.

Part – A Industrial Relations


Unit I (12 Hrs)
Industrial Relations; Concept, characteristics of model industrial relations
system.
Industrial Relations at Plant and Shop Floor Level: Discipline, domestic
enquiry, and grievance settlement procedure.
Industrial Conflicts : Concepts of industrial peace and industrial conflict, cause
and consequence of industrial conflict, Strikes and Lock-outs; Meditation,
Conciliation. Arbitration and adjudication Statutory and Non-Statutory
machinery for prevention and settlement of disputes.
Trade Unions : Trade unionism in India, and its role in Industrial relations.
Wage and Salary Administration : Definition of wages, wage theories, types of
wages : wage determination: Wage structure, wage differentials, wage
Standardization, wage policy, Wage incentives, bonus and profit sharing.

Unit II (12 Hrs)


Collective Bargaining : Meaning, theories, goal, phases, pre-requisites,
principles, strategies and negotiation skills, factors influencing collective
bargaining; collective agreements, Productivity bargaining.
Employee Empowerment : Worker’s Education – purpose, objectives,
experiments in India : Worker’s participation in Management – Meaning and
scope of industrial democracy

265
Unit III (12 Hrs)
Emerging Trends in Industrial Relations : Globalization and Liberalization and
its impact : Employer federations in India; International labour Organisation and
its impact.

Part – B Labour Welfare


Unit IV (12 Hrs)
Labour Welfare : Concept, Philosophies, need, objectives, principles, scope and
limitations of labour welfare; Historical development of labour welfare in India.

Unit V (12 Hrs)


Statutory and Non-Statutory Welfare Provisions : Housing, education, family
Planning, transport, recreation and additional health facilities; Industrial
Counseling-Pre-retirement, Quality of work life.
Social security : Concept and Scope of Social security, social assistance and
social insurance; Social security measures in India.

References :
1. Agnihotri V., Industrial Relations in India, Atma Ram and Sons, Delhi.
2. Arya, V.P., Strikes, Lockouts and Gheraoes, Oxford & I.B.H. Publishing Co.,
New Delhi.
3. Desai, A.M. Vandana Dole, Industrial Social Work, Tata Institute of Social
Sciences.
4. Dufty, N.F. Industrial Relations in India, Allied Publishers, Bombay.
5. Government of India, Report of the Study Group on Worker Participation
in Management, Publications Division, New Delhi.
6. Karnik, V.B., Strikes in India, Manaktlas, Bombay.
7. Krishna C.S., (1989), Labour Movement in Tamil Nadu, K.P. Bagchi & Co.
8. Mamoria, C.B., (1991), Dynamics of Industrial Relations, Hill House Press.
9. Mathur, A.S., Labour Policy and Industrial Relations in India, Asia
Publishing House, Bombay.
10. Moorthy. V. Principles of Labour Welfare, Gupta Brothers, Visakapatnam,
11. Myers, C.A and Kannappa, S., Industrial relations in India, Asia Publishing
House, Bombay.
12. Nirmal Singh & Bhatia, (2000), Industrial Relations & Collective
Bargaining, Dehorah Prayer Group.
13. Panicker P.T.K. and Other, Employee Participation in Share Capital, Madras
School of Social Work. Madras.
14. Patil, (1993), Collective Bargaining Perspective & Practices, Universal Law
Publication.
15. Patil, B.R., Conciliation in India, Chugh Publications.
16. Punekar, S.D. & Others, Labour Welfare, Trade Unionism and Industrial
Relations, Himalaya, Bombay.
17. Ramanujam, G., (1990), Indian Labour Movement, Sterling Publishers, New
Delhi.

266
18. Sarma, A.M, Aspects of Labour Welfare and Social Security, Himalaya,
Bombay.
19. Subramanian, K.N., Labour Management Relations in India, Asia Publishing
House, Bombay.
20. Vaid, K.N., Labour Welfare in India, Sri Ram Center for Industrial Relations,
New Delhi.

SPECIALIZATION – MEDICAL AND PSYCHIATRIC SOCIAL WORK


Paper – XVI – Community Health Total Teaching Hours : 60

Objectives
To develop an understanding of the health care system in India, health
policies
and legislative provision relating to health.
• To develop an understanding of the existing programmes and services at local,
national and international levels and the need for a preventive and developmental
approach in the field of health.
• To develop skill in programmes planning and education for different target
groups about handling of their health problems.
• To develop a holistic and integrated approach to social approach to social work
practice in the field of health.

Unit I (12 Hrs)


Public health – concept and development in India : Organization and
administration of Health Care at the Center, State, District, Municipality and
Village level; health planning in India; Health committees; 11th Five Years Plan and
its relation to Health Care.

Unit II (12 Hrs)


Community Health Care – changing concepts; primary health care for all; health
status and health problems; health care systems – primary health center; private
health systems; indigenous systems; voluntary health systems; role of Professionalo
Social Worker in community health.

Unit III (12 Hrs)


Health Legislations and Policies
ESI Act, 1948, Amendment, 1975
MTP Act, 1971
Doctors, patients and the consumer protection act, 1986
Persons With Disability Act, 1995
Environment Protection Act
National Health Policy, 1983
The Population Policy
Health for all 2000

267
Unit IV (12 Hrs)
National Health programmes
Family welfare; Maternal & Child Health, ICDS; School Health Programmes,
National Rural Health Mission (NRHM), UIP NEMP; NLEP; NTP; Diarrhoeal disease
control Programme: IDD: AIDS Control programme : National Programme for control of
blidness: Health Programmes in the 11th Five Year Plan, welfare measures for the
physically challenged; International Health organizations (WHO, UNCEF, Red Cross)
State health programmes for weaker sections, Physically challenged and
developmentally challenged.

Unit V (12 Hrs)


National Mental Health programme
Research applications in health – sources of health information –
epidemiological and vital statistics; role of ICMR in health research.

References
1. Banerjee U. (1977), Health Administration in Metropolis, Abhinav Publications,
New Delhi.
2. Bose A & Desai P B (1982), Studies in the social dynamics of Primary Health Care
: Hindustan Publishing Co. Delhi.
3. Charns M.P. & Schaeffer M.J. (1983), Health Care Organization – A Model for
Management; Prentice Hall Inc., New Jersey.
4. Hanlon J.H. (1975), Principles of Public Health Administration, C.V. Mosby Co.
Tokyo.
5. Javaratham J (ed.) (1993), Occupational Health in Developing Countries,
Oxford University Press, Oxford.
6. Miller D., (1976), Dimensions of Community Health, C Brown Co.
7. Pandy R & Kahere V. (1997), Activist’s handbook of occupational Health &
safety; Society for participatory research in Asis, New Delhi.
8. Philips D.R. (1990), Health & Health care in the third world, Long man
Scientific and technical, New York.

SPECIALISATION : SOCIAL WORK WITH FAMILIES

Paper – XVII – Family Social Work Total Teaching Hours : 60


Introduction
This course promotes an understanding of the changing norms of the family social
systems and development opportunities throughout its cycle. It also aims to develop
skills in identifying scope for reform and positive awareness for need of a healthy
family unit.
Objectives
_ Understand normative and changing norms of the institution of family and
variations in them with reference to the family social ecology.
_ Understand the implications of family norms for status of individuals and
developmental opportunities in the family by age and gender.

268
_ Encourage study of the process of family socialization and understand family
norms ecology and dynamics.
_ Understand dynamics of family interactions and developmental tasks through
the family life span, in the context of family norms and family ecology.
_ Develop skills in identifying the need for reforms in family norms and creating
public awareness in this area.
_ Develop skills in writing holistic family case studies and carrying out family
need assessment for identifying areas of intervention.
_ Develop positive attitude to support understanding the need of a healthy family
unit.

Unit I (12 Hrs)


Theoretical and conceptual frame works to study family
Origin and evolution of family and marriage
Ideology of family rights and responsibilities

Unit II (12 Hrs)


Normative family functions and structure and changes
Normative family and marriage functions and structure, ethnicity and socioeconomic
background.
Social changes and changes in family and marriage functions and structure.
Implications for the family and its members.

Unit III (12 Hrs)


Alternative Family and Marriage Patterns and Structure Dual earner / career facilities
Single parent families Female headed households Childless families Reconstituted / Step
families Consensual unions
Homosexual families

Unit IV (12 Hrs)


Family Socialization of Child, Family
Family interaction
Family development / Family life cycle

Unit V (12 Hrs)


Positive Parenting.
Responsible parent hood and child care, planning ones family - the choice of suitable
methods for family planning.

References
1. Desai, M (ed.) (1994), Family and Intervention: A Course Compendium,
Tata Institute of Social Sciences, Bombay.
2. Engles, F., (1994), Origin of the Family, Private Property and the State,
People’s Publishing House, Bombay.
3. Hartman, A, and Laird, J (1982), Family Centred Social Work Practice, Free
Press, New York.

269
4. Horchschild., A., (1989), The Second Shift : Working Parents and the
Revolution at Home, Viking, New York.
5. Khasgiwala, A., (1993), Social Work Perspectives, Anmol Publications, New
Delhi.
6. Klein, D.M. and White, J.M., (1996), Family Theories : An Introduction, Thousand
Oaks: Sage Publications.
7. Raju M.L. and Krishna, G.R. (eds.) (1996), Future of Indian Family Challenges for
Social Work Education, Tirupathi : Sri Padmavathi Mahila Visvavidyalayam,.
8. Special Issue of The Indian Journal of Social Work on “Family Development”,
Tata Institute of Social Sciences, Mumbai.
9. Uberoi, P. (2000), The Family in India : Beyond the Nuclear Versus Joint
Debate, Occasional Paper in Sociology, Institute of Economic Growth, Delhi.

SPECIALISATION : COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT AND EMPOWERMENT


Paper – XVII – Entrepreneurship Development
Total Teaching Hours : 60
Objectives
_ To provide an understanding, nature and process of entrepreneurship
development
_ To motivate the students to go for entrepreneurship development

Unit I (12 Hrs)


Evolution of Entrepreneurship: Nature, Elements, Interactive Process.
Entrepreneur and Entrepreneurship: Importance of Entrepreneurs – Characteristics and
Competencies – Enterprise culture – Role of Entrepreneurs in Economic development.

Unit II (12 Hrs)


Developing the Entrepreneurship Plan : Environmental Assessment, Opportunities in
Education. Corporate field.

Unit III (12 Hrs)


Managing Entrepreneurship Growth: Development stages. Financial aspects of
Entrepreneurship.

Unit IV (12 Hrs)


Entrepreneurship – Personality characteristics – Social and cultural determinants. Skills
required. Entrepreneurship – Factors related to success and failure – preparation of
project proposal.

Unit V (12 Hrs)


Small Scale Industry – Definition and meaning – Classification – Characteristics.
Importance of SSI. Exports and SSI Sector – financial institutions – SSIs.

270
References
1. Curtis, E.T., Megginson, L.C. Scott, C.R. Trueblodd, L.R. (1975), Effective Small
Business Management, Business Publications, Dallas, Texas.
2. Curtis, E.T., Megginson, L.C. Scott, C.R. Trueblodd, L.R. (1975), Successful Small
Business Management, Business Publications, Dallas, Texas.
3. Donald F. Kuratko, Richard M. Hodgetts, (2001), Entrepreneurship – A
Contemporary Approach, Harcourt College Publisher, London.
4. Gupta M.C., (1987), Entrepreneurship in Small Scale Industry, Anmol
Publications, New Delhi.
5. Lambden, Johnc and Targett, David, (1990), Small Business Finance – A Simple
Approach, Pitman Publishing, London.

SPECIALISATION : HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT


Paper – XVII – Organizational Behaviour and Organizational Development
Total Teaching Hours : 60
Objectives
_ To help students build a knowledge base appropriate to Personal Management
and Organizational Behaviour.
_ To enable the students to perceive and develop the attitudes required for the
successful application of personnel management and organizational Behaviour
_ To assist them to perceive develop the skills appropriate to the field practices.

Unit I (12 Hrs)


Organizational Behaviour, History, evolution, concept, behavioural Sciences,
Organizational types, conceptual models, Types of Personality.

Unit II (12 Hrs)


Dynamics of Organizational Behaviour, Perception, Managerial leadership,
process, styles, types and theories, group dynamics, team building.

Unit III (12 Hrs)


Human Behaviour at Work : Models and theories of motivation; attitude, job
satisfaction, morale, frustration, conflict and stress management.

Unit IV (12 Hrs)


Organizational Development : The concept, theory, scope and practice of
organizational development, organizational culture design, organizational
change.

UNIT V (12 Hrs)


Operational research – Network analysis, PERT – CPM, Process Mapping.

References
1. Dwivedi, R.S. (1982), Management of Human Resources, Oxford Publishing
Co., Bombay.

271
2. Frence, Wemdell and Cecil, (1995), Organization Development, Prentice –
Hall of India Ltd., New Delhi.
3. Luthans, Fred, (1995), Organizational Behaviour, McGraw Hill Ltd.,
Singapore.
4. Maier, Norman, (1983), Psychology in Industry, Oxford Publishing Co.,
Bombay.
5. Ouchi, William, (1981), Theory Z, Avon Books, New York.
6. Pareekh, Udai, (1998), Organizational Behaviour & Process, Rawat
Publications, Jaipur.
7. Robbins, Stephen, (1994), Essential Organizational Behaviour, Prentice Hall
of India Ltd, New Delhi.
8. Szilagyi, Andrew & Marc Wallance, (1997), Organizational Behaviour &
Performance, Scott Foresman and Co., London.

SPECIALIZATION – MEDICAL AND PSYCHIATRIC SOCIAL WORK


Paper – XVII – Psychiatric Social Work Practice
Total Teaching Hours: 60

Objectives
•  To develop the capacity for critical assessment of mental health needs and
problems of various vulnerable groups in the Indian context and develop social
work methods in the prevention and promotion of health.
• To acquire knowledge of various treatments approaches and the skill to apply
the same to meet mental health needs of the people.
• To appreciate the preventive and promotive approaches to mental health and
develop the ability to apply it.
• To critically review the institutional approaches and the need for non-institutional
alternatives.
• To understand the application of mental health interventions in special settings.

Unit I (12 hrs)


Life – Stress and Coping: Definition of stress and coping. Analysis of Stress and Mental
health problems among children, adolescents, women, occupational groups, workers and
the elderly. Coping with stress and crisis, use of internal and external resources in coping.

Unit II (12 hrs)


Social work treatment – Theory and Models
Psychoanalytical, Psycho-social, Transactional Analysis, Life Model, Family
Centred treatment, Tasks Centred, Crisis intervention, Behaviour modification,
Cognitive therapy, Strength Based/ Resilience Model, Evidence Based Practice

272
Unit III (12 hrs)
Psychiatric Social Work in special settings:
a) Child mental health and psychiatric social work practice - social work practice in
child guidance clinic. Prevention and promotive mental health interventions in family,
school, neighborhood and community settings.
b) Social work practice in treatment centres for substance abuse – deaddiction, recovery,
relapse prevention and aftercare centres.

Unit IV (12 hrs)


c) Psychiatric Social Work Practice in crisis intervention centres and with
special groups such as rape victims and HIV / AIDS patients.
d) Disaster mental health and psychosocial care – Psychosocial care in response to
disasters, Psychosocial care in recent disasters in India. Stress management of care
givers. Disaster preparedness. Training for psychosocial care.
e) Geriatric Mental health – Mental health Interventions and prevention of mental health
problems among the elderly and their families. Dealing with stress of caregivers.

Unit V (12 hrs)


Mental health Policies and Legislation in India; National Mental Health programmes.
Rights of the mentally ill. Designing and implementing programmes that promote mental
health in communities.
Research – single case evaluation; qualitative and action research on mental health issues;
monitoring and evaluation programmes; case study of models of mental health care in
Chennai – TTK Hospitals, Banyan and SCARF.

References:
1. Ahuja, Niraj (2002) A Short textbook of Psychiatry, Jaypee Brothers Medical
Publishers Ltd., New Delhi.
2. Berriors G.E. & Dawson J.H. (1983) Treatment and management in adult psychiatry;
Bailliere Tindall, London.
3.Bharat S. Desai M (eds) (1991) Research on family with problems in India, issues and
implication. Vol.1&2, unit for family studies.Mumbai Tata Institute of Social Sciences.
4.Lakshminaraya, Rashmi, Srinivasa Murthy, R., Diaz Joseph O. Prewitt, Editors (2004)
Disaster Mental Health In India, Indian Red Cross Society
5.DGHS (190) National mental health programme for India Progress report (1982 – 90)
DGHS New Delhi
6. Ellis, Albert (1967) Reason and emotion in Psychotherapy. NY; Lyle Stuart.
Gerald Caplin (1961) An approach to community Mental Heatlh, Grun and Straton
7.Goldstein E. (1984) Ego psychology and social work practice Free Press
8. Govt. of India (1982) National Mental Health Program for India, New Delhi Ministry
of Health and Family Welfare
9.Goldstein H. (!979) Social Work Practice a unitary approach Caroloine:University of
South Caroline Press.
10 Hartman and Lairdj (1983) Family Centered Social Work Practice, The Free Press. A
Division of Macmillan, New York.

273
11. Jehu, Derek et al (!972) Behaviour modification in social work : London, Wiley –
Inter science.
12 Kaplan, H.L. Freedman A.M. & Sadock b.J. (1980) Comprehensive Text book of
Psychiatry (3rd ed.) vols. 1, 2 & 3. Wiliams & Wilkins, Baltimore / London.
13. Kappur, N. Sheppard, Ralph & Renate (eds.) (1993) Child Mental Health –
Proceedings of Indo-US Symposium NIMHANS & ADAMHA
14. Levant Ronad F (1984) Family therapy, Prentice Hall of India PVT Ltd.
15. Mane P. & Gandevia K. (eds) (1992) Mental Health in India. Issues and
concerns, Mumbai, Tata Institute of Social Sciences.
16. Roberts, Roberts W & Roberts H (1970) Theories of Social Casework, Chicago,
University of Chicago Press.
17.Turner (ED) Turner F (ED) 1983 Social Work Treatment – The Free Press Differential
Diagnosis and Treatment in Social Work. The free Press. Third Edition.
18.Verma, Ratna (1991) Psychiatric Social Work In India, Sage Publications, New
Delhi,.
19.World Health Organization (1992) Innovative Approaches in Mental Health Care.
Psycho Social Interventions and Case Management. Division of Mental Health Geneva

ELECTIVE – I
Paper – XVII – Health Information and Health Education

Total Teaching Hours : 60


Objectives
• To understand critical reflection, action in relation to health problems
• To develop Scientific attitude to health conditions
Unit I (12 Hrs)
Concept of health, hygiene, mental health, community mental health, community
psychiatry, normality and abnormality.
Changing perspective of health care and social work practice in the field of health.
Programs for meeting health care problems: review of various health care provisions.
Concept of primary health care, principles and approaches of PHC.

Unit II (12 Hrs)


Symptoms, causes, prevention, treatment and control of the following diseases:
Major communicable diseases - Leprosy, TB, STD, Poliomyelitis, malaria, cholera,
typhoid, diarrhea and AIDS.
Major non-communicable diseases: cancer, diabetes, Hypertension and Cardiac disorder.

Unit III (12 Hrs)


Physical disabilities: visual impairment, hearing impairment, speech impairment, and
locomotor handicap.
Clinical manifestation of psychoses, neuroses, psychosomatic disorders, mental
retardation, epilepsy, alcoholism and drug addiction.
Clinical manifestations of malnutrition: deficiency disorders.

274
Unit IV (12 Hrs)
Health work in the community; identifying basic health problems and interest
groups. Work with existing health services, governmental, non-governmental.
Organize health education programmes in the community.
Role of social work in community health.

Unit V 12 Hrs)
Health Education Workshop – Health Education – definitions, principles,
preparation and use of audio visual aids, Folklore, Puppets, Vllupattu, Flannel
Graph, Flipchart, Flash cards, drawing cartoons, posters and charts. Role play.
Low cost nutritive food domonstration.

References :
1.Miller R.S. Primary Health Care More Than Medicine; 1982 Prentice Hall Inc., London
2. Miller D. Dimensions of Community Health; 1975 C. Brown Co. Publications, Iowa.
3.Mohan Rao (Ed) Disinvesting in Health - The World Bank's Prescriptions 1995 for
Health
4. Nanda V.K. 1997 Health Education; Anmol Publications, Delhi.
5.Pandey R & Kanhere V. Activists Handbook of Occupational Health & Safety; 1997
Society for Participatory Research in Asia, Delhi.
6.Park J. E & Park K. Text book of Preventive and Social Medicine; 1997 M/s.
Banarsidas Bhanot, Jabalpur.
7. Phillips D.R Primary Health Care - Health and Health Care in the Third World
8. Saleebey, Dennis, (ed) (2006), The Strengths Perspective in Social Work Practice, 4th ed,
Pearson Education, New York
9. Sekar, K. Parthasarathy,R., Muralidhar,D. Chandrasekhar Rao (2007) Handbook of
Psychiatric Social Work, NIMHANS, Bangalore
10.Smith B.C. Community Health - An Epidemiological Approach; 1978 McMillan
Publishing Co. New York.
11. WHO, 1972 Health Hazards in the Human Environment, WHO, Geneva

Paper – XIX – Research Project

Every student is required to complete a research project report under the supervision
and guidance of a Faculty of the Department who will guide the students on topics elated
to Social Work education, practice, or some aspects of the field of specialization chosen
by him / her. A student is required a submit two copies of the project report to the college
on or before March 31st, of which the college should forward one copy to the University
at least 15 days before to commencement of examinations. The total credits for Research
Project is Four . Total Marks 100. Project Report - Report presentation : 80 Evaluation
by External only. Viva voce carries : 20 (Both Internal and External)

275
Block Placement
After satisfactory completion of concurrent field work during the two academic years
and after the Final University Examination, every student of the M.SW (Second year) is
placed for Block Field Work for a period of 30 days for a full- time work in an
approved agency or project in or outside Tamil Nadu. The Department approves
agencies / projects form amongst a large number of them, keeping in mind the
availability of learning opportunities for the students. All expenses in this connection
have to be borne by the students themselves. The purpose of Block Field work is to
broaden the student’s perspectives of development and welfare concerns, offer pre-
employment work experiences, to him/.her and enable this/her to assume professional
responsibilities after graduation. A students is not eligible for the degree unless he/she
had completed Block Field Work to the satisfaction of the Department. At the conclusion
of Block Field Practicum Agency Supervisor sends a confidential Report about the
performance of the student to the Department. The students in his /her part also submits a
comprehensive report of the Block Field practicum. It carries two credits.
.

276
21. M.A. DEGREE COURSE IN TAMIZHIAL
SYLLABUS
_‹wh« gUt«

jhŸ 9 - r§f ïy¡»a«-I
 Minimum Entry requirements for the course/ Eligibility
Pre-requisities
Objectives of the
Course


Course Outline Unit 1 

 

Unit 2 



Unit 3 



Unit 4 



Unit 5 


C - Core; E - Elective; ED – Extra disciplinary


(B) Bibliography:
(1)  


Recommended Texts :



 










(2)  
Reference Books : 




(3) Website, e-learning resources.

277
jhŸ 10 -
                       

 Minimum Entry requirements for the course/ Eligibility


Pre-requisities
Objectives of the
Course
              
         
Course Outline Unit 1

      
Unit 2

      
Unit 3

      
Unit 4

        
Unit 5
C - Core; E - Elective; ED – Extra disciplinary
(B) Bibliography:
(1) 







 




 ïs«óuz® -
ciu) 

Recommended Texts :



ciuÆš Édh¡fŸ miktJ jÉ®¡f¥g£lJ
(2)  
Reference Books :

278








(3) Website, e-learning resources.

jhŸ 11 - 

 Minimum Entry requirements for the course/ Eligibility


Pre-requisities
Objectives of the
Course

 
Course Outline Unit 1
 

Unit 2
 

Unit 3
 

Unit 4

279
 

Unit 5
C - Core; E - Elective; ED – Extra disciplinary
(B) Bibliography:
(1) 

 
nrdhtiua«
Recommended Texts :



ciuÆš Édh¡fŸ miktJ jÉ®¡f¥g£lJ
(2) 



Reference Books :










(3) Website, e-learning resources.

280
jhŸ 1 2 -


 Minimum Entry requirements for the course/ Eligibility


Pre-requisities
Objectives of the
Course
 
  
Course Outline Unit 
1 
 
 
Unit 
2 







 
Unit 
3 






 
Unit 
4 




281

 
Unit 
5 









C - Core; E - Elective; ED – Extra disciplinary

282
(B) Bibliography

(1)  

Reference Books : 



ïaY¡F  m©zh
gšfiy¡fHf«








 r.ghÞfu‹ - jÄÊš fÂ¥bgh¿Æaš fÂ¥bgh¿Æš jÄœ - ckh gâ¥gf«,


jŠir.
9. Kh. M©nlh Õ£l® - jÄG« fÂ¥bgh¿í« f‰gf« ò¤jfhya«.
10. Rg. â©z¥g‹ - fÂÅí« jÄœ¡f‰ã¤jY«

(3) Website, e-learning resources.

283
 TLjš ghl¥ ãÇî - 1
             
                                  

  

                                 



















284












 
 

 
 





 

285





































 

286







 
 

287
eh‹fh« gUt«
jhŸ 1 3 - r§f ïy¡»a«  -II

   Minimum Entry requirements for the course/ Eligibility


Pre-requisities
Objectives of the
Course
                              
    
Course Outline Unit
1
 áWghzh‰W¥gil
Unit 2
         

Unit 3
                

Unit 4
       

Unit 5
C - Core; E - Elective; ED – Extra disciplinary
(B) Bibliography:
(1) 

                  


                   
Recommended Texts : 

(2)  


Reference Books : 







(3) Website, e-learning resources.

288
jhŸ 1 4 - bjhšfh¥ãa« - vG¤jâfhu«  

 Minimum Entry requirements for the course/ Eligibility


Pre-requisities
Objectives of the
Course
              
          
Course Outline Unit 1


          
Unit 2

         
Unit 3

                
Unit 4

 
Unit 5
C - Core; E - Elective; ED – Extra disciplinary
(B) Bibliography:
(1)             

Recommended Texts :





 ciuÆÈUªJ Édh¡fŸ miktJ jÉ®¡f¥g£lJ.
( 2) 

Reference Books : 



(3) Website, e-learning resources.

289
290
jhŸ 15 - bjhšfh¥ãa« - brhšyâfhu« 

 Minimum Entry requirements for the course/ Eligibility


Pre-requisities
Objectives of the
Course


Course Outline Unit 1 


 
Unit 2

 
Unit 3

 
Unit 4

 
Unit 5
C - Core; E - Elective; ED – Extra disciplinary
(B) Bibliography:
(1)  
 nrdhtiua


Recommended Texts :

ciuÆÈUªJ Édh¡fŸ miktJ jÉ®¡f¥g£lJ.



(2) 



Reference Books :








291
                                     
(3) Website, e-learning resources.

ÉU¥g¥ghl«  

             





















292






























ÉU¥g¥ghl« 


 Minimum Entry requirements for the course/ Eligibility



Pre-
requisiti
es
Objecti
ves of
the
Course

293
 
  
 Unit 
 
1


Course

Outline 




 
 
Unit 
2 





 
Unit 
3 








 
Unit 
4 

 
Unit 
5 





294
C - Core; E - Elective; ED – Extra disciplinary
(B) Bibliography:
(1)  kh.gh. FUrhÄ - ïjÊaš fiy
Recommended Texts : 
(2)  
Reference Books : 



(3) Website, e-learning resources.

A.C.F.2009

295
296
297

Das könnte Ihnen auch gefallen